156284676-sp-1275-civil-design-criteria-manual.pdf
This document was uploaded by user and they confirmed that they have the permission to share it. If you are author or own the copyright of this book, please report to us by using this DMCA report form. Report DMCA
Overview
Download & View 156284676-sp-1275-civil-design-criteria-manual.pdf as PDF for free.
More details
- Words: 39,627
- Pages: 184
Petroleum Development Oman L.L.C.,
UNRESTRICTED June 2004
Document ID: SP-1275 Filing key: 1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works
Design Criteria Manual
SP-1275 (OLD ERD 17-04)
This document is the property of Petroleum Development Oman, LLC. Neither the whole nor any part of this document may be disclosed to others or reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form by any means (electronic, mechanical, reprographic recording or otherwise) without prior written consent of the owner.
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Authorised For Issue June 2004
Signed:............................................................ Ali Nasser Al Jahadhamy, TTO/2 (UEC) CFDH, Civil Engineering
The following is a brief summary of the recent revisions to this document. Details of all revisions prior to these are held on file by the issuing department.
Version No. Revision 0
Date
Author
Scope / Remarks
May ‘90
W. Von Schmidt, TTH/4
First Issue
Revision 1
April ‘95
BEZ/5
Updated to standard format
Version 1.0
June ‘04
Ali Nasser Al Jahadhamy, TTO/2 (UEC)
Converted to Specification as per PDO policy and minor changes to the text
SP-1275
Page i
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Contents Authorised For Issue June 2004................................................................................................ i Contents ..................................................................................................................................... ii 1.0 Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 1 1.1 Purpose............................................................................................................................. 1 1.2 User Guidelines................................................................................................................ 1 1.3 Changes to the Specification............................................................................................ 1 1.4 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes ............................................................. 2 1.4.1 PDO Standards................................................................................................ 2 1.4.2 Omani Standards ............................................................................................. 3 1.4.3 International Standards ................................................................................... 3 1.4.4 SIEP / Shell GSI Standards ............................................................................. 5 1.5 Compliance with Standards ............................................................................................. 5 2.0 Scope ..................................................................................................................................... 6 2.1 General............................................................................................................................. 6 2.2 Units of Measurement...................................................................................................... 6 2.3 Civil Design Requirements .............................................................................................. 7 2.3.1 Basic Information............................................................................................ 7 2.3.2 Soil Investigation ............................................................................................ 7 2.3.2.1 Scope of Investigation .................................................................................... 8 2.3.2.2 Soil Investigation Report................................................................................ 9 2.3.3 Preliminary Civil Design................................................................................. 9 2.3.4 Final Civil Design ......................................................................................... 10 2.3.5 Structural Design........................................................................................... 11 2.3.5.1 Steelwork...................................................................................................... 11 2.3.5.2 Concrete ....................................................................................................... 12 2.3.5.3 Block Work .................................................................................................. 15 2.3.6 Engineering Drawings................................................................................... 16 2.3.7 Design Requirements for Specific Buildings ................................................ 20 2.3.8 Design Requirements for Pipe Supports ....................................................... 20 2.4 Design Loads ................................................................................................................. 20 2.4.1 Dead Loads ................................................................................................... 20 2.4.2 Live Loads..................................................................................................... 21 2.4.3 Wind Loading ............................................................................................... 21 2.4.4 Design Loading For Crane Gantry Girders ................................................... 23 2.4.5 Dynamic Loads ............................................................................................. 24 2.4.6 Load Combinations ....................................................................................... 24 2.5 Climatic Aspects of Buildings ....................................................................................... 24 2.5.1 Climatic Design Criteria................................................................................ 25 2.5.2 Siting & Orientation...................................................................................... 25 2.6 Means of Escape and Fire Protection............................................................................. 29 2.7 Minimum Building Requirements.................................................................................. 29 2.7.1 PDO Buildings .............................................................................................. 29 2.7.1.1 PDO Office Buildings .................................................................................. 29 2.7.1.2 PDO Sleeping Accommodation ................................................................... 30 2.7.1.3 PDO Ablution Requirements........................................................................ 30 2.7.2 Contractors Buildings ................................................................................... 30 2.7.2.1 Contractors SS Accommodation & Ablution Facilities................................ 30 2.7.2.2 Contractors JS/JE Accommodation & Ablution Facilities ........................... 31 2.7.2.3 Contractors Kitchen and Messing Facilities................................................. 31 2.8 Building Elements and Finishes..................................................................................... 38 2.8.1 Walls ............................................................................................................. 38 2.8.1.1 Structural Loading........................................................................................ 38 2.8.1.2 Thermal Requirements ................................................................................. 39 June 2004
Page ii
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
2.8.1.3 Noise Requirements......................................................................................39 2.8.1.4 Thermal Movements / Structural Freedom ...................................................39 2.8.1.5 Economic Aspects ........................................................................................39 2.8.1.6 Wall Finishes ................................................................................................40 2.8.2 Floors.............................................................................................................40 2.8.2.1 External Floors & Hard standings ................................................................40 2.8.2.2 Internal Floors...............................................................................................40 2.8.2.3 Floor Finishes ...............................................................................................41 2.8.3 Skirting ..........................................................................................................41 2.8.4 Ceilings..........................................................................................................41 2.8.5 Doors .............................................................................................................41 2.8.6 Windows........................................................................................................41 2.8.7 Ironmongery ..................................................................................................41 2.9 Staircases and Platforms.................................................................................................41 2.9.1 Flow Capacities of Staircases ........................................................................42 2.9.2 Riser / Going Relationship ............................................................................42 2.9.3 Fire Rating for Structures ..............................................................................45 2.10 Roofs ...................................................................................................................50 2.10.1 Thermal Requirement ....................................................................................50 2.10.2 Water Discharge ............................................................................................50 2.10.3 Flat Roofs ......................................................................................................50 2.10.4 Pitched Roofs ................................................................................................51 2.10.5 Roof Sheeting ................................................................................................51 2.11 Built-in-Furniture ................................................................................................52 2.12 Security ...............................................................................................................52 2.12.1 Fencing and Gates .........................................................................................52 2.13 Paint Finish & Colour .........................................................................................55 2.13.1 External Surfaces...........................................................................................55 2.13.2 Internal Surfaces............................................................................................55 2.14 External Works ...................................................................................................55 2.14.1 Site Preparation .............................................................................................55 2.14.2 Landscaping...................................................................................................56 2.14.2.1 Hard Landscaping.......................................................................................56 2.14.2.2 Soft Landscaping ........................................................................................56 2.14.2.3 Screening Requirements .............................................................................56 2.14.3 Roads .............................................................................................................56 2.14.3.1 Internal Access Road ..................................................................................56 2.14.3.2 External Access Roads ...............................................................................57 2.14.4 Car Parks .......................................................................................................58 2.14.4.1 Standard Parking Layout ............................................................................58 2.14.4.2 Car Parks Construction ...............................................................................58 2.14.4.3 Road Signs & Markings..............................................................................58 2.14.5 Materials Storage Yards ................................................................................66 2.14.6 Footpaths .......................................................................................................66 2.14.6.1 Footpath Dimensions ..................................................................................66 2.14.6.2 Footpath Construction ................................................................................66 2.14.7 Well Location and Flow/Bulk Line Layout...................................................66 2.14.7.1 Piping Corridors .........................................................................................68 2.15 Building Services Design Requirements.............................................................68 2.15.1 Manufacturers & Vendors .............................................................................68 2.15.2 Specification & Drawings .............................................................................68 2.15.3 As Built Drawings .........................................................................................69 2.15.4 External Services ...........................................................................................69 2.16 Air-Conditioning & Ventilation..........................................................................69 2.16.1 Design Criteria for Air Conditioning & Ventilation Works..........................70 2.16.1.1 Outdoor Conditions ....................................................................................70 2.16.1.2 Indoor Conditions .......................................................................................70 2.16.1.3 Equipment Overcapacity.............................................................................70 2.16.2 Chilled Water ................................................................................................70 SP-1275
Page iii
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.16.2.1 Chiller compounds & Equipment............................................................... 70 2.16.2.2 Controls ...................................................................................................... 71 2.16.2.3 Pipe work.................................................................................................... 71 2.16.3 Specialist Areas............................................................................................. 71 2.16.3.1 Battery rooms ............................................................................................. 71 2.16.3.2 Electrical Substations & Switch Houses .................................................... 72 2.16.3.3 Gas Bottle Stores ........................................................................................ 72 2.16.3.4 Kitchens...................................................................................................... 73 2.16.3.5 Laboratories................................................................................................ 73 2.16.3.6 Temporary Buildings.................................................................................. 74 2.16.4 Condensate Drains ........................................................................................ 74 2.16.5 Refrigerant Pipe work ................................................................................... 74 2.16.6 Automatic Shutdown..................................................................................... 74 2.16.7 Legionnaires Disease .................................................................................... 74 2.17 Plumbing............................................................................................................. 74 2.17.1 Potable Water................................................................................................ 75 2.17.1.1 Water Demand............................................................................................ 75 2.17.1.2 Isolating Valves, Air Valves, Washouts..................................................... 75 2.17.1.3 Water Meters .............................................................................................. 76 2.17.1.4 Storage........................................................................................................ 76 2.17.1.5 Pumping ..................................................................................................... 76 2.17.1.6 Sterilisation................................................................................................. 76 2.17.2 Domestic Hot & Cold Water............................................................................... 76 2.17.2.1 Water Consumption.................................................................................... 76 2.17.2.2 Water Systems............................................................................................ 77 2.17.2.3 Isolation...................................................................................................... 77 2.17.2.4 Insulation.................................................................................................... 77 2.17.2.5 Sterilisation................................................................................................. 77 2.17.2.6 Flush Control Valves.................................................................................. 77 2.17.2.7 Water Closet spray Assemblies .................................................................. 78 2.17.2.8 Emergency Showers ................................................................................... 78 2.17.2.9 Emergency Eye Wash Stations................................................................... 78 2.17.2.10 Hot Water Service Dead legs ................................................................... 78 2.17.3 Drainage ........................................................................................................ 78 2.17.4 Sewerage ....................................................................................................... 78 2.17.4.1 Flow Rates.................................................................................................. 79 2.17.4.2 Minimum Pipe Diameters........................................................................... 79 2.17.4.3 Location of Manholes................................................................................. 79 2.17.4.4 Interceptors................................................................................................. 79 2.17.4.5 Pipe work Under Buildings ........................................................................ 79 2.17.4.6 Structural Penetrations ............................................................................... 80 2.17.4.7 Connection to Existing Sewers................................................................... 80 2.17.4.8 Sewage Pumping Stations .......................................................................... 80 2.17.5 Liquid Petroleum Gas ................................................................................... 80 2.17.5.1 Gas Cylinder Stores.................................................................................... 80 2.17.5.2 Regulators................................................................................................... 80 2.17.5.3 Emergency Shutdown................................................................................. 80 2.17.5.4 Domestic Installations ................................................................................ 81 2.17.6 Laboratory Piped Services ............................................................................ 81 2.17.6.1 Pipe work.................................................................................................... 81 2.17.6.2 Hot and Cold Water.................................................................................... 81 2.17.6.3 Distilled Water ........................................................................................... 81 2.17.6.4 Compressed Air.......................................................................................... 81 2.17.6.5 Vacuum ...................................................................................................... 81 2.17.6.6 Special Gases.............................................................................................. 81 2.17.7 Fire Fighting Water....................................................................................... 82 2.17.7.1 Hose reels ................................................................................................... 83 2.17.7.2 Hydrants ..................................................................................................... 83 2.17.7.3 Fire Storage Tanks...................................................................................... 83 June 2004
Page iv
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
2.17.7.4 Fire Pumps ..................................................................................................83 2.17.8 Irrigation........................................................................................................83 2.17.8.1 Demand.......................................................................................................84 2.17.8.2 System Components ...................................................................................84 2.17.8.3 Storage ........................................................................................................85 2.17.8.4 Pumping & Filtration ..................................................................................85 2.17.8.5 Control Systems..........................................................................................85 2.17.8.6 Pipe work Identification .............................................................................85 2.17.8.7 Sprinklers....................................................................................................85 2.17.8.8 Emitter Allocations .....................................................................................85 2.17.9 Swimming Pools............................................................................................86 2.18 Sewage Treatment...............................................................................................86 2.18.1 Location of STP.............................................................................................87 2.18.2 Pollution Load ...............................................................................................87 2.18.3 Sewage Treatment Plant ................................................................................87 2.18.4 Treated Effluent Standard..............................................................................89 2.18.5 Facultative Ponds ..........................................................................................91 2.18.6 Septic Tanks ..................................................................................................91 2.18.7 Hydrocarbon Disposal Pits ............................................................................92 2.19 Electrical Services...............................................................................................92 2.19.1 Electrical Supply ...........................................................................................93 2.19.1.1 Rated Voltage & Frequency .......................................................................93 2.19.1.2 Loads ..........................................................................................................93 2.19.1.3 Voltage Drop ..............................................................................................93 2.19.1.4 Underground Cable De rating.....................................................................94 2.19.1.5 Underground Cables ...................................................................................95 2.19.1.6 Earthing ......................................................................................................95 2.19.2 Small Power ..................................................................................................95 2.19.2.1 Power Supply..............................................................................................96 2.19.2.2 Power Consumption....................................................................................96 2.19.2.3 Voltage Drop ..............................................................................................97 2.19.2.4 Cables .........................................................................................................97 2.19.2.5 Conduit & Trunking ...................................................................................97 2.19.2.6 Earthing & Bonding....................................................................................97 2.19.3 Indoor Lighting..............................................................................................97 2.19.3.1 Luminaries ..................................................................................................98 2.19.4 Emergency Lighting ......................................................................................98 2.19.4.1 Escape Route Lighting................................................................................99 2.19.4.2 Exit Lighting...............................................................................................99 2.19.4.3 Vital Lighting..............................................................................................99 2.19.5 Outdoor Lighting...........................................................................................99 2.19.5.1 Lighting Fixtures ......................................................................................100 2.19.5.2 Illumination Levels ...................................................................................100 2.20 Fire Detection & Alarm ....................................................................................100 2.20.1 Operational Criteria .....................................................................................100 2.20.2 Cables ..........................................................................................................101 2.21 Lightning Protection .........................................................................................102 2.22 Telecom Networks ............................................................................................102 2.22.1 Data Communications Networks.................................................................103 2.22.2 Television & Video Networks.....................................................................103 2.22.3 Audio Systems.............................................................................................103 2.22.4 Nurse Call Systems......................................................................................103 Appendices .............................................................................................................................104 Appendix A: Glossary of Definitions & Abbreviations.....................................................105 A.1 General Definitions & Terminology .................................................................105 A.2 Abbreviations ....................................................................................................106 A.3 Abbreviations for Building Types.....................................................................110 A.4 Abbreviations for Room Types.........................................................................116 SP-1275
Page v
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix B: Weights of General Building Materials ....................................................... 120 Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes .................................................................... 123 Appendix D: Wall Finishes ............................................................................................... 138 Appendix E: Floor Finishes............................................................................................... 140 Appendix F: Skirting Types .............................................................................................. 142 Appendix G: Ceilings ........................................................................................................ 143 Appendix H: Door Types .................................................................................................. 144 Appendix I: Window Types (Glazing) .............................................................................. 145 Appendix J: Ironmongeries ............................................................................................... 146 Appendix K: Internal Environment Design Criteria.......................................................... 160 Appendix L: Electrical Requirements................................................................................ 168 Appendix M: SP User - Comment Form ........................................................................... 177
June 2004
Page vi
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
1.0
Introduction
1.1
Purpose
Version 1.0
The purpose of this document is to specify the minimum requirements and recommendations for “Structural Design and Detail Engineering of Civil and Building Works” and is intended for use by PDO and its nominated Consultants and Contractors for the development and operation of Company facilities. This specification is intended to:
1.2
-
Set the Company standards for facilities along the facilities life cycle.
-
Disseminate and record facilities related information, experience and procedures.
User Guidelines This Specification supersedes the ERD-17-04 ‘Civil & Building Design Criteria Manual’. Other than the conversion or formatting, the following are the main changes to this document. -
Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes are revised.
-
Tanking Details for the Concrete Protection Works are revised
-
Accommodation facility requirements for PDO and Contractors camps in section 2.7 and its subsections are revised
-
Staircases & Platforms requirements in section 2.9 revised and added more.
-
Mandatory Warning Sign requirement for the Graded/Tarmac Transition are added as new in section 2.14.3
-
Graded Road section details (Fig 4) and its material specifications are revised.
For all HSE requirements, the User should refer the CP-122 ‘Code of Practice for Health, Safety and Environmental Protection’ and other documents referenced therein.
1.3
Changes to the Specification Custodian of this document is the Corporate Functional Discipline Head (CFDH) of Civil Engineering. Any User of this document, who encounters an inaccuracy or ambiguity, is requested to notify the CFDH using the SP user-comment form provided in Appendix-M. Reviews and modifications or changes to the specification will normally be made by the CFDH every four years or earlier when justified.
SP-1275
Page 1
June 2004
Version 1.0
1.4
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes This Specification shall be read in conjunction with the latest revisions of the following Standards, Specifications and Codes.
1.4.1
PDO Standards
June 2004
PDO-ERD-00-01
:
PDO Guide to Engineering Standards & Procedures
PDO-ERD-00-06
:
Preparation & Content of Engineering Drawings
IP 15
:
Institute of Petroleum Model Code of Safe Practice Part 15 – Area Classification Code for Petroleum Installations
SP-1273
:
Specification for Civil & Buildings - ‘Standard Drawing Index’
SP-1278
:
Specification for Site Selection and Soil Investigation Works – ‘Engineering Guidelines Manual’
SP-1274
:
Specification for Civil & Building Construction ‘Guideline to Materials Testing’
SP-1279
:
Specification for Civil & Building Construction
SP-1285
:
Specification for Civil & Building’s Utility Services
SP-1280
:
Specification for Swimming Pools – ‘Design & Construction Guidelines’
SP-1281
:
Specification for Roads – ‘Guide to Safe Road Works’
SP-1282
:
Specification for Reinforced Concrete – ‘Production & Construction Guidelines’
SP 1283
:
Specification for Standard Sunshades – ‘Design Requirements & Standard Drawings’
SP-1276
:
Specification for Standard Control Building – ‘Design Requirements & Standard Drawings’
SP-1099
:
Specification for Electrical Installation Practice
SP-1104
:
Specification for Electrical Safety Rules.
SP-1105
:
Specification for Electrical Standard Drawings List.
SP-1109
:
Specification for Earthing & Bonding.
SP-1110
:
Specification for Electrical Supplies in Mobile Camps.
SP-1127
:
Plant Equipment Layout Specifications
PDO-ERD-71-01
:
Underground & Internal Telephone Cable Networks.
SP-1075
:
Specification for Fire & Explosion Management
Page 2
-
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
1.4.2
1.4.3
SP-1275
Version 1.0
SP-1284
:
Specification for Signs & Signboards – ‘Standard Signs Catalogue’
SP-1277
:
Specification for Transportable Accommodation Units – ‘Design Requirements & Standard Drawings’
CP122
:
Code of Practice for ‘Health, Safety & Environmental Protection’
SP-1231
:
Health, Safety & (Occupational Health)
PGSC List
:
Product Group Service Codes List for Civil Products
Environment
Specification
Omani Standards Highway Design Manual
:
Sultanate of Oman - Ministry of Communications
General Specification for Roads
:
Sultanate of Oman - Ministry of Communications
Limits of Reuse & discharge of Waste Water
:
Ministry of Environment
Bye-Laws & Ordinances
:
Sultanate of Oman - Royal Oman Police
Street Names & Property Numbering Signs
:
Sultanate of Oman – Capital Municipality
International Standards BS 449
:
Specification for the use of Structural Steel in Buildings.
BS 648
:
Schedule of weights of building materials
BS 2573
:
Rules for the design of cranes
BS 3202
:
Laboratory Furniture & Fittings
BS 4800
:
Schedule of Paint Colours for building purpose
BS 5266
:
Emergency Lighting
BS 5268
:
Structural Use of Timber.
BS 5482
:
Code of Practice for Domestic Butane and Propane gas burning installations
BS 5588
:
Fire Precaution in the Design, Construction and use of buildings
BS 5628
:
Code of Practice for the Use of Masonry.
BS 5925
:
Code of Practice for ventilation, principles and designing for natural ventilation
BS 5839
:
Fire detection and Alarm systems for buildings
Page 3
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
BS 5930
:
Code of Practice for Site Investigations.
BS 5950
:
Structural Use of Steelwork in Buildings.
BS 6399
:
Loading for Building.
BS 6651
:
Code of Practice for Protection of Structures against Lightning
BS 6700
:
Specification for Design, Installation, Testing & Maintenance of services supplying water for domestic use within buildings & their Cartilages.
BS 7543
:
Guide to durability of buildings and building elements products and components
BS 7668
:
Specification for weldable structural steels. Hot finished structural hollow sections
BS 8004
:
Code of Practice for Foundations.
BS 8110
:
Structural Use of Concrete.
BS 8206
:
Code of Practice for Artificial Lighting
BS 8666
:
Specification for scheduling, dimensioning, bending and cutting of steel reinforcement for concrete
BS EN 54
:
Fire detection and Fire Alarm system
BS EN 197
:
Cement composition, specification criteria for common cements
BS EN 752
:
Drain & Sewer systems outside buildings
BS EN ISO 4066
:
Construction drawings bar scheduling
BS EN 10025
:
Hot rolled products of non alloy structural steels
BS EN 10210
:
Hot Finished Structural Hollow Sections of non alloy and fine grain structural steels
BS EN 12056
:
Gravity Drainage systems inside buildings
BS EN 13150
:
Work Benches for Laboratories. Requirements and Test Methods
BS ISO 15686
:
Buildings and Constructed assets – Planning, General Principles and Prediction Service Life Procedures
BS ISO 8995
:
Lighting of Indoor Work Places
CP 3
:
Code of Basic Data for the Design of Building.
CP 2012
:
Code of Practice for Foundations for Machinery
ASHRAE
:
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Airconditioning Engineers Inc. (ASHRAE).
June 2004
Page 4
and
conformity
Dimensions, Safety
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
1.4.4
1.5
Version 1.0
CIBSE
:
Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) Guides.
CARRIER
:
Carrier Air-conditioning Co. conditioning System Design.
IEE
:
Institution of Electrical Engineers (IEE) Regulations for Electrical Installations.
IEC 60364
:
Electrical Installation of Buildings
IEC 60439-4
:
Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies
DIN 57510 / VDE 0510
:
Specifications Equipment.
for
Handbook
Accommodation
for
and
Air-
Battery
SIEP / Shell GSI Standards DEP 31.76.10.10-Gen.
:
Heating, Ventilation and Air-Conditioning of Plant Buildings
DEP 31.76.10.11-Gen.
:
Installation, Testing, Balancing & Commissioning of HVAC systems
DEP 32.31.50.31-Gen.
:
Analyser Houses
DEP 33.64.10.10-Gen.
:
Electrical Engineering Guidelines
DEP 33.65.50.31-Gen.
:
Static DC Uninterruptible Power Supply (DC UPS) Units.
DEP 34.00.01.30-Gen.
:
Minimum Requirements for Structural Design and Engineering
DEP 34.17.00.32-Gen.
:
Design and Engineering of Buildings
DEP 34.17.10.30-Gen.
:
Reinforced Control Buildings (Explosive Proof)
DEP 34.17.10.31-Gen.
:
Laboratories
DEP 34.19.20.11-Gen.
:
Fire Hazards and Fireproofing/cold splash protection of steel structures
DEP 34.28.00.31-Gen.
:
Steel Structures
DEP 80.00.10.10-Gen.
:
Area Classification (Amendment / Supplement to IP 15)
Compliance with Standards Any deviations from this part of Specifications shall be subject to Company approval and shall be advised in writing to the Custodian. In all cases the Company shall determine the adequacy of the design carried out and Works executed by the Contractor in accordance with this Specifications.
SP-1275
Page 5
June 2004
Version 1.0
2.0
Scope
2.1
General
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
This Specification is an Engineering Guidelines for the Company Civil & Building Facilities and includes applicable design and detailing data and requirements.
2.2
Units of Measurement In general the SI Units of Measurements shall apply. In addition, the following are used in this document. Acidity / Alkalinity of Water
:
pH
Biochemical oxygen demand
:
BOD
Dimension
:
metre, millimetre
Electrical resistance
:
ohms
Flow
:
litres per second
Force
:
Newton N = 0.9807 kg
Frequency
:
hertz Hz
Power
:
watt, kilowatt
W, kW
Pressure
:
kilopascals (gauge)
kPa, kPa(g)
Atmospheres bar
100 kPa
m, mm
l/s
Noise
:
decibel ‘A’ scale
dBA
Refrigeration :
:
kilowatt
kW
:
Tons of refrigeration
TR = 3.517 kW
Relative Humidity
:
RH
Temperature
:
degrees Celsius
0
Velocity
:
metres per second
m/s
Weight
:
gram, kilogram
g, kg
June 2004
Page 6
C
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.3
Civil Design Requirements
2.3.1
Basic Information
Version 1.0
The Company should provide the information required to carry out the project to the Consultant in the following form: -
Scope of works
-
Project specification
-
Location drawing(s)
The information should include, but not be limited to, the following: -
The intended use of the structure(s) or project
-
The required Design Life of the structure or various structures indicating whether Permanent, Semi-permanent or Temporary (as defined in Appendix A section A.1 of this document).
-
Any information on existing site surveys, site investigations etc. that may be available.
The Consultant shall bear in mind the following: Building appearance shall conform to established PDO requirements, local customs, and if applicable, existing buildings. Engineering drawings shall comply with PDO-ERD-00-06 ‘Preparation & Content of Engineering Drawings’ and shall be issued in the following stages: -
Preliminary
-
Final (Tender for comment)
-
Tender
-
Contract
-
Working (for construction)
-
As built
Building should be designed to allow for future horizontal extension unless specified otherwise by the Company. 2.3.2
Soil Investigation The purpose of soil investigation is to provide information on the soil conditions for design and construction of civil and structural engineering works. The soil investigation work shall be carried out in accordance with SP-1278: ‘Specification for Site Selection & Soil Investigation Works – ‘Engineering Guidelines’.
SP-1275
Page 7
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
The main aims of a soil investigation may be defined as follows: -
To enable a safe, durable and economic design for the works to be produced.
-
To enable the works to be constructed safely.
-
To ensure that the construction of the works does not infringe on environmental requirements.
2.3.2.1 Scope of Investigation Depending on the requirements of the project, the investigation may be used to obtain information on, but not limited to, the following: -
Bearing capacity
-
Settlement (and differential settlements)
-
Behavior of ground water in respect of uplift on foundations, effects on bearing capacity, pollution and flow into excavations
-
Slope stability of embankments, cuttings and excavations
-
Swelling properties of soils (clays, silts, gypsum etc.)
-
Suitability of soil for fill
-
Chemical composition of soil and groundwater with particular reference to chemical attach/corrosion on construction materials
-
Dynamic Shear Modulus for Machine Foundations
-
Details of rock strata, dip, strike etc.
The Consultant shall however carefully investigate the necessity for a soil investigation, and if required, the type of information needed. The Consultant may consider the following: A study of available information of the area such as geological maps, water and oil well logs, hydrological data and site investigation reports of adjacent sites. A site visit shall be carried out to obtain the information on the type and behaviour of adjacent structures (cracks, sags due to differential settlements, rock outcrops which give an indication of the presence of the depth of bed rock etc). For extensions, single storey buildings on raft type foundations, pipelines etc., the Consultant may consider a site investigation unnecessary based on the information obtained from above, nevertheless it is the Consultants responsibility to ensure foundations are suitable for the building/structure and ground conditions. However, for multi-storey structures, installation of large sized tanks (where settlement predictions are important) installation of vibrating or rotary equipment (with considerable dynamic loading) etc, dedicated soils investigations shall be undertaken.
June 2004
Page 8
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
2.3.2.2 Soil Investigation Report Soil Investigation Reports shall comply with SP-1278 Specification for Site Selection & Soil Investigation Works – ‘Engineering Guidelines’ and BS-5930: Code of Practice for Site Investigations. The report shall provide information on the items noted in section 2.3.2.1 as necessary. The report shall be factual with engineering recommendations. Recommendations, information and discussions shall be based on anticipated details of the structure such as, type of foundations, founding levels, foundation loadings, overturning forces, construction procedures and details and any special construction methods. Should any of these items significantly change during the procedure of design, the Consultant shall review the validity of the original report recommendations and seek further advice as necessary. The soils report shall clearly state how the recommendations have been arrived at and shall include copies of the Terzaghi curves used etc, to enable the Consultant to conclude the size of safety factors used to obtain the allowable bearing pressures, etc. All reports shall be loaded in electronic form to PDO live link system for reference. 2.3.3
Preliminary Civil Design The Consultant shall undertake preliminary designs. During this process, the Consultant shall advise the Company on alterations considered necessary, if any, regarding orientation, location etc, in view of local climatic conditions, topography or any other aspects. Such alternations shall only be implemented if agreed by the Company. In order to achieve preliminary designs, the Consultant shall be fully acquainted with the site. To obtain the necessary knowledge the Consultant shall visit the site. The number of visits, and personnel visiting the site, will be dependent on the project, however the Consultant shall ensure adequate knowledge is gained. Preliminary designs shall comprise: -
Site surveys (preliminary or final), which shall include details of existing services, etc, as applicable (Various site and topographical surveys are already available within the Company).
-
Site layout plan(s), showing the location of buildings and plant, and indicating true North and prevailing wind direction(s).
-
A plan of every floor, indicating positions, dimensions, levels and intended use of the rooms in the building, including typical furniture and equipment layout where applicable.
-
Schematic elevations and typical cross sections.
-
Details of ground water levels for buildings containing basements.
-
Schedules of basic structural materials (concrete, steel, timber, etc,).
It shall be noted that locally manufactured materials shall be used wherever possible as long as such materials are technically acceptable. In support of the Company’s drive to promote local industry.
SP-1275
Page 9
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
The Consultant is required, to some extent, to consider relaxing design specifications (and hence investigate the financial consequences of the resulting operating and capital costs associated with such a relaxation). All other civil/building materials shall be chosen out from the Company PGSC (Product Group Service Codes) list for Civil Products. All of which (with minor exceptions) have local agents. -
Preliminary civil/structural design assessment to cover structural stability, robustness, concept, preliminary sizing of major elements and details of any key elements.
-
A list of any assumed design parameters.
Preliminary designs shall include details of alternative construction and cost comparisons in order to achieve both technically and economically viable solutions. 2.3.4
Final Civil Design The Consultant shall obtain, as a minimum, the following information in order to undertake the final design and details. -
Intended use of structure (refer section 2.3.1).
-
The design life of the structure (Temporary, Semi-permanent or Permanent (refer Appendix A section A.1).
-
Detailed site surveys including details of all existing services (if applicable) and likely future building service runs for water, power, sewage disposal, telephones, etc.
-
Soil Investigation (refer section 2.3.2)
-
Design load requirements including meteorology (refer section 2.4)
-
Details of surrounding topography
-
Details of exposure conditions (acidic environment, saline environment, etc.)
The Consultant shall produce thorough and complete sets of detailed design calculations and shall be approved by the Company. All calculations shall indicate, clearly and concisely the output and conclusions of each particular solution. Calculations shall be preceded with a standard information sheet, containing all of the above information, plus additional details as shown in the project related drawings and documents. The following Codes of Practice and British Standards shall be used as a minimum for the final design, unless alternative codes are agreed and approved by the Company.
June 2004
BS 6399
:
Loading for Building
BS 5950
:
Structural use of Steelwork in Buildings
BS 5628
:
Code of Practice for the use of Masonry
BS 5268
:
Structural use of Timber
BS 8110
:
Structural use of Concrete
Page 10
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
BS 8004
:
Code of Practice for Foundations
CP 2012
:
Code of Practice for Foundations for Machinery
Final design shall include, but not be limited to:
2.3.5
-
Layout plan(s) showing the locations and orientation of the building(s).
-
Full working drawings showing the structural and civil designs of the entire project giving full details of all the elements in the building(s) (refer section 2.3.6).
-
Full working drawings showing all the architectural, mechanical, electrical and plumbing details for the entire project (refer section 2.3.6).
-
Plans of every floor and roof, cross sections through individual floors and essential elevations of the building. These drawings shall show the position, form, dimensions and materials of all the various parts of the buildings and structures.
-
Collected design data and calculations for climatic consideration, logically leading to the conditions expected to prevail in the building.
-
Proof, by means of calculations, material and equipment data that the criteria for comfort shall be satisfied.
-
Particular Specifications of works, to be added to the PDO Standard Specifications, and any other specifications necessary, in sufficient detail to invite competitive bids from erection contractors, so drafted as to provide minimum possible disparity between the interpretations by such contractors. These specifications shall also include a concept programme of erection, the final material specifications and working details.
-
Such additional detailed designs, specifications and drawings, in order to define fully all details of the building, and to ensure a smooth and effective completion of the work.
-
A complete set of calculations for all disciplines, properly headed, indexed and numbered, with the contract number on each sheet. All sheets shall be A4 format and of a suitable quality for easy reproduction.
Structural Design In the design for structural elements, the load factors, material factors, permissible stresses, etc. shall be in accordance with the requirements of the design code being applied. Due consideration shall be given to exceptional load conditions and accident cases for which the design may be undertaken with reduced load and material safety factors as allowed by the design code. Refer to Appendix B for Weights of General Building Material and Appendix C for Live Loads. 2.3.5.1 Steelwork Deflection in steel structures shall be limited to the values given in Table 1. Deflections due to dead loads, where limits are given for live loads in Table 1, shall not impair the strength and efficiency of the structure, lead to damage of the finishing or to be unsightly. Measures to nullify the effects of deflection due to dead loads by adjusting the casing on cased members or by pre-cambering should be considered.
SP-1275
Page 11
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Horizontal deflections at crane rail level due to spread of the supporting structure shall be considered and shall not exceed the value in Table 1, the manufacturers recommendations or affect the performance of the crane. When checking for deflections the most adverse realistic combination and arrangement of loads should be assumed. Material grades should be as follows: Structural hollow sections: BS EN 10210 Grade S275 All other structural steelwork: BS EN 10025 Grade S275 JR Connections should, whenever possible, avoid the use of high strength friction grip bolts. However, if used for special technical reasons, the mode of checking tension shall be by the use of load indicating washers. Bolt grades on a particular job should be standardised where possible to prevent incorrect usage of bolt types on site. Table 1: Allowable Deflections for Structural Steelwork Live Loadings.
Member
Maximum allowable Deflection where Piping is supported
Maximum allowable Deflection where Piping is not supported
Purlins
N/A
1/250th of the span
Supporting beams
1/500th of the span (due to Live Loading)
1/360th of the span (due to Live Loading)
Crane Girders (Vertical deflection for 10 to 40 Tonnes capacity)
N/A
1/80th of the span
Crane girders & Runaway Beams (Vertical deflection up to 10 Tonnes capacity)
N/A
1/600th of the span
Cantilevered Beams
1/200th of overhang (due to Live Loading)
1/180th of overhang (due to Live Loading)
Portal Frames (Horizontal)
1/250th of the height
1/200th of the height
Portal Frames (Vertical)
1/500th of the span (due to Live Loading)
1/360th of the span (due to Live Loading)
All Cranes (Horizontal)
N/A
1/500th of the span
2.3.5.2 Concrete Concrete elements shall contain suitable materials to meet the requirements of both strength and durability. Consideration to both the levels of chloride and sulphates shall always be given when specifying cement type. One of the following three typical land based exposure conditions needs to be stipulated as the basis of the design criteria of concrete foundations (chemical analysis to be assessed from the soil investigation report): June 2004
Page 12
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
1.
Concrete placed in soils containing only SULPHATES, with no significant risk of chloride induced corrosion, shall follow the recommendations of BRE Digest 363 (Building Research Establishment) Table 1. In addition the concrete surface shall be treated with two coats of ‘FOSROC Nitoproof 100’ bituminous paint or any other approved equivalent.
2.
Concrete placed in soils containing only CHLORIDES, with no significant exposure to sulphates, shall use Ordinary Portland Cement to BS EN 197 or ASTM Type I (that is, with medium to high C3A content). In addition, the concrete surface shall be protected in the form of tanking membrane system or protective coating system as detailed below.
3.
Concrete placed in soils containing both CHLORIDES and SULPHATES shall adopt the following criteria. When the chlorides are less than 0.05% in the soil or ground water, the recommendation shall be as (1) above, that is, for soils containing only sulphates. When the chlorides exceed 0.05% in the soil or ground water, the recommendation shall be as (2) above, that is, for soils containing only chlorides.
When the chlorides or sulphates or both (chlorides & Sulphates) in the soil or ground water, are not in a significant level or totally free, the recommendation shall be ordinary port land cement (OPC) to BS EN 197 or ASTM Type I. In addition, the concrete surface shall be treated with two coats of ‘FOSROC Nitoproof 100’ bituminous paint or any other approved equivalent. The membrane system of tanking shall consist of primer, membrane, corner fillet, reinforcing strip, protection board etc., Typical tanking details for concrete foundations (above and below grade) are shown in Figure: 1. The tanking system product shall be ‘Schlegel’ or any other approved equivalent. The exposed surface shall be treated with two coats of ‘FOSROC Dekguard S’ Anti-Chlorides and Carbonation coatings or any other approved equivalent with a dft of 350 microns. This coating shall be required to protect the above ground concrete from the atmospheric effects and windborne salts. For more details of the exposure condition refer SP-1282 Specification for Reinforced Concrete – ‘Production & Construction Guidelines’. The coating system for tanking shall be two coats of ‘FOSROC Nitocote PE135’ or any other approved equivalent with a dft of 400 microns. All membrane or coating system shall be strictly in accordance with the relevant manufacturers instruction. Covers to all reinforcement including links shall never be less than the value shown in Table 2. Table 2: Minimum Concrete Cover to Reinforcement Element
Absolute Minimum Nominal Cover
Internal
:
50mm
External
:
50mm
Below Ground
:
50mm
Building floor / roof slabs
:
25mm
Note: The above are minimum nominal covers and shall be increased if required by the relevant design standard being used. SP-1275
Page 13
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
For more information on recommended concrete cover to reinforcement related to external exposure condition refer SP-1282 Specification for Reinforced Concrete – ‘Production & Construction Guidelines’. The use of crushed ice and admixtures should be considered when specifying concrete to ensure the production of good quality concrete. Reinforced concrete should be general contains aggregates not exceeding 20mm and mass concrete should in general contain aggregates not exceeding 40mm. The design and details of concrete and concrete mixes shall be in accordance with SP-1282 Specification for Reinforced Concrete – ‘Production & Construction Guidelines’. All structural concrete shall be of Grade C35 (that is, having a characteristic strength of 35 N/mm2 at 28 day), unless specified otherwise. Mass concrete shall be used for general filling as required. Blinding concrete shall be 50 mm thick. Both Blinding and Mass Concrete shall have a characteristic strength of at least 10 N/mm2 at 28 days. All edges of exposed concrete shall have a chamfer of approx. 25 mm.
Figure 1:
Typical Tanking Details for Concrete Foundations (Above & Below Grade)
Note: 1. Product Brand Name: Schlegel for Membrane system and Fosroc for Exposed surface coating. 2. For Special foundations like pumps, compressors, GT etc., additional care shall be taken as per the consultant/vendor’s advise. June 2004
Page 14
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Foundation bolts shall be in accordance with the latest revision of PDO Standard Drawing STD-2-3950-001. Unless stated otherwise, the standard minimum lap lengths of concrete reinforcement shall be as shown in Table 3. Table 3: Minimum Reinforcement Lap Lengths Minimum Lap Lengths (mm) Size
Tension / Compression
Size
Tension / Compression
R6
300
T6
350
R8
350
T8
450
R10
400
T10
550
R12
500
T12
650
R16
650
T16
850
R20
800
T20
1050
R25
1000
T25
1300
R32
1250
T32
1650
R40
1600
T40
2050
Concrete reinforcement for Hot-Rolled Mild Steel and Hot-Rolled Deformed High-YieldStress Bars, shall be detailed as follows:
12
– R/T 10
– 3
-
200 SPACING OF BARS BAR MARK BAR TYPE AND SIZE NUMBER OF BARS REQUIRED
2.3.5.3 Block Work Careful consideration should be given to the partial safety factors used for materials when designing block work. Details of supervision and quality of blocks required to meet the design assumptions should be stated on the drawings or in the specification. Blockwork shall be designed to carry all the applied loading and combinations of loading, giving due consideration to differential and thermal movements.
SP-1275
Page 15
June 2004
Version 1.0
2.3.6
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Engineering Drawings Engineering drawings shall be prepared in accordance with PDO-ERD-00-06 Preparation & Content of Engineering Drawings. A0 drawing shall not be used unless agreed in writing by the Company. Reinforcement shall be fully scheduled by the Consultant for working civil/structural drawings in accordance with BS 8666 & BS EN ISO 4066, including bar bending schedules. All welding symbols used shall comply with BS 449 Part 2C. All drawings shall cross - refer to associated drawings. All drawings shall provide details of required material grades. Legend / Symbols are given below and for definitions and abbreviations see Appendix A. Should other symbols or abbreviation be required (excepting welding symbols) a key shall be provided on the drawing clearly describing their meaning. Lettering and figures shall be distinct and uniform to ensure the production of good legible prints. The style should be simple and unaffected. Capital letters should be used for all titles and sub-titles. Lowercase letters should be used only for notes. The size of all lettering shall be as follow:For A1 Drawings
:
3.0mm high minimum
For A2 & A3 Drawings
:
2.5 high minimum
All drawings should be to scale. The following scales should be used: Civil/Structural Site layout & simple GA’s:
:
1:200
General arrangement
:
1:100 or 1:50
Foundation Location Plans
:
1:100
Simple wall and slab details
:
1:50
Beam and column elevations
:
1:20
Beam and column sections
:
1:20 or 1:10
Note: 1.
Where larger scale details are desirable, the following should be used 1:5, 1:2 or FS.
2.
For projects with large foundations a scale of 1:25 may be used when scales of 1:50 or 1:20 are clearly unsuitable.
All structural slab levels or finished floor levels should be indicated and related to a datum. Levels shall be expressed in metres. All other dimensions shall be expressed in millimetres.
June 2004
Page 16
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Structural steelwork working drawings should show details of main connections. For minor connections all moments, forces and shears shall be required to enable their design by the contractor. The Consultants scope of work shall include the checking of shop drawings and connection details designed by the contractor. The Consultant shall produce a full set of As Built drawings, based on fully marked up drawings by the contractor, which shall contain all civil, structural, mechanical, electrical details etc. They shall clearly indicate the true location of all hidden and underground services, structures and the like. Complete copy of drawings shall be submitted in electronic form and loaded to PDO live link system.
SP-1275
Page 17
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
The following legends / symbols shall be used where applicable: Legend / Symbols
June 2004
Page 18
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Legend / Symbols (contd.)
SP-1275
Page 19
June 2004
Version 1.0
2.3.7
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Design Requirements for Specific Buildings The specification gives minimum general requirements for the design and engineering of all new building, however additional requirements for specific buildings are specified in the following documents: DEP 32.31.50.31 – Gen.
:
Analyser Houses
:
Typical Analyser Houses for Tropical Areas
Shell Standard Drawing S 17.002
:
Typical Analyser Houses for Non-Tropical Areas
DEP 34.17.10.31 – Gen.
:
Laboratories
SP-1276
:
Specification for Standard Control Buildings – Design Requirements & Standard Drawings
DEP 34.17.10.30 – Gen.
:
Reinforced Proof)
SP-1283
:
Specification for Standard Sunshades – Design Requirements & Standard Drawings
Shell Standard 17.001
2.3.8
Drawings
S
Control
buildings
(Explosive
Design Requirements for Pipe Supports The design of Standard Pipe Supports is covered in a separate dedicated document: SP-1187 Specification for ‘Selection of Standard Pipe Supports’.
2.4
Design Loads The design shall take into account all loading conditions foreseen as occurring during the design life of the structure. If applicable, loading from future extensions shall be allowed for. These shall include any alterations to wind loading effects due to the change in structure size. Details of assumptions made in this respect shall be clearly stated in the design concept section of the calculations. Loadings that will occur during construction of the structure shall be designed for. Details of any specific construction procedural requirements such as back propping; de-propping etc. shall be clearly stated to the contractor in the drawings or specifications as necessary.
2.4.1
Dead Loads The self-weight of all the building elements including services, specific plant etc. shall be calculated and used in the design of the structure. For proprietary systems, equipment and machines specific details of loading shall be obtained from the manufacturers and used in the design. These details shall correspond to the items specified on the contract drawings and in the specifications. Where permanent partitions are shown in the plans their actual weights shall be included in the dead load. The weights of tanks and other receptacles and of their contents shall be considered as dead loads. These loads need to be calculated for the cases when a tank or receptacle is full and when empty.
June 2004
Page 20
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Dead loads should be calculated from the unit weights given in BS 648 or from actual known weights of the materials used. For general building materials, however, the values given in Appendix B may be used. 2.4.2
Live Loads Live loads for buildings, and method of calculation, shall be in accordance with BS 6399 Part 1, however the live loads shown in Appendix C may be used as a guideline. For structural steel platforms on Oil/Gas projects, the following live loads shall be used: Access Walkways (not including operating floors)
:
250 kg/m2
Operating Floors (not next to heat exchangers)
:
500 kg/ m2
Special Cases (e.g. Floors located at the draw end of a shell tube heat exchanger).
:
750 kg/ m2
Under desert conditions roof with a pitch of less than 50 shall be designed for sand loading and shall be a minimum of 1 kN/m2. For structural calculations, local codes or regulations, and actual loading situations shall be adhered to if more stringent than the values obtained from Appendix C. Where applicable, the weight of vehicles shall be included as live loading and shall be applied to produce the most critical design cases. 2.4.3
Wind Loading Wind load calculations shall comply with the requirements of BS 6399-2 Loading for Buildings – ‘Code of Practice for Wind Loads’ and DEP 34.00.01.30-GEN. Figure 2 specifies highest Mean Hourly Wind Speed, V10 (m/s), at a height of 10 m, which shall be accounted for in the design. The Design Wind Speed at any height z above the ground, Vz (m/s), is derived from the formula below: Vz = F x V10 x (z/10)1/y x S3 (m/s) Where, Vz = The Design Wind Speed at height z. V10 = The Mean Hourly Wind Speed F = Gust Duration Factor Z = Height above grade 1/y = Locality Factor S3 = Structure Category Factor (S1 and S2 are included in the above). Refer Table 4 for the values of F & 1/y and Table 5 for the value of S3.
SP-1275
Page 21
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Figure: 2 MEAN HOURLY WIND SPEED CHART
June 2004
Page 22
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 4: Values Of Gust Duration Factor & Locality Factor Categor y
F
1/y
Topography 3 sec gust
10 sec gust
1
Extreme exposure. Large expanses of open water, grassland, desert, etc.
1.5
1.3
1/14
2
Open country with low obstructions, trees, 2storey buildings, etc.
1.7
1.4
1/11
3
Built-up areas and areas with high obstructions. Towns, refineries, etc.
2.0
1.6
1/8
Although 3-second gust speeds, are sometimes quoted and certainly of great importance when dealing with wind forces on structures, the above formula takes this into account. It is intrinsically incorrect to stipulate 3-second gust duration values, as these depend on location, obstructions and the influence of neighbouring structures (which could cause eddies and complex flow resulting in much higher gust velocities), as well as height above the ground. Therefore only use highest mean hourly wind speeds at 10 metres above the ground. The values of S3 are shown in Table 5 and shall be used for the various category of structure as described in section 2.5. Table 5: Values Of S3 For Wind Loading Structure Type
S3
Permanent
1.00
Semi Permanent
0.83
Temporary
0.77
Note: The values given above shall not be applicable for Telecom Type Towers and for any special structures for a particular project and shall be calculated from BS 6399. 2.4.4
Design Loading For Crane Gantry Girders The following applies only to single crane operation and to simple forms of crane gantry construction. Loads for heavy crane, high-speed operation or multiple cranes on a single gantry have to be specially calculated. For crane gantry girders, the following allowances can be used to cover all forces set up by vibration, shock from slipping of slings, kinetic action of acceleration and retardation and impact of wheel loads:
SP-1275
Page 23
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
a. For loads acting vertically, the maximum static wheel loads shall be increased by the following percentages. For an electric overhead cranes:
25%
For a hand operated cranes:
10%
b. The horizontal force acting transverse top the rails, the following percentages of the combined weight of the crab and the load lifted: For an electric overhead crane:
10%
For a hand operated crane:
5%
c. The horizontal forces acting along the rails shall be taken as a percentage of the static wheel loads, which can occur on the rails, as follows: For overhead cranes, either electric or hand operated: 5% The forces specified in either (b) or (c) above, may be considered as acting at the rail level and being appropriately transmitted to the supporting system. Either of the horizontal forces in (b) or (c) above may act at the same time as the vertical load on gantry girders and their vertical supports. The design loadings for Overhead Travelling Cranes and outdoor gantries shall be determined in accordance with BS 2573. 2.4.5
Dynamic Loads Where loads arising from machinery, and other plant producing dynamic effects, are supported by or communicated to a structure, allowance shall be made for these dynamic effects by increasing the load by an adequate percentage. Foundations, which directly support vibrating equipment such that the effects need to be taken account of in the calculations, shall be designed in accordance with BS CP 2012. In general it is advisable to provide anti-vibration pads.
2.4.6
Load Combinations Load combinations shall be such that both maximum and minimum load cases are checked if applicable to investigate not only design loadings on particular elements but also stability, uplift and overturning conditions. Load combinations shall also be in accordance with the requirements of the particular design code of practice or standard.
2.5
Climatic Aspects of Buildings Attention shall be paid to the prevailing climatic conditions in various seasons (using records of local climatic design data), such as air temperature, temperature differences, saline atmosphere, sand and dust storms, possible sand infiltration of buildings, humidity, solar influence, wind, micro climatic variations, etc., to arrive at a satisfactory design. Buildings shall be designed and constructed so that, within operational and physical constraints, they are able to maintain the necessary internal comfort condition with the minimum of capital and operations costs over the whole range of external prevailing conditions.
June 2004
Page 24
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.5.1
Version 1.0
Climatic Design Criteria Outdoor design conditions should be based on the relevant meteorological data for each project. For further detail refer section 2.16.
2.5.2
Siting & Orientation 1
Residential and Housing Areas
If at all possible, camps & housing plots etc., shall be sited up wind of industrial areas, so that prevailing winds drive smoke & fumes away from accommodation/residential areas. They shall also be sited a reasonable distance away from mosques and recreational facilities.
2
Industrial Areas
As mentioned in section 1 if at all possible, industrial areas shall be sited down wind of accommodation/residential areas but up wind of flare areas and burn pits.
3
Individual Accommodation Units or Houses
As opposed to Western European standard, orientation of houses shall, if at all possible, be such as to avoid excessive sun and wind exposure. Advantage shall be taken where possible to make best use of scenic outlook and privacy. Living rooms and bedrooms should face the garden, while kitchens and ancillary rooms etc., should face the street.
4
Mosques and Prayer Shelters
All mosques and prayer shelters shall be orientated towards Mecca. Once the building foundation trenches have been excavated, final approval by the local religious authority shall be received before further work commences. Mosques shall be located away from any sources of noise.
5
Outdoor Sports Facilities
Tennis courts, volley ball courts (and preferably football pitches) shall be orientated in the N-S direction because of sun light problems at dawn and dusk. Care need to be taken in siting these facilities in relation to problems of night time glare from flares/burnpits. Shelter is needed from the wind, especially for badminton or tennis courts. Sports facilities shall not be located close to areas from which there is high level of noise, for example, turbines, or close to likely source of fumes/smoke, for example, fire training ground.
6
Open Cinemas
Open Air Cinemas are usually only used at night. Therefore if such a facility has been specified by the Company (no longer considered a standard facility), their location and orientation shall depend on problems associated with glare from flares etc., and noise to accommodation, mosques, etc., or from adjacent plant and equipment. Prevailing wind problems with fumes, dust, etc., shall also be taken into account, not forgetting the effects of the glare from the sun (least important).
7
Power Stations
Air
Power Stations are generally very noisy and therefore their location shall be such as to cause the least amount of discomfort to occupants of camps, building, potential building plots, etc., still ensuring cost effectiveness of cable lengths, O/H lines, fuel lines etc. Gas Turbines have the added hazard of gas explosions (as well as possible H2S problems). Noise levels are defined in the section 3.0 of SP 1231 and section 4.6 of DEP 34.17.00.32. (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 25
June 2004
Version 1.0
2.5.2
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Siting & Orientation (contd.) 8
Clinics
Clinics shall be sited such that easy access to both Residential and Industrial Areas is achieved. Noise is considered the major hazard for clinics even though hazards due to fumes/smoke/flare glare, etc., shall also be taken into account.
9
Schools
Schools generally have a certain amount of noise associated with them, and therefore should not be too close to housing. A more important factor is the hazard of fast traffic. Speed bumps shall be located on both sides of the School, with appropriate traffic warning signs, etc., to control traffic speeds. All hazard facilities, such as electrical substations, sewage pumping pits, etc., shall be securely fenced off with suitable locks.
10
Offices
Offices should have an E-W main axis, with the windows facing either north or south, as the penetrating morning and evening sun is undesirable. The sun can be kept out by sun blinds, window U/V film, or roof overhang. Siting is dependant on client needs but care must be taken against noise and fume/smoke hazards. Space is needed directly outside the office space for off loading supplies and adequate car parks. Natural day light is very desirable but not necessarily essential. Artificial lighting, to correct levels, may be used if no other option is available.
11
Workshops
Workshop orientation is dependent on access to and from the workshop to the access road. Siting of workshops is dependent on client needs, services availability, noise factor, hazardous factors, wind blown dust.
12
Warehouses & Stores
13
Hydrocarbon Laboratories
Warehouses are normally located at the entrance of the supply lay down area and orientated for easy access and removal of material by fork lift trucks, transport trucks, etc. Materials that need sun shading shall be orientated to obtain maximum effect of side cladding while still attaining high efficiency of access. In general this results in the main axis of the building being orientated in the E-W direction, with access from the North Wind blown dust also needs to be carefully taken into account. Hydrocarbon Laboratories shall be located well away from points of ignition and other such hazards (see IP Part 15 ‘Model Code of Safe Practice’). They shall be free standing with their own supply of uncontaminated air supply. Orientation shall be such as to avoid direct sun light from entering the laboratory, that is, the windows shall have a northerly aspect.
14
Airstrips & Air Terminals
When siting an Airstrip in the Interior the following points shall be considered: 1. Air Lane activity in the area including for military flying. 2. Type of development in the surrounding area (camps, garbage dumps, sewage lagoons, etc.). All these attract birds, which are a hazard to incoming aircraft. (Contd.)
June 2004
Page 26
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.5.2
Version 1.0
Siting & Orientation (contd.) 14 Airstrips & (contd.) Air Terminals (contd.)
3. Communication (all types) problems and availability, radio interference, etc. 4. Utilities available – aviation fuel, water, electricity, etc. 5. Surrounding obstructions: telecom towers, sand dunes, etc. 6. Meteorological conditions throughout the year. 7. Likely use by non-PDO personnel Other factors to take into account are the expected lifetime of the airstrip, type of planes that will be used, the effect and condition of both the take off and approach zones, and access to camp site or oil installation. The orientation of the airstrip shall be dependent on prevailing winds and the surrounding obstructions within the take off and approach zones. The terminal building shall have the main axis parallel to the airstrip. For the airstrips safety refer the PDO Safety Reference Document M.3.9 or the appropriate standards as stated CP-122 Code of Practice for the Health, Safety and Environment Protection.
15
Explosives Stores
Explosives stores shall be located a minimum of 1000 m from roads and public buildings, which does not include the access road to the store. These stores shall also be located a minimum of 2000 m from vulnerable installations such as pipe lines, production facilities, power lines and telecom facilities. The compound itself shall be double security fenced 6 m apart, with an outer 1 m deep, 2 m wide security anti vehicle ditch. The associated guard house shall be located along the approach access road, 400 m from the Explosives store security fencing. All explosives stores shall conform to the Royal Oman Police regulations.
16
Fuel Stations
Fuel Stations are considered as a hazardous area, especially during fuel delivery/despatch time, and therefore its location shall be dependent on minimum distances from a point of ignition to fuel vents. All fuel stations shall conform to the ‘Model Code of Safe Practice’ IP Part 15.
17
Fire Training Areas
The Fire Training Area is a source of ignition and a source of smoke (and possible H2S). These areas shall be located well away from Residential and Recreational facilities. They shall also be located well away from any installations, which have inflammable or hydrocarbon compounds such as oil/gas installations, fuel stations, explosive stores, laboratories, warehouses/stores, etc. Building facilities, other than buildings within the compound itself, shall not be less than 150 m away from a point of ignition in the Fire Training Area. Prevailing winds and hence the effects of smoke must be taken into consideration when locating such an area. (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 27
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.5.2 Siting & Orientation (contd.)
June 2004
18
STP’s (Sewage Treatment Plants) and Evaporation Ponds
Both Sewage Treatment Plants (and associated ponds) and Dedicated Evaporation Ponds are sources of smell and sanitary pollution. All residential facilities and schools shall not be located within 100 m of a STP or evaporation ponds. Smell/bad odours are mainly caused by anaerobic (septic) conditions even though excessive algae blooms do contribute to the smell. Prevailing wind is a major factor when siting STP's and evaporation ponds so that all manned locations shall be located upward of such facilities. Wind is a major element in the efficient running of an evaporation pond. Fencing to ponds, to stop camels entering the area, shall be located away from the pond itself to avoid effecting the wind fetch of the pond. Location is also decided by ground water contamination, closeness to potential flooding of wadi’s, or problems of percolation/leakage under the bunds into manned areas (that is, ponds to be located down hill of manned facilities).
19
Isotope Stores
Location of Isotope Store are defined in the Safety Reference document section M.2.1 or CP-122 Code of Practice for ‘Health, Safety and Environment Protection’ and other documents referenced therein.
20
Telecom Installations
Telecom installations are affected by heavy atmospheric disturbance and high voltage. Care must be taken to ensure that high voltage cables or overhead lines are located away from such installations. Commonly associated with Telecom facilities are high towers which affect take off and approach zones of airstrips. Microwave towers need to be free of any other outside obstructions.
21
Transportable Units (Portacabins)
The main problem with Transportable Units is their risk of fire. The minimum distance between Units shall be 5 m. Units shall be considered as a point of ignition when dealing with facilities such as fuel stations, fuel tanks, etc. For access reasons, a minimum space of 7 m shall be maintained between Units and a fence/boundary wall.
22
R O Plants
These should, when possible, be located close to the supply and disposal wells, preferably between the wells and the user facility.
23
Garbage Dumps
Garbage dumps should be sited down wind from the camp and in particular away from any aircraft landing strip or helicopter pad as these attract birds, etc.
24
Scrap Heaps
Scrap heaps shall be located such as to minimise environmental impact and shall be regularly backfilled as dumping continues. Where removable scrap is stored this shall be within screened areas.
25
Military Installations
Following is applicable for Military installations. 1) No construction allowed within 20m from outside fence 2) No more than one storey building is allowed within 200m 3) No more than two storey building is allowed within 300m 4) No more than three storey building is allowed within 400m 5) No construction allowed between the main road and outside fence 6) ROP approval is required before constructing within 400m from the outside fence. (Contd.) Page 28
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.5.2
Version 1.0
Siting & Orientation (contd.)
2.6
25
Car Parks
In the design of car parks particular attention shall be drawn to save ingress to and egress from the approach roads. In congested areas right angle parking should be used to maximise space usage and overall cost. Elsewhere 450 parking is considered desirable. Whilst it is mandatory in the Interior to build car parks suitable for Reverse Parking, for the Coast uses normal drive in parking (see Figure 5 in this document).
26
Shops
Shops shall be provided with a storeroom, toilet and wash hand basin. The store shall be minimum 15% of the shop floor area.
Means of Escape and Fire Protection The planning of all buildings shall be in accordance with the BS 5588 Part 1 to 5 Fire Precautions in the Design & Construction of Buildings and shall comply with the requirements of Royal Oman Police regulations. Building layouts and proposed fire protection systems shall be subject to Company approval. The layouts shall show safe means of escape routes, protected corridors, travelling distances to the protected corridors, protected shafts and means of escape exists. A statement shall be provided specifying the proposed air-conditioning supply and return air systems, and fire protection systems for the project. The location of all hand held fire-fighting equipment shall be agreed with the Company. All matters relating to Fire Detection, Protection and Alarms is covered under Section 2.17.7, 2.19.4 and 2.20 of this document.
2.7
Minimum Building Requirements
2.7.1
PDO Buildings 2.7.1.1 PDO Office Buildings These buildings shall be designed with an overall building width of 13 m. One of the centre corridor walls shall coincide with the centre of the building giving offices of internal dimensions of: Office 1
4.15 m
x (3.38) m = 14 m2
Office 2
6.25 m
x (3.38) m = 21 m2
Corridor width
1.80 m
4 Walls of 200 mm each
0.80 m
Hence
13.00 m
(Width of building)
Provision shall be made for installation of partition walls at approximately 1.69 m intervals so that following rooms sizes can be formed: 7 m2, 10.5 m2, 14 m2, 21 m2, 31.5 m2 and 42 m2.
SP-1275
Page 29
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.7.1.2 PDO Sleeping Accommodation All rooms in the PDO sleeping accommodation blocks shall have a bedroom, attached bath/toilet and storage facilities. Standard room sizes are given in the Table 6. The accommodation unit allocation shall be one person/room for senior staffs and two persons/room for junior staffs. Table 6: Areas of Sleeping Accommodation Staff (Grade) Item SS
JS
Bedroom m2
20.80
20.80
Shower/WC m2
3.20
3.20
Storage m3
2.00
2.00
Total Area m2
24.00
24.00
Notes
En suite shower/wc
En suite shower/wc
2.7.1.3 PDO Ablution Requirements In general toilets shall have minimum internal dimensions of 1.0 m x 1.6 m for both SS and JS. This may be reduced to 0.9 m x 1.3 m in offices. Showers shall have minimum dimensions of 1.0 m x 1.8 m, divided into a wet area and a dry area by a simple curtain, the latter area having a seat. 2.7.2
Contractors Buildings Contractor’s temporary site offices shall have areas as stated in section 2.7.1.1 or to suit the requirements of a particular contract. Accommodation for contractors shall be provided in the PAC (Permanent Accommodation for Contractors) and its facilities are similar like PDO facilities. If there is no PAC accommodation the Contractors can have their own camp and to provide the same facilities to their staffs. The accommodation unit allocation in the PAC or in the Contractors camp shall be one person/room for senior staffs and two persons/room for junior staffs and all other category staffs. Three persons sharing per room shall be allowed for JE and other staff categories, if the bedroom size is more than 21 m2 or as stated in Table 6. 2.7.2.1 Contractors SS Accommodation & Ablution Facilities Contractors SS accommodation shall have a sleeping room with an attached bath/toilet facilities. The room sizes shall not be less than 13 m2.in case of portable accommodation units otherwise the size shall be the same as given in Table 6. The following sanitary ware fittings shall be provided for each bath /toilet unit. Refer Table 7.
June 2004
Page 30
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table7: Contractors SS Ablution Facilities Sanitary Fittings Item
Staff
2a
SS
√
√
√
2b
SS
√
√
√
2c
SS
√
√
√
WC (Western) 1.6 m2
WC (Eastern) Urinals 1.4 m2
Handwash Basins
Shower Units 1.8 m2
2.7.2.2 Contractors JS/JE Accommodation & Ablution Facilities Contractors JS/JE and all other staff’s accommodation units shall have a sleeping room with attached bath/toilet facilities. The room sizes shall not be less than 13 m2.in case of portable accommodation units otherwise the size shall be the same as given in Table 6. The following minimum number of sanitary ware fittings shall be provided for each bath / toilet unit. Refer Table 8. Table8: Contractors JE Ablution Facilities Sanitary Fittings Item
Staff
WC (Western) 1.6 m2
WC (Eastern) 1.4 m2
Urinals
Handwash Basins
Shower Units 1.8 m2
3a
JS
√
√
√
3b
JE
√
√
√
3c
JE
√
√
3d
Others
√
√
3e
Others
√ √ √
√
2.7.2.3 Contractors Kitchen and Messing Facilities In general, the Kitchen and Associated Facilities should be constructed in block work, and the use of porta-cabin type kitchens shall be discouraged. The Kitchen and Associated Facilities for Contractors have been sized using the following design criteria, based on international norms: Individual space requirements in the kitchen for the various functions are shown in the Figure 3.
SP-1275
Page 31
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Figure 3: Kitchen Facilities Dimension Chart
M2 60
Preparation
40 20 0 0
200
400
600
800
Meals 3.a. Preparation
M2 80 60
Service
40 20 0 0
200
400
600
800
Meals 3.b. Service
M2 60 40
Staff Facilities
20 0 0
200
600
800
3.c. Staff Facilities
Meals
June 2004
400
Page 32
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Figure 3: Kitchen Facilities Dimension Chart (contd.)
M2 60
Cooking
40 20 0 0
200
400
600
800
600
800
Meals 3.d. Cooking
M2 60 40 Wash-Up
20 0 0
200
400
Meals 3.e. Wash-Up
M2 60
Storage (total)
40 20 0 0
200
400
600
800
Meals 3.f. Storage (total)
SP-1275
Page 33
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 9: Contractor Kitchen Facilities Dimensions/Sizes Total Manpower of Contractor Item
June 2004
Description
0 to 10 People
10 to 25 People
25 to 50 People
50 to 100 People
100 to 200 People
200 to 400 People
4
Kitchen Area
4a
Preparation
N/A
10 m2
10 m2
11 m2
15 m2
23 m2
4b
Service
N/A
18 m2
18 m2
19 m2
22 m2
36 m2
4c
Staff Facilities
N/A
10 m2
10 m2
13 m2
15 m2
19 m2
4d
Cooking
N/A
19 m2
19 m2
20 m2
23 m2
39 m2
4e
Wash Up
N/A
8 m2
8 m2
10 m2
13 m2
18 m2
4f
Storage (Total)
N/A
25 m2
25 m2
27 m2
32 m2
35 m2
4
Total Kitchen Area JS and SS
N/A
90 m2
90 m2
100 m2
120 m2
170 m2
Page 34
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 10: Contractors Dining Room Facilities Dimensions/Sizes Total Manpower of Contractors Item
SP-1275
Description 0 to 10 People
10 to 25 People
25 to 50 People
50 to 100 People
100 to 200 People
200 to 400 People
Motel Accommodation
SS + JS Eat Together
SS + JS Eat Together
SS + JS Eat Separately
SS + JS Eat Separately
SS + JS Shift & Eat Separately
5a
Condition of Dining/ Messing Facilities
5b
Assumed Average Population
N/A
20
40
80
170
180 - 2 No Shifts
5c
Assumed Split Between JS and SS
N/A
1 to 4
1 to 5
1 to 6
1 to 7
1 to 8
5d
Assumed Number of Meals/sitting
N/A
20
40
80
170
360 - 2 No Shifts
5e
Dining Space factor for JS
N/A
1.6per’s/m2
1.5per’s/m2
1.4per’s/m2
1.4 persons/m2
07 persons/m2
5f
Dining Space factor for SS
N/A
N/A
N/A
1.8per’s/m2
1.7 persons/m2
08 persons/m2
JS Dining Area Space Requirement in m2
N/A
32m2
60m2
93m2
203m2
220m2
JS Servery and Extra Circulation Space
N/A
18m2
30m2
47m2
107m2
110m2
Page 35
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 10: Contractor Dining Room Facilities dimensions/Sizes (cont’d…) Total Manpower of Contractors Item
5g
5h
5i
June 2004
Description
0 to 10 People
10 to 25 People
25 to 50 People
50 to 100 People
100 to 200 People
200 to 400 People
Total Dining Space Requirement for JS
N/A
50m2
90m2
140m2
310m2
330m2
Dining Area Space Requirement for SS
N/A
N/A
N/A
25m2
43m2
36m2
SS Servery and Extra Circulation Space
N/A
N/A
N/A
15m2
27m2
24m2
Total Dining Space Requirement for SS
N/A
N/A
N/A
40m2
70m2
60m2
Dining Area Space Requirement in m2 for both JS & SS
N/A
32m2
60m2
118m2
246m2
256m2
Servery and Extra Circulation Space For JS & SS
N/A
18m2
30m2
62m2
134m2
134m2
Total JS & SS Dining Area Requirement
N/A
50m2
90m2
180m2
380m2
390m2
Page 36
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 11: Other Kitchen/ Messing Related Facilities Dimensions/ Sizes Total Manpower of Contractors Item
Description 0 to 10 People
10 to 25 People
25 to 50 People
50 to 100 People
100 to 200 People
200 to 400 People
6
Other Facilities
6a
Bakery
N/A
16m2
16m2
20m2
30m2
40m2
6b
Laundry
N/A
35m2
35m2
55m2
70m2
110m2
6c
Catering Offices
N/A
14m2
14m2
20m2
20m2
30m2
6d
SS Toilet / Wash
N/A
10 m2
15 m2
15 m2
24 m2
24 m2
6e
JS Toilet / Wash
N/A
25 m2
30 m2
30 m2
36 m2
36 m2
6
Total Other Facilities
N/A
100m2
110m2
140m2
180m2
240m2
Table 12: Overall Area of Contractor’s Kitchen/ Messing Facilities Total Manpower of Contractors Item
7
SP-1275
Description
Overall Area of Kitchen/ Messing
Page 37
0 to 10 People
10 to 25 People
25 to 50 People
50 to 100 People
100 to 200 People
200 to 400 People
N/A
240m2
290m2
420m2
680m2
800m2
June 2004
Version 1.0
2.8
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Building Elements and Finishes Building elements shall be designed and detailed to comply with fire regulations as detailed in the United Kingdom Building Regulations 1985 produced by the Department of the Environment and the Welsh Office. Designs and details shall also comply with the requirements of the local fire authorities. Refer Appendix C for the relative values of the different Building Elements and Finishes of PDO buildings.
2.8.1
Walls All wall designs and details shall take into consideration the following: -
Structural Loading Requirements
-
Thermal Insulation Requirements
-
Noise Insulation Requirements
-
Water/Moisture Repelling Requirements
-
Thermal Movement/Structural Freedom
-
Acoustic Reverberation Requirements
-
Economic Aspects
-
Finishing Requirements
-
Animal, Vermin, Insect Penetration Requirements
-
Dust Penetration Requirements
In addition external walls shall be designed and detailed to resist moisture penetration, to prevent the occurrence of condensation. Damp proofing is required, as in temperate climates (regarding the omission of damp proof courses, refer section 2.8.1.5). Termite barriers are essential in the construction of walls. Internal walls for wash rooms and other wet rooms shall be designed and detailed to be moisture resistant and shall contain a damp proof course. Walls for control buildings shall be solid with no cavities to prevent the possible build up of gases and therefore hollow blocks shall not be used in these instances. Holes for cable entries in these buildings shall be sealed with polyurethane foam after cables have been installed. 2.8.1.1 Structural Loading All load bearing block work walls shall have a minimum compressive strength of 10 N/mm2. All non - load bearing block work walls shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3.5 N/mm2. Mortar shall as a minimum comply with the requirements of designation II as described in BS 5628. All openings for windows, doors, etc. in hollow block work shall be framed on all sides by providing a minimum of one T12 reinforcing bar placed centrally in the block hollow adjacent to the opening. The hollow shall subsequently be filled with concrete as the block work progresses. The concrete shall be a minimum of grade 20. (Characteristic strength of concrete shall be 20 N/mm2 @ 28 days with 10 mm aggregate). June 2004
Page 38
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
The framing bar shall run from the floor below the opening to the ceiling above and where applicable shall pass through and be cast into the lintels above the opening. It shall also, where applicable, be cast into the slab below and soffit above the block panel under consideration. Walls shall be designed to withstand all vertical, horizontal and longitudinal loads, including wind and stability loading, as necessary. Due consideration shall be given to the eccentricity of loading in the design. 2.8.1.2 Thermal Requirements Light colour, heat reflecting, thermal qualities and low maintenance shall be the main considerations in selecting the external finish. ‘U’ values should not exceed 0.6 W/m2 0C for external walls. Cavity walls with insulation shall be considered in all external wall designs for air conditioned buildings to help conserve energy. See also section 2.8.1.5. 2.8.1.3 Noise Requirements All walls shall be suitably designed and constructed to ensure compliance with the room noise ratings specified in Appendix K. 2.8.1.4 Thermal Movements / Structural Freedom Vertical movement joints in walls shall be placed at intervals not exceeding the following: Table 13: Movement Joints Wall Type
Max. Joint spacing
Concrete framed buildings and structures
30 m
Concrete walls
30 m
Fired clay brick walls
12 m
Calcium silicate bricks
8m
Concrete brick walls
8m
Concrete block walls
6m
Parapet walls
5m
Horizontal movements joints may be required where block work/brickwork is built in a frame to allow the frame to move independently. All movement joints in buildings shall be sealed to prevent the ingress of water. 2.8.1.5 Economic Aspects Consideration shall be given to exceeding the ‘U’ value of 0.6 W/m2 °C stipulated in section 2.8.1.2 where the environmental condition within the space is not critical. Non-fair faced un-rendered block work may be used in areas of non-aesthetic importance. Where wall cladding is used, un-plastered non-fair faced blocks shall be used on faces covered by the cladding. SP-1275
Page 39
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
External walls constructed on concrete ground beams or slabs which are a minimum of 150 mm above surrounding ground level shall not require a horizontal damp proof cover. 2.8.1.6 Wall Finishes Wall finishes as detailed in Appendix D of this document shall be used. 2.8.2
Floors 2.8.2.1 External Floors & Hard standings Where reinforced concrete floors are required externally they should be constructed in bays not greater than 4.5 m in width, which shall separated by longitudinal construction joints. Every other longitudinal construction joint shall be formed to allow shrinkage to occur. Each bay shall be divided into lengths not exceeding 5 m by transverse shrinkage control joints. Expansion joints shall be provided in both directions every 30 m. Where mass concrete hard standings are used they shall be formed in bays not exceeding 5 m x 5 m, which shall be separated by isolation joints. All external floors and hard standings shall be laid with adequate falls (minimum 1:100) such that, allowing for normal tolerances, there is no possibility of water ponding and to ensure quick and effective drainage. Consideration shall be given, particularly with temporary or semi permanent floor to laying the concrete directly on the ground. 2.8.2.2 Internal Floors All exposed concrete floors shall be treated with an anti-dust compound. All exposed concrete floors subject to oil/acid spillage shall be treated with a suitable epoxy based flooring cover. In workshops, due consideration shall be given to fork lift loading, racking and machine foundations. All vibrating and large machine foundations shall be isolated from the ground floor slab by way of an isolation joint. For the installation of computers and other instrument or electrical equipment with cable connecting at the bottom of the equipment cavity floors shall be provided. These shall comprise a reinforced concrete lower floor and a removable panel upper floor of 600 x 600 module supported on pedestals. The pedestals shall be fixed to the concrete floor in such a manner as to form a firm bedding and shall be in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. They shall be adjustable in height and the adjustable section shall have automatic positive locking. Ensure that the pedestals and the frames, supporting either the instrument or electrical cabinets, are able to provide independent stability to the structure at all times. Each floor panel shall be capable of supporting, as a minimum, a concentrated load of 4450 N, applied on an area of 650 mm2 at any point. The floor shall also be capable of carrying, as a minimum, 15 kN/m2 with a maximum deflection of 1 mm. The reinforced concrete floor below the cavity shall be painted with an epoxy paint to prevent formation of dust. All pre-cast suspended floors shall be suitably tied to the structure to provide robust and stable construction.
June 2004
Page 40
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
2.8.2.3 Floor Finishes Floor finishes as detailed in Appendix E of this document shall be used. To all wet areas such as toilets the floor and 200 mm up surrounding walls shall be painted with two coats of bitumen and sharp sand splattered for key. At change of finishes line, at all doorways and in bays not exceeding 15 m2 brass dividing strips finished flush to the surface shall be provided. 2.8.3
Skirting Skirting as detailed in Appendix F of this document shall be used.
2.8.4
Ceilings Ceiling finishes as detailed in Appendix G of this document shall be used.
2.8.5
Doors Doors as detailed in Appendix H of this document shall be used. All doors shall be either solid teak framed or teak faced solid core flush doors. Where doors are fire rated their composition shall change accordingly.
2.8.6
Windows Refer Appendix I for Window Types. Contractors shall verify the final dimensions at site before making shop drawings. Approval to shop drawings shall be given prior to commencement of manufacture. All windows to be silver anodised aluminium with 6 mm thick glazing. Windows shall be fixed into a timber frame. Glazing to floor level windows shall be armour plated glass. To bathrooms and toilets shall be rough - cast narrow receded.
2.8.7
Ironmongery Subject to the building type the quality of fittings to be used shall be determined by the Company Representative. Generally ironmongery shall be in packs. Ironmongeries pack and typical requirements are detailed in Appendix J of this document.
2.9
Staircases and Platforms All stairs shall be designed and located to meet the requirements of the Royal Oman Police for means of escape in the case of fire. All doors shall open in the direction of the escape route and be positioned so as not to block any stairway. For steel stairs the minimum width of stairway, walkway & platforms shall not be less than 750mm. Stair treads shall not be made GRP or aluminium and shall be hot-dip galvanised steel. On platforms, the distance to a stair or ladder shall not be more than 25m. The Concrete platforms in front of equipment doors shall be calculated to be able to bear the equipment that will be transported through the doors.
SP-1275
Page 41
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
No stairway shall exceed sixteen risers in any one flight, if more are necessary a landing shall be provided. 2.9.1
Flow Capacities of Staircases For fire safety purposes (fire escapes) a flow capacity of 1.3 persons per second per metre width shall be used. This is greater than normal use flow capacity which, shall be determined as shown in Table 14 below: Table 14: Normal Use Staircase Flow Capacities Free Flow Mean Plan Density <0.6 persons/m2 Speed along Slope (m/s)
Limit of stair capacity with free flow (persons/min/m/width)
0.9
2.9.2
27
Full Design Capacity 1-way Plan Density 2 persons/m2 Speed along Slope (m/s) 0.6
Stair capacity (persons/min/m/width) 60
Riser / Going Relationship The following formula shall be used to determine the suitable relationship of riser to going for normal staircases: 2 R + G = 550 TO 700 mm, Where: R= Riser & G = Going Refer Table 15 for the stairs dimensions, headroom clearances, travelling distances and other requirements.
June 2004
Page 42
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 15: Dimensions For Staircases Office Type Building
Dimensions in mm
Domestic Serving for 1 Dwelling
Domestic Serving >1 Dwellings
Industrial
Office/ Domestic Fire Escape
Industrial Fire Escape
(max.)
180
210
180
210
180
210
(min.)
75
75
75
75
75
75
(max.)
310
280
310
280
310
280
(min.)
280
240
280
240
280
240
(min.)
2100
2100
2100
2100
2100
2100
Minimum clearance (*) perpendicular to flight.
1650
1650
1650
1650
1650
1650
Height of handrail above front of treads
900
900
900
900
900
900
Height of handrail above landing
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
Riser
Going
Headroom
(Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 43
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 15: Dimensions For Staircases (contd.) Office Type Building
Domestic Serving for 1 Dwelling
Max. number of risers in flight
12
16
12
Length of landings (+)
900
900
1100
Dimensions in mm
Domestic Serving >1 Dwellings
Industrial Fire Escape
16
12
16
900
1100
900
Maximum travel distance along fire escape route (Escape possible in one direction only)
30 m
30 m
30 m
30 m
30 m
30 m
Maximum travel distance along fire escape route (Escape possible in more than one direction)
46 m
46 m
46 m
46 m
46 m
46 m
*
Minimum clearance above flights between: a. Line drawn through nosings; and, b. Ceiling at edge of stairwell
+
June 2004
Office/ Domestic Fire Escape
Industrial
Length of landing shall not be less than width of staircase relevant to location of stairs.
Page 44
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.9.3
Version 1.0
Fire Rating for Structures The minimum fire rating values of the building for various purposes and types are indicated in the Table 16, however these shall meet the requirements of the latest Royal Oman Police regulations. Table 16: Guide To Fire Ratings For Various Structures Minimum Period (h) for Elements of Structure
Maximum Dimensions Purpose, Group &Type of Building
Office – Single storey building or separated part (no basement)
Building or separated part which is not single storey
Shop – Single storey building or separated part (no basement)
Height (m) of Building or of Separated Part
Floor Area (m2)
Cubic (m3) Capacity
Ground or Upper Storey
Basement Storey (incl. Floor Over)
no limit
3000
no limit
0.5
not applicable
no limit
no limit
no limit
1.0
not applicable
7.5
250
no limit
0.5*
1.0
7.5
500
no limit
0.5*
1.0
15.0
no limit
3500
1.0**
1.0
28.0
500
14000
1.0
1.5
no limit
no limit
no limit
1.5
2.0
no limit
2000
no limit
0.5*
not applicable
no limit
3000
no limit
1.0
not applicable
no limit
no limit
no limit
23.0
not applicable (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 45
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 16: Guide to Fire Ratings for various structures (Contd.) Maximum Dimensions Purpose, Group & Type of Building
Building separated part which is not single storey
Building separated part which is not single storey
Industrial single storey building or separated part (no basement)
Minimum Period (h) for Elements of Structure
Height (m) of Building or of Separated Part
Floor Area (m2)
Cubic (m3) Capacity
Ground or Upper Storey
Basement Storey (incl. Floor Over)
7.5
150
no limit
0.5*
1.0
7.5
500
no limit
0.5*
1.0
15.0
no limit
3500
1.0**
1.0
28.0
1000
7000
1.0**
2.0
no limit
2000
7000
2.0
4.0
7.5
150
no limit
0.5*
1.0
7.5
500
no limit
0.5*
1.0
15.0
no limit
3500
1.0**
1.0
28.0
1000
7000
1.0
2.0
No limits
4000
14000
2.0
4.0
no limit
2000
no limit
0.5*
not applicable
no limit
3000
no limit
1.0
not applicable
no limit
no limit
no limit
2.0
not applicable (Contd.)
June 2004
Page 46
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 16: Guide to Fire Ratings for various structures (Contd.) Minimum Period (h) for Elements of Structure
Maximum Dimensions Purpose, Group & Type of Building
Building separated part which is not single storey
Other non-residential single storey building or separated part (no basement)
Height (m) of Building or of Separated Part
Floor Area (m2)
Cubic (m3) Capacity
Ground or Upper Storey
Basement Storey (incl. Floor Over)
7.5
250
no limit
0.5*
1.0
7.5
no limit
1700
0.5*
1.0
15.0
no limit
4250
1.0**
1.0
28.0
no limit
8500
1.0
2.0
28.0
no limit
28000
2.0
4.0
no limit
2000
5500
2.0
4.0
no limit
500
no limit
0.5*
not applicable
no limit
1000
no limit
1.0
not applicable
no limit
3000
no limit
2.0
not applicable
no limit
no limit
no limit
4.0
not applicable (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 47
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 16: Guide to Fire Ratings for various structures (Contd.) Minimum Period (h) for Elements of Structure
Maximum Dimensions Purpose, Group & Type of Building
Height (m) of Building or of Separated Part
Floor Area (m2)
Cubic (m3) Capacity
Ground or Upper Storey
Basement Storey (incl. Floor Over)
7.5
150
no limit
0.5*
1.0
7.5
300
no limit
0.5
1.0
15.0
no limit
1700
1.0**
1.0
15.0
no limit
3500
1.0
2.0
28.0
no limit
7000
2.0
4.0
28.0
no limit
21000
4.0
4.0
over 28.0
1000
no limit
4.0
4.0
Building separated part which is not single storey
(Contd.)
June 2004
Page 48
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Modifications Any element of structure should have at least the minimum period needed for any other element structure, which it carries or supports (whether that other element is load bearing or not). *
Increased to 1 hour for separating walls. Reduced to 0.5 hour if the area of the basement is 50 m2 less.
**
Reduced to 0.5 hour for any floor (which is not also a compartment floor), but not for any part of floor, which contributes to the support of the building as a whole and not for any beam, which supports the floor.
Notes: 1. The floor area of each storey in the building or where the building is divided in compartments the floor area of each storey in the compartment of which the element structure forms part. 2. The cubic capacity of the building or where the building is divided into compartments cubic capacity of the compartment of which the structure forms part. 3. Where the building is fitted throughout with an automatic sprinkler system meeting relevant recommendations of BS 5306: Part 2.
SP-1275
Page 49
June 2004
Version 1.0
2.10
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Roofs Due consideration shall be given to the provision of access to roofs, where necessary for maintenance etc. In situations where required, a safe means of access shall be provided. Also waterproofing details in these instances shall be such that they will satisfactorily withstand the likely subsequent wear and tear.
2.10.1
Thermal Requirement Roofs should have a maximum ‘U’ value of 0.6 W/m2 0C. Insulation should be capable of withstanding rodent attack in situations where it may be exposed to the same. Roofs are subject to intense heat and thermal movement and waterproof membranes shall be adequately protected or detailed to withstand these conditions. It should be possible to inspect and repair the membrane periodically and consideration should be given to permanent access. Because of its exposure special care should be taken when specifying roof insulation for ‘Upside-Down’ roofs, in terms of required insulation characteristics, durability, water absorption and physical strength.
2.10.2
Water Discharge Rain is infrequent, but when it does occur it can be torrential, consequently, traditional gargoyles are the preferred method of rainwater disposal from flat roofs and should be employed. Careful consideration shall be given to the projection of gargoyles and to the ground treatment where rain water discharges. Gargoyles shall be provided with suitable drips to prevent water running down the face of the building causing unsightly stains. Gargoyles shall be sited away from doors, lights and where possible windows.
2.10.3
Flat Roofs Flat roofs should be promoted where possible. Pitched roofs, other than for warehouses/ workshops, are not permitted in the Muscat Area. The upside down flat roof has the added advantage that the roof insulation protects the waterproofing layer from both the intense heat and puncturing. Extremely careful detailing of such roofs is essential to ensure durability. Flat roofs shall be provided with a minimum fall of 1.80. Consideration shall be given to pre-cambering, particularly on long span roofs to prevent ponding. In any case ponding shall not occur. Parapets on flat roofs are a natural source of building defects, particularly when of block work construction. Parapets shall be carefully detailed to control thermal movement with control joints not exceeding the spacing in section 2.8.1.4. Parapets shall be securely fixed to the roof slab and shall be capable of resisting a minimum horizontal load, on access roofs, of 0.75 kN/m run at the top of the parapet which should be a minimum of 1.1 m above the roof covering. Flat roofs cast on load bearing block work should contain a slip plane between the block work and slab soffit to allow for thermal movement of the slab without distressing the block work. The roof slab, however, must be suitably held in place to ensure stability criteria are maintained.
June 2004
Page 50
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.10.4
Version 1.0
Pitched Roofs Pitched roofs shall be avoided wherever possible. As a general rule, only flat roof designs shall be used in the Muscat Area. Pitched roof designs may be considered in the Interior only if it needs to match existing pitched roofs, or used for warehouses/ workshops and sunshades. Pitched roofs in the Muscat Area have to be hidden by using appropriate facades. When used, pitched roof plan shapes shall be kept as simple as possible, hips and valleys should be avoided. The construction shall be such as to result in a completely waterproofed roof. Consideration shall be given to ridge vents in order to reduce internal design pressures arising from wind loading and where required to provide natural ventilation. Pitched roofs shall generally have a slope of 200. Gutters and downspouts shall only be provided over entrances and where people have to pass. However adequate details at ground level shall be provided to prevent erosion and percolation. Design of Sunshades and standard details are covered under a separate document: SP-1283 Specification for Standard Sunshades – ‘Design & Standard Drawings’.
2.10.5
Roof Sheeting It is important to fully specify the roof sheeting requirements on design drawings. The following minimum requirements shall be used: Galvanised Steel Sheeting shall: 1.
Be painted with a protective coating on both sides, with a minimum of 25 microns on the external face, and 12.5 microns for the internal face.
2.
Have a minimum thickness of the metal of 0.5 mm.
3.
Have a profile depth of not less than 26 mm.
4.
Not be used in severe marine areas (for example, MAF, RAH, etc.): this is also in line with the requirements of the Muscat Municipality.
5.
Be thoroughly inspected during erection and before acceptance, looking carefully how drilled holes and cut edges are finished off (ensure drill cuttings are not left as a deposit on the sheeting upon completion of the works).
6.
Be inspected on a yearly basis for deterioration, resulting in the sheets being washed down to remove salt deposits.
Aluminium Sheeting shall:
SP-1275
1.
Be painted with a minimum of 50 microns on the external face, and the internal face is painted or lacquered,
2.
Have a minimum thickness of the metal of 0.7 mm,
3.
Have a profile depth of not less than 26 mm,
Page 51
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
4.
Be inspected on a two yearly basis, resulting in the sheets being washed down to remove salt deposits,
5.
Be fixed with stainless steel self-tapping screws and isolated from the purlins with In-seal Tape.
In addition to the above two materials (but ignoring sheeting materials such as GRP/ GRE/ etc.), a third type of material may be used known as 55%AIZn Coated Steel Sheeting. This material has an ideal mix of 55% Aluminium, 43.4% Zinc and 1.6 Silicon. The material shall follow the same requirements as Galvanised Steel (see above), but can be used for Coastal Areas (MAF, RAH, etc.). There might be problems related to powder coating this material and therefore colour choices will be limited.
2.11
Built-in-Furniture All cupboards shall be fitted with shelving to maximise the use of the storage space. In the layout of kitchens particular attention shall be paid to safe distances between electric points and the sink. Kitchens shall be designed to be ergonomically and correctly related in the layout of the parts. In general, Broom cupboard – Fridge/Freezer – Worktop – Sink Worktop – Cooker Worktop. Worktop shall have integral up stands. Fitted wardrobes shall be provided in all bedrooms including SS rooms and Clinic wards. Where rooms are in use by two persons two wardrobes shall be provided. In each dwelling bathroom, and each room with bed(s) and basin, a bathroom cabinet shall be provided with mirror front, two sections, shaver point and light. Pin boards shall be provided to all: 1.
JS Messes – Entrance Halls, Billiards Rooms, Table Tennis Rooms, Dining Rooms.
2.
Offices.
3.
Squash viewing gallery.
To detached and semi-detached accommodation and mess block, curtain pelmets shall be provided. To outdoor cinemas, slatted hardwood seating shall be provided. To SS Mess firm bar with back display and storage shall be provided.
2.12
Security
2.12.1
Fencing and Gates All fencing and gates shall comply with the requirements of the Company standard specification SP-1279-P Specification for Civil & Building Construction – ‘Fencing & Gates’. The consultants drawing shall make reference to the fencing and gate types contained therein. Types of fences to be used in various locations are shown in Table 17:
June 2004
Page 52
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 17: Types of Fences Location
Type of Fence
Air Fields and Air Strips
D
Booster Station
B
Contractors Area – (Industrial)
C
Contractors Area – (Residential)
C
Corrosion Monitoring Pit
Barrier
Explosives Store
A
Farms
C
Flares – Ground
C
Flares – Tower
C
Garbage Dumps
C
Gas Plants (Double Fence)
A
Gathering Station
B
H2S Well
B
High Pressure Gas Well Heads
B
Interior Camps
B
Isotope Pit
A
Main Line Block Valve Station
B
Main Line Pump Station
A
Microwave Areas
B
Oil Tank Farm – Primary
B
Oil Tank Farm – Secondary
B
Oil Terminal & Metering Station (Double Fence)
A
Oxydation Ponds
C
Pig Launchers/ Catchers (when separate)
B
PDO Industrial Area – Camp Workshop
C (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 53
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 17: Types of Fences (contd.) Location
Type of Fence
PDO Industrial Area – Fire Station
C
PDO Industrial Area – Fire Training
C
PDO Industrial Area – Main Workshop
C
Power Station
B
Production Station
A
Reverse Osmosis Plant
C
Right of Way (only in Populous Areas)
Barrier
Sewage Treatment Plants
C
Sub Station
B
Supply Yard – Sub Station
B
Supply Yard – Surplus
B
Supply Yard – Scrap
B
Telecom Centres
A
Telecom Towers
B
Water Injection Area (when separate)
B
Well Test Module
B
In addition to the above requirements, a standard signboard (refer SP-1284 Specification for Signs & Signboards – ‘Standard Signs Catalogue’ shall be placed at the entrance of the fenced compound, indicating the presence of a ‘Restricted Area’ (refer CP-122). It should be noted that the rationale for installing fences and gates as tabled above, is as a direct result of having identified Specific HSE Site Hazards and/ or Specific Security related Access Control Requirements. The HSE Access Control Procedure (refer CP-122 and the documents referenced therein), Stipulates that the asset holder (as defined in the Corporate Asset Holder Register) is required to specify those areas, which need Access Control (based on what hazards and threats have been identified). It is possible therefore, that asset holders may decide to install fences/ gates in locations not included in the above table. Low Pressure Well Heads and Remote Manifolds do not require fencing. For details refer SP-1127 Plant Equipment & Layout Specification.
June 2004
Page 54
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.13
Version 1.0
Paint Finish & Colour Colours shall be to British Standard BS 4800. If specific colours are not requested or specified, the following colours should be used for: 08-B-15
:
Magnolia
10-B-15
:
Ivory
08-B-17
:
Wood Smoke
06-C-33
:
Honeysuckle
14-C-31
:
Light Green
00-E-55
:
White
For the non-specialised buildings, that is, accommodation, offices, exposed service pipes, for example water pipes, shall be painted to match their background colour. 2.13.1
External Surfaces All external walls should be 06-C-33 throughout (unless specified otherwise). All exposed drainage or vent pipes in front of the external wall shall be painted the same colour as the wall.
2.13.2
Internal Surfaces All Mess Dining Rooms, Games Rooms, Lounges, Billiards Rooms and TV/Video Rooms shall be 08-B-17 - Wood Smoke. All Clinic and Hospital Wards shall be 14-C-31 – Light Green. All Detached and Semi-detached Housing shall be 08-B-15 - Magnolia. Where the soffit of the ceiling is exposed (either exposed concrete or plastered ceilings) use 00-E-55. All other areas shall be 10-B-15 - Ivory. The type of paint finish shall be as described in Wall Finishes (Appendix D).
2.14
External Works External works shall be designed to suit the particular traffic, whether vehicular or pedestrian. Emphasis is to be placed on cost saving by, for example, minimising lengths of roads, paving only essential areas and providing a finished level, which will minimise earthworks and yet function to the technical requirements.
2.14.1
Site Preparation Site is to be inspected and general site clearance requirements established. Design is to include for removal of debris, vegetation and vegetable soil, removal or replanting plants, trees, bushes, etc. and protection measures for plants, trees and bushes where they are to remain within the project works.
SP-1275
Page 55
June 2004
Version 1.0
2.14.2
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Landscaping All projects involving landscaping should incorporate the current PDO landscaping specification SP-1279-Q. Particular attention should be paid to the creation of a localised microclimate with low, medium or high canopies as appropriate to the particular situation. For Landscaping Irrigation refer to section 2.17.8. 2.14.2.1 Hard Landscaping Hard landscaping should be designed with regard to considerations of general aesthetics. Within open spaces hard landscaping/foot paths etc. should be designed with curves, that is, straight lines should be avoided. An aesthetically pleasing variety of colour should be achieved in hard landscaping. 2.14.2.2 Soft Landscaping Soft Landscaping should be designed considering both the aesthetic aims and long term maintenance requirements. 2.14.2.3 Screening Requirements Consideration should be given to the need to reduce dust nuisance in amenity areas by landscaping in conjunction with other appropriate means, for example, fabric attached to fences.
2.14.3
Roads 2.14.3.1 Internal Access Road Where internal access roads are required to serve buildings, car-parking areas etc., the Consultant must clarify the likely range of vehicles that will be requiring access. Where the layout is designed for private vehicle usage, mountable kerbs should be provided where necessary to allow for occasional heavy vehicle passage. 1. Geometric Design: Typical desirable and minimum standards for internal access roads for both light and commercial vehicle usage are given in Table 18. It should however be borne in mind that the dimensional requirements may vary according to the actual size of commercial vehicle requiring access. Table 18: Typical Design Standards For Internal Access Roads Light Vehicle
Commercial Vehicle
Dimensions in metres Max.
Min.
Max.
Min.
Carriageway Width – 1 way
4.5
3.0
5.5
4.5
Carriageway Width – 2 way
6.0
4.5
7.0
6.0
Centre Line Radius
30.0
10.0
60.0
30.0
Kerb Radius at Junctions
6.0
4.0
15.0
10.0
Roadside Parking bay Width
June 2004
2.5
Page 56
3.5
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Roads are to be cambered or with cross fall at 1.5% and provided with adequate longitudinal gradient to ensure dispersal of storm water into the proposed drainage system. Care shall be taken in the design to avoid flat spots and consequent ponding of storm water. Care shall be taken to ensure adequate visibility sightlines particularly where buildings are located adjacent to junctions. 2. Pavement construction The pavement is to be constructed to suit the future loading over the specified design life. Where loadings are light, consideration should be given to designing a pavement of granular material sealed with surface dressing (e.g. “spray and chip”, SPP stabilised and sand sealed or slurry dressing). Where roads will be trafficked by commercial vehicles, the anticipated traffic loading should be predicted and the pavement designed in accordance with the procedure set out in the latest issue of the “Oman Highway Design Manual”, as well as what is advised in both SP1279-R & S (Specification for Civil & Building Construction – ‘Roads & Paving’, and ‘Graded Roads, Rig Locations, Airstrips, Tank Pads & Bund Works). 3. Road Signs & Markings: Road signs and markings should be minimised and yet give clear direction to drivers. Road signs should be of minimum 600mm size and be in accordance with SP-1284 Specification for Signs and Signboards – ‘Standard Signs Catalogue’. Road markings should be either thermoplastic or road marking paint to suit the scale of works. A mandatory warning sign is required below the danger warnings at all junctions of the Grades/Tarmac transition to give more information about the dangerous situation. 2.14.3.2 External Access Roads Where external access roads are required to serve a facility, the road must be designed to suit the initial level of service and yet allow for future upgrading if required. 1. Geometric Design Roads are to be designed to the geometric design standards set out in the latest issue of the “Oman Highway Design Manual”, using an appropriate design speed. Road surfaces are to be profiled to ensure rapid dispersal of storm water. 2. Pavement Construction Figure 4 details standard pavement construction for PDO interior roads, which will allow progressive development of the standard of road as required. These are further detailed in SP-1279-S Specification for Civil & Building Works – Graded Roads, Rig Locations, Airstrips, Tank Pads & Bund Works’. Roads, which are to be adopted by the Ministry of Communications, are to be constructed with asphaltic concrete overlying granular pavement layers. The pavement is to be designed in accordance with the latest issue of the “Oman Highway Design Manual”. Currently tests are being performed using road material stabilisers. Their performance in these tests might well promote the use of road stabilisers in the construction of both graded
SP-1275
Page 57
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
and paved roads. The road designer shall therefore investigate the status of these tests, and hence assess their suitability in the design of all roads. Successful road base stabilisation, say with SPP (Sulphonated Petroleum Product), could result in CBR of greater than 120, which will in turn allow cheaper road surface dressings to be used, such as Sand Seal and Slurry. However, the latter road seal thickness is only in the order of 6 to 8 mm, and therefore road surface finish tolerance (and therefore the road’s “riding comfort”) is likely to be poor. 3. Road Signs and Markings: Road signs and markings should be provided to suit the scale of the road and shall be in accordance with the latest issue of SP-1284 Specification for Signs and Signboards – Standard Signs Catalogue and the “Oman Highway Design Manual”. A mandatory warning sign is required below the danger warnings at all junctions of the Grades/Tarmac transition to give more information about the dangerous situation. 2.14.4
Car Parks Car parks should be provided on-site to cater for employees, operational needs and visitors typical car park spacing requirements are given in Table 19. Car parks shall be designed so as to discourage parking in the aisles and access routes. Where parking is designed for commercial vehicles, the standards to be applied are to suit the particular usage. 2.14.4.1 Standard Parking Layout Car parking facilities shall be generally designed to the layout standards shown in Figure 5. Parking bays are based on a 3 m x 6 m module. Where available space permits, parking areas should be designed for 900angle parking. Car parks shall be profiled to ensure dispersal of storm water to the proposed drainage system. 2.14.4.2 Car Parks Construction Car parks be surfaced with 80 mm thick interlocking block paving, asphaltic concrete or surface dressing as appropriate to the scale of construction and required aesthetics. Pavement construction is to be designed to cater for the relevant loading over the design period. Where the construction is in interlocking block work, use should be made of different colours to clearly distinguish between vehicle routes and parking areas. In general vehicles routes are to be paved with grey blocks and parking areas with charcoal grey blocks. Landscaping and street furniture should be set back from kerb lines to allow overhang of vehicles. 2.14.4.3 Road Signs & Markings Road signs and markings should be minimised and yet give clear direction to drivers. Where interlocking block work construction is proposed, use should be made of coloured blocks for markings and bay divisions. Road signs should be of minimum 600 mm size and in accordance with the latest issue of SP-1284 Specification for Signs & Signboards – ‘Standard Signs Catalogue’.
June 2004
Page 58
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Figure 4: Standard Pavement Construction for Interior Roads
(Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 59
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Figure 4: Standard Pavement Construction for Interior Roads (contd.)
(Contd.)
June 2004
Page 60
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Figure 4: Standard Pavement Construction for Interior Roads (contd.)
(Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 61
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Figure 4: Standard Pavement Construction for Interior Roads (contd.)
June 2004
Page 62
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 19: Typical Car-parking provision Parking Spaces Facility
On Site
Off Site
500 – 900 m2
2
1
200 – 400 m2
1
1
Flats/ Town Houses
1
0.5
Kindergarten
14
12
Elementary
16 – 38
24 – 96
Preparatory
23 – 54
22 – 86
Secondary
200 - 375
38 – 77
Hospital (40 bed)
44
0
Clinic (18 bed)
20
0
Social and Cultural
Social Centres
20
30
Offices
All Centres
1/50 m2 (1)
1/50 m2 (1)
Retail
Camp Shops
1/30 m2 (1)
Other Centres
1/30 m2 (1)
Residential
Education
Health Care
Transport Services
SP-1275
Type
Facility Housing
Bus Station
0
20
Bus Terminus
0
40
Bus Garage
50
0
Page 63
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Figure 5: Standard Parking Layouts
(Contd.)
June 2004
Page 64
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Figure 5: Standard Parking Layouts (contd.)
SP-1275
Page 65
June 2004
Version 1.0
2.14.5
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Materials Storage Yards Material storage yards should be designed to suit the particular material to be stored. Where applicable, the following are to be included: -
Storage areas for perishable goods and non-perishable goods.
-
Lay down areas for perishable goods and non-perishable goods.
-
Shake out and sorting out areas.
-
Surplus material store.
-
Area for scrap material.
-
Dedicated facilities for receipt and despatch.
Particular attention must be made for access and manoeuvre of forklifts and delivery vehicles. 2.14.6
Footpaths Footpaths are to be provided, where required, to clearly define pedestrian routes. Analysis is to be carried out of the desirable walkway routes, bearing in mind that pedestrians tend to try to minimise the distance walked. 2.14.6.1 Footpath Dimensions Footpaths are to generally 2 m wide. This may be reduced to 1.5 m minimum where layouts and volume of pedestrian traffic permits. 2.14.6.2 Footpath Construction Footpath are generally to be surfaced with 60 mm coloured interlocking block work or pre cast concrete slabs overlying sand laying course and granular base material. Footpaths are to be bound by kerbs.
2.14.7
Well Location and Flow/Bulk Line Layout In principle, all costs associated with access to wells and routing of flow lines to the Gathering Station, shall be kept to a minimum. The simplified sketch, shown below (Figure 6), shows how the above may be achieved. Here, the access field roads enter the field from one side, whilst the services to the wells, as well as the flow lines and/or bulk lines, enter/exit from the other side of the field. By doing so, the number of road crossing is kept to a minimum (in this example only one road crossing is required), allowing all power cables to be routed under roads.
June 2004
Page 66
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Figure 6: Concept Layout Of Wells, Drilling Locations Flow/Bulk Lines Using Min. Road Crossing
SP-1275
Page 67
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.14.7.1 Piping Corridors Design of piping corridors shall take account of:-
2.15
-
Manifolds flow lines into bulk lines, located off-centre.
-
Potential use of multi port selector valves,
-
Expansion loops and pipe support loads/overturning effects,
-
Future possibility of infill wells, and therefore access to them,
-
Access to wells, to services, to flow lines and bulk lines,
-
Power/signal distribution, located off-centre.
-
Well platform location and orientation, and rig access.
Building Services Design Requirements Building services design criteria shall be established in consultation with the Company. Designs shall be fit for purpose and requirements for economy, reliability, maintainability, flexibility and life expectancy shall be agreed with the company. The requirements here described shall apply to the following Sections of this documents. 2.16: Air Conditioning & Ventilation 2.17: Plumbing 2.18: Sewage Treatment 2.19: Electrical One set of the final approved design calculation shall be submitted to the Company for the record purpose.
2.15.1
Manufacturers & Vendors Material and equipment shall be selected from the latest PGSC (Product Group Service Codes) list. .As stipulated, Type A materials, shall be identified by duty and specification only, not by the manufacturer. In the selection of materials and equipment, building services designs shall show a preference for the use of local, and GCC, manufacturers.
2.15.2
Specification & Drawings Building services designs should take the following form. -
Company Standard Specifications
-
Project Particular Specification
-
Equipment Schedules
-
System Schematics & Isometrics
-
Control Logic & Line Diagrams
June 2004
Page 68
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.15.3
-
Electrical Line Diagrams
-
Wiring Diagrams
-
External Layout Drawings, Scale 1:200 or 1:100
-
Internal Layout Drawings, Scale 1:50
-
Equipment Area Drawings, Scale 1:20
-
Details drawings, Scale 1:10
-
The maximum drawing size shall be A1.
Version 1.0
As Built Drawings Building services design should normally include updating the drawings to “As Built”.
2.15.4
External Services External services include the services of water, electricity, sewerage, telecommunications, fire alarm, fire protection and irrigation. Chilled water service may also be included. External service design should include the allocation of rights of way. Wherever possible services should be routed in common services trenches located in unpaved areas. Minimum dimensions for depths of cover and for separation between services are shown on company Standard Drawings STD-2-1404.
2.16
Air-Conditioning & Ventilation The Building Services design shall include, but not be limited to, overall scheme design, sizing of equipment and pipe work and coordination with other service. Loads should be calculated using ASHRAE, Carrier or CIBSE methods. District chilled water service installations should comprise buried mains served from a chiller compound suitably located to reduce the environmental impact, particularly noise, on adjacent buildings. The chiller compound pump room may be combined with an electrical substation in one building. Allowance should be made for future expansion of district chilled water schemes, and this should be done with minimal costs. For schemes with a high probability of future expansion, ring main chilled water distribution be provided, with secondary chilled water pumps at each building. For other schemes, radial distribution may be appropriate. In any case, the logistic and limits of future expansion should be established and agreed with the Company. The interface with the electrical design shall be established with the Company as described in section 2.19. The Air-Conditioning & Ventilation system, materials and Equipments shall comply with the SP-1285-B Specification for Civil & Buildings Utility Services – ‘Air Conditioning Works’.
SP-1275
Page 69
June 2004
Version 1.0
2.16.1
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Design Criteria for Air Conditioning & Ventilation Works 2.16.1.1 Outdoor Conditions Design outdoor conditions should be based on relevant meteorological data for each project area and shall be subject to Company approval. In the absence of definitive data, the figures given in Table 20 should be used. Table 20: Outdoor Air conditioning Design Criteria. Location
Summer
Winter
Coastal Oman
44/33 0C DB/WB
18/15 0C DB/WB
North Oman
50/30 0C DB/WB
13/11 0C DB/WB
South Oman
47/32 0C DB/WB
12/10 0C DB/WB
2.16.1.2 Indoor Conditions Appendix K includes the following criteria relating to the majority of company facilities. -
Room temperature
-
Room humidity
-
Minimum fresh air
-
Minimum air change
-
Maximum noise rating
Where criteria are not listed in Appendix K, design indoor conditions should be based on the CIBSE Guide, Section A1, Environmental Criteria for Design, and shall be subject to Company approval. Normally, humidity control should not be necessary. However, the critical psychometrics of each design should be checked to ensure that reasonable comfort conditions are always achieved. 2.16.1.3 Equipment Overcapacity With diversity and standby requirements taken into account, air-conditioning equipment should be sized to have a minimum overcapacity of 15%. 2.16.2
Chilled Water 2.16.2.1 Chiller compounds & Equipment Water chillers shall be outdoor, package units located within a secure enclosure. An access gate shall be provided for each chiller and external lighting shall be provided for maintenance purposes.
June 2004
Page 70
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
An air-conditioned pump room should be provided to house the following equipment. -
Primary chilled water pumps
-
Motor control panel
-
Pressurisation unit
-
Water treatment unit
-
Lighting and small power distribution board
Pipe work and cables between chillers and pump room should be directly buried. 2.16.2.2 Controls In the selection of water chillers, proper account shall be taken of low load operation. In any case, chillers should be capable of running at 25% full load or less. One primary pump should be provided to run with each chiller, with one additional pump as standby. Selector control should be provided for both chillers and pumps so that any pump may be selected to run with any chiller. The lead pump should also act as jockey pump in the event that no chiller is required to run. 2.16.2.3 Pipe work Pipe work should be set out to facilitate draining down at low points and automatic venting at high points. Provisions shall be made to allow the flushing of the complete chilled water circuit. Water treatment shall include a pre-commissioning descaler, anticorrosion dosing and an algae inhibitor. Chilled water systems should normally be pressurised to 1 bar(g). 2.16.3
Specialist Areas 2.16.3.1 Battery rooms The design of battery room ventilation system shall fully comply with the requirements of DIN 57510/VDE 0510. Battery systems considered here are as follows. Nickel Cadmium
Lead Acid
Trickle charge
1.4 – 1.45 volts/cell
Boost charge
1.6 – 1.65 volts/cell
Trickle charge
2.23 volts/cell
Boost charge
2.4 volts/cell
All cells in which the electrolyte is in aqueous solution give off hydrogen and oxygen during charging, the major gassing occurring towards the end of the charging or during boost charging. Typical boost charging cycles are for 8 hours every 6 months. An explosive mixture is formed when the hydrogen concentration, by volume, in air exceeds 3.8%.
SP-1275
Page 71
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
A safe dilution (20% of the above) will be maintained using the following formula.
Q = 0.055 x N x I Where, Q = Airflow in m3/h N = Number of battery cells. (Number of blocks x cells/block) I = Charging current at the end of the boost charge, in amps (For design purposes, 25% rated charger current in amps) Battery rooms should be airconditioned to maintain an average room temperature of 10 – 300C, to give best battery performance and service life, and to limit electrolyte temperature rises during charging. Inlet air should be introduced at low level, from the building airconditioning system, and mechanically exhausted to atmosphere at as high a level as possible, to avoid air pockets. When ventilation is provided as described above, then the battery room shall be classified as non-hazardous. However, due to possible local concentrations of gas, the exhaust fan should be suitable for a Zone 2 installation and resistant to the electrolyte. 2.16.3.2 Electrical Substations & Switch Houses Substations and switch houses should normally be designed as completely closed structures, with dust tight construction and cable passages. The air conditioning design shall include two or more separate installations, which shall be individually electrically supplied and controlled. The indoor design criteria shall be such that: During normal operation, the maximum indoor temperature shall not rise above 350C DB. In the case of breakdown or maintenance to one of the installations, the maximum indoor temperature shall not rise above 400C DB. The maximum supply air relative humidity shall not exceed 90%. 2.16.3.3 Gas Bottle Stores Spare and empty gas bottles shall be separated and stored in an upright-chained position and housed in a purpose built, well ventilated, shaded and secured enclosure located at least 20 m from combustible materials. Possible air pockets at high level shall be avoided. Requirements are normally satisfied by the provisions of a cage of tubular frame, chain link fencing and roof sheeting with an internal separation. Electrical installations in gas bottle stores shall be suitable for Zone 2.
June 2004
Page 72
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
2.16.3.4 Kitchens The guidelines given below address commercial catering installations, criteria for domestic kitchens are given in Appendix K. Often it is not possible to achieve comfort conditions in kitchen cooking areas at all times because of the extremely high expenditure involved. In such cases, it should be sufficient to maintain acceptable working conditions. Generally air should be extracted from cooking and subsidiary areas through double-skin hoods located over the main cooking and dishwashing equipment. Hoods should be sized to overlap equipment by 100 mm, to have a minimum face velocity of 0.3 m/s and to have a minimum clearance of 1900 mm above finished floor level. The hood volume should suit the equipment covered. 80 – 85% of the replacement air should be provided, as filtered outside air, at the internal perimeter of the hood. If this part of the replacement air is supplied outside the hood, it should be 100% outside air-cooled to plenum conditions, say 250C. Ducted, re-circulating systems should not be used because of greasing problems. The remainder of the replacement air should be drawn from adjacent areas so that a negative kitchen pressure is maintained to contain odours. Extract ductwork shall be designed for ease of cleaning, with flanged joints and man-size access doors, and shall be constructed of galvanised sheet steel, minimum thickness, 1.0 mm. Air velocities should be a minimum of 9 m/s. Extract fans should be treated for moisture and heat, and attenuators should be avoided. Comfort air conditioning should be provided by high level fan coil units. The requirements for fire detection and protection in kitchens are included in SP-1075 Specification for Fire & Explosion Risk Management. 2.16.3.5 Laboratories Laboratory air conditioning design shall be based on the specific requirements of the laboratory work. However, the following guidelines should apply. Laboratory working and solvent storage areas should be provided with an 100% outside air system, and should be under positive pressure to reduce dust ingress. In interior Oman, heating should be included for winter morning start up. Ancillary areas, such as offices, should be provided with separate, re-circulating systems such as fan coil units. Mechanical exhaust should be provided for chemical and material storage areas, typically at a rate of 6 – 15 air changes an hour, depending on the items stored. Fume cupboards for use with hydrocarbons should have an acid resistant 18/12 stainless steel internal fume chamber with integral bench top. The minimum air velocity over a 400 mm deep sash opening should be 0.75 m/s. Fume cupboards for general use should have 1 mm thick high-pressure plastic laminate on the sides and solid epoxy resin bench tops. The minimum air velocity over a 400 mm deep sash opening should be 0.5 m/s. All fume cupboards should be provided with airfoil sash opening profiles and high-level bypass grilles to ensure constant volume airstreams. Fume cupboard exhaust ductwork shall be constructed of HDPE and shall not contain fire dampers. The internal fume chamber, exhaust ducting and exhaust fan shall be classified as Zone 1 hazard. The internal light fittings therefore shall be separated from the fume chamber by an airtight glass plate. Solvent and gas bottle stores shall be classified Zone 2. SP-1275
Page 73
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.16.3.6 Temporary Buildings Air conditioning design parameters for temporary buildings, such as transportable units, should be similar to those for permanent buildings. However, due to inferior thermal storage characteristics, electric heating may be required. 2.16.4
Condensate Drains Condensate drains from indoor terminal units should discharge to wash hand basins, or sinks, before the trap to ensure that the connection to the drainage system is always sealed. While drains may discharge into planter areas, the use of soakaways should be avoided.
2.16.5
Refrigerant Pipe work Pipe work shall not be directly buried, nor chased in floors or walls, but shall be enclosed in preformed ducts or voids.
2.16.6
Automatic Shutdown Activation of a fire alarm shall cause the shutdown of air conditioning system, unless continued operation of the system does not cause spread of smoke to outside the area where the fire has been detected.
2.16.7
Legionnaires Disease Where installations include evaporate water-cooling, the guidelines of CIBSE TM 13, minimising the Risk of Legionnaires Disease, shall be followed. Particular attention is drawn to the optimum temperature for multiplication of bacteria and to the design, operation and maintenance of evaporative water-cooling systems.
2.17
Plumbing Plumbing installation design includes the following services: -
Potable water,
-
Domestic hot and cold water,
-
Drainage,
-
Liquid petroleum gas,
-
Laboratory piped services,
-
Fire fighting water,
-
Swimming pools,
-
Irrigation.
Plumbing installation, materials and equipment shall comply with the following specifications: SP-1285-C Specification for Civil & Buildings Utility Services - ‘Plumbing Works’ SP-1285-D Specification for Civil & Buildings Utility Services – ‘Fire Protection Works’ SP-1280 Specification for Swimming Pools - ‘Design & Construction Guidelines’
June 2004
Page 74
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.17.1
Version 1.0
Potable Water Normally, the primary source of potable water will be provided by the Company, which will be by outside the scope of the Building Services Project. The demand, size, location and interface for the potable water main connection(s) should be established with the Company at preliminary design stage. Connection to existing potable water mains shall require prior Company approval. The valve and meter may be supplied and installed, and the service connection made, by the Company. The following Company Standard Drawings relate to water supply systems. STD-2-1401: Typical Potable Water Details 2.17.1.1 Water Demand Demand will vary with time, location and population. Average and peak consumption figures should be subject to individual analysis for each system. However, in the absence of definitive data, the figures in Table 21 should be used for average demands: Table 21: Typical Water Demands Area
Water Demand
Coast Residential
400 litre / day / person
Offices
180 litre / day / person
Industrial
As advised by the Company
Interior Residential
450 litre / day / person
Offices
180 litre / day / person
Industrial
As advised by the Company
Similarly, peak demands may be taken as 5 times of the average. 2.17.1.2 Isolating Valves, Air Valves, Washouts Isolating valves shall be located at:
SP-1275
-
Major intersections,
-
Branches off ring mains,
-
Regular intervals on distribution mains shall be 400 m maximum spacing.
Page 75
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Valve chambers should be located in areas with easy access but not subject to heavy traffic. Pipelines shall have facilities for venting air, flushing and cleaning. In secondary distribution networks, air may be vented through building connections. In pipelines of 300 mm dia or greater, air valves and washouts should be provided at high and low points respectively. 2.17.1.3 Water Meters Water meters shall be provided for each large user, down to and including all Senior Staff accommodation (married and bachelor), and on the main transmission line for each distribution network. Meters should be fitted above ground at building entries, or in valve chambers below ground. 2.17.1.4 Storage The capacity and location of main storage tanks should be agreed with the Company. In general, not less than 24 hours storage should be provided in any distribution system, but this will depend on the source and location of the water supply. Main water tanks should be provided with visual level indicators, access ladders, access manholes, (with adequate provision for safety and lighting) etc. Inlet and overflows should be close to access points for maintenance purposes. 2.17.1.5 Pumping Pump sets should be designed to meet forecast peak demands. Constant pressure systems, with run and standby facility, are preferred. 2.17.1.6 Sterilisation Potable water systems shall be completely flushed out and sterilised, to the approval of the Company, before being put into service. Details of the sterilisation process are given in SP-1285-C Specification for Civil & Buildings Utility Services – Plumbing Works. 2.17.2 Domestic Hot & Cold Water Design of HWS/CWS systems shall comply with the requirements of BS 6700: Specification for Design, Installation, Testing & Maintenance of Services Supplying Water for Domestic Use within Buildings & their Cartilages. 2.17.2.1 Water Consumption While published data may be used as guidelines, estimated consumption of water should be based on specific use as well as numbers of consumers and fittings. For example, for Staff Accommodation Blocks in the Interior, peak demand for HWS is for showers at the end of shifts.
June 2004
Page 76
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Water heater sizes should therefore be based on the following. Shower demand
:
say 0.1 l/s/shower
Shower duration
:
say 180 sec
:
say 75%
Number of showers Diversity
Section 2.17.1.1 gives typical per capita water demands for different applications. 2.17.2.2 Water Systems Systems should be designed for supply directly from the potable water main unless there is a specific requirement for storage. In any case, drinking water draw offs shall be taken directly from the main. HWS/CWS systems shall be vented at all high points and provision for drain-down shall be provided at all low points. Treated effluent water may be used to flush toilet in order to conserve water. In such situation, a separate close system shall be designed to tap from nearest irrigation source. Refer also 2.17.8. 2.17.2.3 Isolation The incoming main shall be provided with a stop valve and a drain cock, preferably located immediately inside the building. The stop valve may be located in a valve chamber adjacent to the building. Connections to sanitary ware, or equipment, should be provided with a means of isolation. However, in some applications, and subject to Company approval, it may be sufficient to isolate in sections rather than individually. 2.17.2.4 Insulation HWS/CWS pipe work exposed to ambient conditions, concealed in ducts and in false ceiling voids, and in equipment rooms shall be insulated. Pipe work buried in wall and floor chases shall be protected. Surface mounted connections to equipment and fittings shall not be insulated but should be painted. 2.17.2.5 Sterilisation HWS/CWS systems shall be completely flushed out and sterilised, to the approval of the Company, before being put into service (see section 2.17.1.6). 2.17.2.6 Flush Control Valves All urinal cisterns, and other automatically flushed devices, shall be fitted with a flush control valve to limit the waste of water. Control should be by provision of push button flush pipe valves or may be by cistern cold feed control valves.
SP-1275
Page 77
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.17.2.7 Water Closet spray Assemblies Spray assemblies shall be provided for all AWC’s, and for EWCs in public toilets, located on the right hand side of the pan. 2.17.2.8 Emergency Showers Emergency showers shall be capable of delivering water at a minimum rate of 80 1/min at a pressure of 0.3 bar(g). Water to showers should be taken, by a dedicated gravity feed, from a cold water storage tank. However, if insufficient head is available or the water temperature may exceed 35 0C, then a connection should be taken directly off the incoming main, immediately after the main stop valve. 2.17.2.9 Emergency Eye Wash Stations Eye wash stations shall be self-contained units, mounted on wall brackets, located within 10 sec or 30 m of the hazard and such that the water temperature shall not exceed 40 0C. Units shall flush both eyes simultaneously and deliver not less than 1.5 1/min. 2.17.2.10 Hot Water Service Dead legs HWS deadlegs shall not exceed the lengths listed in Table 22. When dead legs do exceed these length secondary HWS pumps shall be installed. Table 22: Maximum HWS Dead legs Pipe Size
2.17.3
Max Length
15 mm
12 m
22 mm
8m
28 mm
3m
Drainage Design of above ground drainage systems shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 12056 ‘Gravity Drainage Systems inside buildings’
2.17.4
Sewerage This section covers domestic sewage systems that discharge into treatment plants. Sewage treatment is addressed in section 2.18 of this specification. Systems handling industrial, non-biodegradable, waste shall be designed in consultation with the Company. Storm water drainage shall not discharge into sewage systems. Systems should be designed in accordance with BS EN 752 Drain & Sewer Systems Outside buildings and the following Company Standard Drawing STD-2-1030 Typical Manhole Details.
June 2004
Page 78
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
2.17.4.1 Flow Rates Rates of sewage flow vary with time, location and population. Average and peak flow rates should be subject to individual analysis for each system. However, in the absence of definitive data, the figures in Table 23 should be used for average dry weather flows (DWF): Table 23: Typical Sewage Flow Rates Area
Water Demand
Coast Residential
350 litre / day / person
Offices
160 litre / day / person
Interior Residential
400 litre / day / person
Offices
160 litre / day / person
Similarly, in the absence of definitive data, peak flows may be taken as 3 times DWF. 2.17.4.2 Minimum Pipe Diameters Below slab on grade, short runs
:
50 mm
Below slab on grade, main runs
:
110 mm
Building connections
:
110 mm
Between manholes
:
60 mm
2.17.4.3 Location of Manholes Manholes shall be provided at all changes of direction and at all junctions. For straight runs of pipe work, the maximum distance between manholes shall be 45 m. 2.17.4.4 Interceptors Grease traps shall be provided at connections from catering installations and should be located indoors. The use of enzyme dosing shall be considered during design. Petrol/oil interceptors shall be provided at connections from vehicle workshop and fuel stations. 2.17.4.5 Pipe work Under Buildings The placing of drainage pipe work under buildings shall be avoided wherever possible. Where unavoidable, pipes shall be laid in straight lines at one gradient. Access shall be provided to all parts of the drain and flexible joints used at entry and exit to/from the building.
SP-1275
Page 79
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.17.4.6 Structural Penetrations Pipework passing through retaining walls, footings, ground beams etc., shall be sleeved, with the same material, and packed with polystyrene or similar. Flexible joints shall be provided at exits from buildings. 2.17.4.7 Connection to Existing Sewers Connection to existing sewerage systems shall require prior company approval. 2.17.4.8 Sewage Pumping Stations Pumping of sewage should be avoided where possible since, in addition to the extra cost, it also forms the weakest link in the operation of a sewage system. While the sewage pumping station design must take account of peak flows, the emphasis on sizing pumps and the sump together with the levels of the flow switches should be on keeping the sewage flowing so that potential problems of septicity in the sump and hydraulic shock at the treatment plant are avoided. A typical flow rate would be 4 times DWF. 2.17.5
Liquid Petroleum Gas Design of LPG systems should follow the recommendations of the following BS Standards: -
BS 5482: Code of Practice for Domestic Butane and Propane Gas Burning Installations &
-
BS EN ISO 10239 Small Craft Liquefied Petroleum Gas systems.
2.17.5.1 Gas Cylinder Stores Refer section.2.16.3.3. 2.17.5.2 Regulators For catering installations, primary regulators should be provided at bottle manifold discharge to give a gas pressure of approximately 350 mb with all appliances operating at maximum demand. Secondary regulators should normally be supplied with each appliance, be fitted after the appliance isolating valve, be adjustable, and be capable of reducing the gas pressure from approximately 345 mb to the appliance operating pressure at maximum demand. 2.17.5.3 Emergency Shutdown For catering and industrial systems, an emergency shut-off fire valve, normally of the deadweight type, shall be provided in the main supply, upstream of the high-pressure regulator(s). The valve should be operated manually, from exits, and automatically by the fire detection system. Cable or electrically activated systems may be used. Electrically operated actuators shall be suitable for hazard Zone 1. The following are accepted temperature ratings for deadweight gas valve fusible links.
June 2004
Inside hoods
:
185 0C
Elsewhere
:
160 0C
Page 80
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
2.17.5.4 Domestic Installations Domestic LPG installations shall be carried out strictly in accordance with Company Standard Drawing PDO-STD-2-1403. 2.17.6
Laboratory Piped Services Design of laboratory service should follow the BS 3202: Laboratory furniture & Fittings. 2.17.6.1 Pipe work All main distribution pipe work supplying laboratories should be exposed, wall or ceiling mounted. Branches to fume cupboards, hoods and benches shall be provided with stop valves within easy reach. Individual ranges of pipe work may be concealed in service ducts, but should be separated from electrical services. Flammable gas pipe work shall be accessible over the full length. Exposed laboratory fittings should be chrome plate or plastic coat finish. 2.17.6.2 Hot and Cold Water Refer section 2.17.2 of this specification. 2.17.6.3 Distilled Water In small laboratories, distilled water should be provided in bottles. In large laboratories, a piped system, with an outlet in each laboratory room, may be appropriate. The use of demineralised water from plant utilities may also be appropriate, in which case an ion exchange unit may be required. 2.17.6.4 Compressed Air Dry and oil free compressed air shall be supplied from a compressor located in separate equipment room of the laboratory. The compressor should be rated against 7 bar(g) and the system should include a refrigerated air dryer, a pressure relief valve, regulators, filters and pressure gauges. Distribution should be by ring main, laid to fall with drain points. 2.17.6.5 Vacuum The vacuum pump shall be located as directed by the Laboratory custodian. Unless directed otherwise, the pump should be rated at 1.9 kPa(a). A buffer vessel and/or liquid catcher shall be provided between pump and suction point. 2.17.6.6 Special Gases Typical special gases to laboratory areas are listed in Table 24, which includes hazard categories and typical off-take pressures. Butane and Propane and system guidelines are given in section 2.17.5. Gas cylinders shall be stored in a purpose-built compound, located in an area free from fire risk and away from sources of heat or ignition, which shall be well ventilated, preferably by natural means, and protected from direct sunlight and rain by a sloped canopy without air pockets. Full and empty cylinders shall be stored separately. Inert, flammable and oxidising gas cylinders shall be segregated.
SP-1275
Page 81
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Oxidising gas cylinders shall be separated from flammable gas cylinders by a minimum distance of 7 m or by a 1 hr fire barrier. Gas cylinders shall be stored in special racks.
Table 24: Special Gases Gas
Category
Pressure
Acetylene
Flammable
1.5 bar max
Butane
Flammable
0.025 bar
Carbon dioxide
Inert
3 bar
Helium
Inert
3 bar
Hydrogen
Oxidising
3 bar
LP Nitrogen
Inert
3 bar
HP Nitrogen
Inert
67 bar
Nitrous Oxide
Oxidising
3 bar
Propane
Flammable
0.025 bar
Oxygen
Oxidising
3 bar
A manifold set shall be provided complete with isolating valves, regulators and safety valves which shall discharge to open air. Changeover should be manual with an electrically operated alarm cabinet to give remote warning of cylinder exhaustion. Electrical supply emergency shut down (ESD) switches shall be provided at each laboratory room exit. ESD shall be provided for flammable gasses, activated either by gas ESD switches and/or by the fire alarms. Piping for flammable and for toxic gases shall include excess flow check valves. Acetylene, hydrogen and oxygen piping shall include a flashback arrestor. Acetylene piping shall be so positioned or protected so as not to be exposed to any source of heat. Hydrogen piping shall include flow-limiting devices, and switch off devices functioning when higher-pressure drops occur. 2.17.7
Fire Fighting Water Company fire fighting design parameters are set out in SP-1075 Specification for ‘Fire & Explosion Risk Management’. Brackish water should normally be considered too corrosive for use as fire fighting water in buildings. The Company standards for fresh water system materials and equipment shall comply with the following: SP-1285-D Specification for Civil & Buildings Utility Services – ‘Fire Protection Works’ and the Company Standard Drawing STD-2-1402: Typical Fire Water Details.
June 2004
Page 82
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
2.17.7.1 Hose reels Hose reels installations should be designed so that the whole of each floor area is protected, and no part of the area protected is more than 6 m from a hose nozzle, hose extended. Water supply should cater for a minimum of 3 hose reels operating at any time, with a total flow rate of 2.3 1/s, at a working pressure of 2.1 bars (g) at the furthest reel. The firewater installation should be an extension of the firewater mains. Where firewater mains are not available, connection may be made to the domestic water supply. In such cases, the connection shall be made before the incoming water main valve and be dedicated to the hose reel installations, and fitted with an isolation valve a lockable devise. In installations where the incoming main pipe work is UPVC, the service pipe work is copper, and the hose reel pipe work is GI, then the GI branch shall be from the UPVC before the change to copper. Office areas hose reels should be automatic, swinging, recess type with 25m of 19mm hose. Industrial area hose reels should be automatic, swing open, wall type with 30m of 25mm hose. 2.17.7.2 Hydrants Hydrants should be located in strategic positions around Company buildings, generally at 80 m spacing in industrial areas and 100 m spacing in residential areas, and should be installed a minimum of 15 m from any building, preferably in soft earth or paved areas rather than roadways. Hydrants should be sized to give 8.3 l/s at 6bar(g) from a 19 mm nozzle. 2.17.7.3 Fire Storage Tanks Tanks shall store water for both hydrant and hosereel supply, and should be sized to hold sufficent water to supply 3 fire fighting jets, 19 mm nozzles, at 8.3 l/s for 45 minutes, i.e. 67.5m3 minimum. Tanks used for combined storage shall have a dedicated firewater outlet, and a dedicated and secure firewater storage volume. Below ground storage, such as swimming pools, with suction hose hydrants may be appropriate. 2.17.7.4 Fire Pumps Package fire pump sets shall be sized to supply 41.5 l/s with a minimum 4 bar(g) pressure at the farthest hydrant. 2.17.8
Irrigation Treated effluent (TE) from sewage treatment plants should be used for the irrigation of Company community area soft landscaping. TE irrigation applications shall comply with the requirements of the Ministry of Regional Municipalities and Environment. For some applications, it may be necessary or desirable to use potable water (PW). It is therefore necessary to check directly with MRME Engineers on all such issues. In addition, irrigation for Company residences should be taken off the dwelling PW supply, after the water meter. In either case, the irrigation system demand should match the quality and quantity of water available. The irrigation system shall comply with SP-1285-C Specification for Civil & Buildings Utility Services – Plumbing Works & the following Company Standard Drawings STD-2-1400: Typical Irrigation Details & STD-2-1401: Typical Potable Water Details.
SP-1275
Page 83
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.17.8.1 Demand Irrigation water demands should be determined for individual schemes taking account evaporation rates, soil conditions, salinity and consequent leaching requirements and the method of irrigation. Table 25 sets out typical figures for the maximum water required for mature planting in the summer based on automatic or semi-automatic drip irrigation systems. Demands would increase markedly if non-automatic irrigation were employed during daylight hours when evaporation rates are very high. The figures given do not include for leaching. Further details of planting requirements are given in SP-1279-Q Specification for Civil & Building Construction – ‘Landscaping Works’. Table 25: Typical Irrigation Water Demands Plant Type
Irrigation demand
Large trees (25 m2 canopy)
80 litre/tree/day
Small trees (10 m2 canopy)
40 litre/tree/day
Shrubs
16 litre/shrub/day
Hedges
12 litre/m/day
Ground cover
16 litre/m2/day
Grass
10 litre/m2/day
2.17.8.2 System Components Typically, an irrigation system comprises the following components. System 1. Head works
Components :
Irrigation water storage Distribution pumps Filters Control panel
2. Primary Distribution
:
Ring mains Washouts Sub mains Pressure regulators Isolating valves (Contd.)
June 2004
Page 84
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
System
Version 1.0
Components (Contd.)
3. Secondary Distribution
:
Sub mains Zone control, valves Laterals Spray sprinklers Drip feed emitters
2.17.8.3 Storage TE should be held in storage tanks similar to what is described in section 2.17.1.4. For large TE irrigation systems, it may be preferable to provide more than one tank, strategically located. Tanks should be sized to hold two days demand. Storage tanks for TE shall be identifiable as not containing drinking water. Signage should be in Arabic and English and the tanks should be painted green (even if they are constructed of concrete). 2.17.8.4 Pumping & Filtration Systems should be designed to operate 8 h a day in two equal periods, morning and evening. A run and a standby pump and pressure vessel should be provided together with a stainless steel core filter with a fine-hole element. Pump power and auto-changeover control should normally be incorporated in a main Motor Control Panel such as that provided for a sewage treatment plant. Pump auto-start should be initiated by a relay in the Irrigation Control Panel described in section 2.17.8.5. 2.17.8.5 Control Systems External irrigation control systems should comprise electro-mechanical zoned control panels and zone solenoid valves. Controls for local small irrigation systems, such as those in Company residences, may comprise similar solenoid valves controlled by a local timer. Drip systems generally operate best under pressure of 1 to 3 bars. Pressure regulators, before the zone solenoid valves, may be required to maintain these limits. 2.17.8.6 Pipe work Identification TE irrigation water pipe work shall be pigmented green to distinguish from PW. 2.17.8.7 Sprinklers Since spray sprinklers normally require PW irrigation (refer section 2.17.8.), and incur higher evaporation losses compared with drip emitters, their use should be avoided where possible. However, sprinklers should be used for lawn irrigation since emitter systems often leave blemishes. 2.17.8.8 Emitter Allocations Table 26 sets out typical emitter allocations for different plants, designed to apply the quantities of water given in Table 25.
SP-1275
Page 85
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 26: Typical Emitter Allocations Plant type
2.17.9
No of Emitters
Size
Large trees (25 m2 canopy)
5 each
8 litres / hour
Small trees (10 m2 canopy)
5 each
4 litres / hour
Shrubs
2 each
4 litres / hour
Hedges
3 per m
2 litres / hour
Ground cover
2 per m2
4 litres / hour
Swimming Pools For Swimming Pools refer SP-1280 Specification for Swimming Pools – ‘Design & Construction Guidelines’.
2.18
Sewage Treatment Installation shall comply with the regulations of the Ministry of Regional Municipalities and Environment – MRME – which will normally require an Environmental Impact Statement. The Company focal point for liason with the MRME is the Environmental Advisor, Corporate HSE department. This section primarily covers treatment of domestic, biodegradable, sewage. The treatment and controlled disposal of industrial, non-biodegradable, waste shall be determined in conjunction with the Company in each case. The preferred process shall be by sewage treatment plant with all the treated effluent used for irrigation purposes. For temporary facilities, facultative ponds may be provided. In remote locations, with population equivalent up to 100, septic tanks with soakaways may be provided, subject to Company approval. In specific cases, holding tanks and sludge gulpers may be appropriate. For very low population equivalents, chemical toilets may be appropriate. The following Company Standards Drawings relate to sewage treatment systems. STD-2-1030: Typical Manhole Details STD-2-1033: Septic Tanks STD-2-1034: Soakaways STD-2-4025: Hydrocarbon Disposal Pit
June 2004
Page 86
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.18.1
Version 1.0
Location of STP The location of sewage treatment plant should take the following factors into account.
2.18.2
-
Adjacent accommodation (minimum separation of 100m)
-
Prevailing wind direction
-
Availability and cost of land
-
Minimised pumping costs
-
Future extension.
Pollution Load Treatment plant throughout and peak flows should be determined as detailed in section 2.17.4.1. In the absence of definitive data, a biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) of 65 gm/capita/day should be used.
2.18.3
Sewage Treatment Plant Treatment should be by the activated sludge process with extended coarse bubble aeration, chlorination and tertiary filtration, should be collected in a holding tank, and be used for irrigation purposes. Water retaining structures of epoxy painted reinforced concrete, above ground, should be preferred. Control panels, pumps, filters and blowers should be housed in a naturally ventilated block work with a telephone and external visual fault alarm. An overflow pond should be provided for start-up, while process biology is being established, and for maintenance purposes. Sludge should be collected in drying beds. Potable water should be provided to a hand-wash trough and to a shower Hose bib taps, which may supply treated effluent, should be provided at strategic locations for general cleaning purposes. Treated effluent outlets shall be labelled “NOT DRINKING WATER”, in Arabic and English. Provision should be made for maintenance vehicle access and the whole of the sewage treatment area should be secured within a Type of C fence. Photocell activated external lighting should be provided around the main plant. The sewage treatment plant should include, but not be limited to, the following components. System
Component
1. Inlet works:
Will include a pumping station, which can be sized to act as a raw sewage holding/balancing tank, to even out the peak flow and prevent shock loading rake screen.
2. Aeration tank:
Sized for a minimum 24 h retention at DWH + 500 mm freeboard transfer float. (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 87
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
System 3. Sedimentation tank:
Component (Contd.) Sized for minimum 6 hr retention at DWF. Hopper bottom for sludge collection, Airlift pumps for sludge transfer and removal. Scum baffle weir plate.
4. Chlorination chamber:
5. Access walkway:
Sized for minimum 1 hr retention at DWF. Chlorination by “liquid“ chlorine injection or equal and approved by the Company. Tablet dispenser not recommended. Flush with tank rim. Around perimeter of combined treatment tanks Across settling tank Rigid handrail (extn), removable chain handrail (intrn) caged access ladder Walkway lighting
6. Tertiary filtration:
Duty and standby pressure type multi-media filters Duty and standby filter service pumps. Dedicated backwash pump Each sized for a minimum 2 x DWF
7. Controls:
Common programmable logic control Staggered motor start Duty/standby auto –change Auto-reset Visual fault alarm
8. Flow measurement:
On raw sewage at inlet and treated effluent water at outlet.
9. Test kit:
Dissolved oxygen PH Chlorine Measuring cylinders (Contd.)
June 2004
Page 88
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
System
Version 1.0
Component (Contd.)
9. Test kit (contd.)
BOD5 should normally be measured at the Company facilities
10. Treated effluent Storage tank:
Sized for a minimum 48 h retention at DWF
The sewage treatment process and control philosophy should be agreed with the Company during the preliminary design of each plant. 2.18.4
Treated Effluent Standard Sewage treatment plant shall comply with the regulations of the Ministry of Regional Municipalities and Environment Table 27 gives current requirements in mg.l or ppm (unless otherwise stated). For definition of A and B, refer Table 28. Table 27: Treated Effluent Standards – Maximum Quality Limits Parameter
Standards (See Table 28) A
B
15.000
20.000
150.000
200.000
15.000
30.000
Total Dissolved Solid (TDS)
1500.000
2000.000
Electrical Conductivity (E C) (micro S./ cm)
2000.000
2700.000
10.000
10.000
6-9.000
6-9.000
Aluminium (as Al)
5.000
5.000
Arsenic (as As)
0.100
0.100
Barium (as Ba)
1.000
2.000
Beryllium (as Be)
0.100
0.300
Boron (as B)
0.500
1.000
Cadmium (as Cd)
0.010
0.010
650.000
650.000
Chromium (as Cr)
0.050
0.050
Cobalt (as Co)
0.050
0.050
Copper (as Cu)
0.500
1.000
BOD (Biochemical Oxygen Demand – 5d@200C Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) Suspended Solids (SS)
Sodium Absoption Ration (SAR)* pH (within range)
Chloride (as Cl)
(Contd.) SP-1275
Page 89
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 27: Treated Effluent Standards – Maximum Quality Limits (contd.) Standards (See Table 28) Parameter A
June 2004
B
Cyanide (total as CN)
0.050
0.100
Fluorine (as F)
1.000
2.000
Iron (total as Fe)
1.000
5.000
Lead (as Pb)
0.100
0.200
Lithium (as Li)
0.070
0.070
Magnesium
150.000
150.000
Manganese
0.100
0.500
Mercury
0.001
0.001
Molybdenum
0.010
0.050
Nickel
0.100
0.100
Nitrogen: Ammonical (as N)
5.000
10.000
Nitrogen: Nitrate (as NO3)
50.000
50.000
Nitrogen: Organic (Kjeldahl) (as N)
5.000
10.000
Oil and Grease (total extractable)
0.500
0.500
Phenols (total)
0.001
0.002
Phosphorus (total as P)
30.000
30.000
Selenium
0.020
0.002
Silver
0.010
0.010
Sodium
200.000
300.000
Sulphate
400.000
400.000
Sulphide
0.100
0.100
Vanadium
0.100
0.100
Zinc
5.000
5.000
Faecal Coliform Bacteria (per 100 mm).
200.000
1000.000
Viable Nematode Ova (per litre).
<1.000
<1.000
Page 90
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 28, below, provides details of the re-use of wastewater from a sewage treatment plant. Wastewater quality shall at all times be within the limits that are set out in Table 27. Table 28: Treated Effluent Re-Use – Areas of application of Standards A and B (see table 27) Area
A
B
(For effluent standard refer Table 27)
Crops
Grass & Ornamental Areas
2.18.5
Vegetables likely to be eaten raw.
Vegetables to be cooked or processed.
Fruit likely to be eaten raw and within 2 weeks of any irrigation
Fruit if no irrigation within 2 weeks of cropping. Fodder, cereal and seed crops.
Public parks, Hotel, Lawns Recreational Areas.
Pastures.
Areas with public access. Lakes with public contact (except places which may be used for praying and hand washing).
Areas with no public access.
Aquifer Recharge
All controlled aquifer recharge.
Method of Irrigation
Spray or any other method of arial irrigation not permitted in areas with public access unless with timing control.
Any other Re-use Applications
Subject to the approval of the Ministry.
Facultative Ponds Facultative Ponds shall require special permit from MRME and PDO Corporate HSE department. All Facultative pond shall be lined. Facultative ponds should be sized on the basis of 2 months holding excluding losses. The maximum holding level should be at a depth of 800 mm to achieve a reasonable balance of aerobic and anaerobic action. Bunds should be constructed of late-rite fine grade, maximum 40µm, in layers of 150 mm, well compacted up to 95% modified AASHTO. The internal bund gradient should be 1:1.5 maximum, top bund widths should be 1000 mm minimum and the external bund gradient should be 1:2 maximum. The external bund face may have riprap. The height of the bund should be 1200 mm above the floor of the pond. The whole of the evaporative pond area should be secured within a Type G fence.
2.18.6
Septic Tanks The design of septic tanks with soakaways should comply with the Company Standard Drawing listed in section 2.18.
SP-1275
Page 91
June 2004
Version 1.0
2.18.7
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Hydrocarbon Disposal Pits The design of pits for the collection of hydrocarbon waste shall comply with the Company Standard Drawing STD-2-4025 and other standards listed in section 2.18.
2.19
Electrical Services This section covers the design of building services low voltage (LV), 415V/3ph/50Hz, electrical distribution installations and extra low voltage (LLV), 30V and below, instrumentation installations. High voltage (HV), rated above 415V, installations are not part of the building services design scope nor are LV vital supply installations. The scope of, and interface between, LV and HV electrical designs shall be established with the Company at preliminary design stage. Electrical building services installations include: -
LV Electrical Supply
-
Small Power
-
In-door Lighting
-
Emergency Lighting
-
Outdoor Lighting
-
Fire Detection and Alarm
-
Lightning Protection
-
Telecoms
-
Datacoms
-
Television and Video
-
Audio
-
Nurse Call
The entire electrical installation shall be designed to be suitable for the environment and climatic conditions prevailing in the Sultanate of Oman. The following Company Standard Specifications and Drawings relate to LV electrical distribution systems shall be applicable for the Electrical services.
June 2004
IP 15
:
Institute of Petroleum Model Code of Safe Practice Part 15 - ‘Area Classification Code for Petroleum Installations’
SP-1099
:
Specification for Electrical Installation Practice
SP-1104
:
Specification for Electrical Safety Rules
SP-1105
:
Specification for Electrical Standard Drawings List
SP-1110
:
Specification for Electrical Supplies to Mobile Camps
SP-1111
:
Specification for Temporary Electrical Supplies
Page 92
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.19.1
Version 1.0
DEP 33.64.10.10-Gen
:
Electrical Engineering Guidelines
DEP 80.00.10.10 Gen
:
Area classifications (Amendments / Supplement to IP 15)
Electrical Supply Building services electrical supply design should normally comprise input to the design of the LV main switchboard and earth bar, which should be part of the HV design scope, together with the design of the LV electrical installation from the LV main switchboard outgoings and the earth bar. Vital service supply by no-break set (UPS) or emergency generator set shall not be part of building services design, which shall be confined to local battery backup packages. 2.19.1.1 Rated Voltage & Frequency Electrical equipment shall be selected to comply with the following rated voltages and frequencies. 415V/3ph/50Hz, 240V/1ph/50Hz 2.19.1.2 Loads The electrical design shall include a schedule of connected and instantaneous loads, which shall be updated during the design process to form the basis of the power supply and distribution capacity. The figures given in Table 29 may be used for estimating purposes. The power supply and distribution system should be designed with minimum 25% spare capacity to accommodate changes and future expansion. The overall system power factor, inclusive of reactive power losses in transformers and distribution system equipment, shall not be less than 0.8 lagging at rated design load. 2.19.1.3 Voltage Drop The voltage drop in cables between LV main switchboard outgoings and consumer terminals shall not be more than 5%, based on continuous maximum current loading and rated voltage. Moreover, during the starting and stopping of heavy loads, such as chiller compressors, the transient voltage depression at the terminals of any motor shall not be more than 20% of the rated equipment voltage.
SP-1275
Page 93
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 29: Estimated Electrical Loads Facility
Maximum Demand
PDO Permanent Camp Accommodation
4.5 kVA/unit
Laundry / Messing
1.0 kVA/person
Cinema (open air)
4.8 kVA
Clinic
18.0 kVA
Football Pitch
36.0 kVA
Fuel Station
21.0 kVA
Guard House
10.0 kVA
Mosque
14.5 kVA
Shop
10.0 kVA
Squash Court
9.0 kVA
Tennis Court
18.0 kVA
PDO Temporary Camp Accommodation
3.7 kVA/unit
Laundry / Messing
0.7 kVA/person
Contractor Facility Accommodation
3.7 kVA/unit
Laundry / Messing
0.4 kVA/person
Workshop (open sheds)
30.0 kVA/unit
Broad brush
30.0 VA/m2
2.19.1.4 Underground Cable De rating While the sizing of above ground cables shall be in accordance with the IEE Regulations (refer section 1.4.3 for the IEE), a basic de-rating factor, depending on cable size and type, shall be used for underground cables. The figures given in Table 30 shall be used a catchall factors. A further de-rating factor shall be applied relating to the grouping of cables.
June 2004
Page 94
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 30: Overall De rating Factors for Underground LV Cables (Note: Not applicable to cable groups) Cable Single Core
Multi Core
De rating Factor
Up to 150 mm2
0.61
185 – 400 mm2
0.60
above 500 mm2
0.59
Up to 16 mm2
0.65
25 – 150 mm2
0.63
above 185 mm2
0.62
2.19.1.5 Underground Cables LV cables sizes 16 mm2 and above shall be copper conductor, cross-linked polyethylene insulated, steel wire armoured, polyvinyl chloride sheathed (XLPE/SWA/PVC). LV cables sizes 2.5 mm2 to 10 mm2 may be PVC insulated, copper braid armoured, PVC sheathed, (PVC/SWB/PVC). 2.19.1.6 Earthing Earthing systems shall be provided in accordance with SP-1099 Specification for Electrical Installation Practice section 2.3, ‘Earthing Systems’. The system of earthing shall be TN-S, that is, protection against indirect contact obtained by earthed equipotential bonding and automatic disconnection of supply. Minimum ring cable size shall be 70 mm2, minimum radial cable size shall be 25 mm2. 2.19.2
Small Power Appendix L includes the following small power requirements relating to Company facilities.
SP-1275
-
Power outlets
-
Shaver outlets
-
Hand dryers
-
Fire alarm systems
-
Airconditioners
-
Ventilation fans
-
Water heaters
-
Drinking water coolers
-
Cookers
Page 95
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
-
Refrigerators
-
Insectocutors
SP-1099 Specification for Electrical Installation Practice, gives the Company Electrical Standards for the following. -
Applicable Standards, Specifications & Codes
-
General Requirements
-
Cable Installation
-
Earthing Systems
-
Hazardous Area
-
Equipment Installation
The Company Electrical Standard Drawings lists are contained in SP-1105 Specification for Electrical Standard Drawings List. 2.19.2.1 Power Supply Electrical designs shall include distribution board and feeder pillar single line diagrams showing: -
Board reference, area served and location.
-
Incoming feeder cable size and reference.
-
Circuit MCB/RCD protection sizes.
-
Sub circuit ways, outgoing feeders, MCB/RCD/ELCB protection ratings, wire sizes and sub areas served.
-
Sub circuit loads and total connected load per phase.
-
Min 25% spare outgoing feeders (refer section 2.19.1).
Distribution boards shall incorporate residual current type earth leakage circuit breakers to provide discriminatory protection as follows. -
Distribution Board feeders: 100mA
-
Socket outlet ring sub circuit: 30mA
Distribution boards shall not be located within toilets or ablutions. Neither power outlet nor switch shall be located within 1 m of a water source, or under a water pipe. A means of identifiable local isolation shall be provided for each connection to electrical equipment. 2.19.2.2 Power Consumption All single-phase loads shall, as far as is practically possible, be evenly distributed over the phases.
June 2004
Page 96
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
2.19.2.3 Voltage Drop Refer section 2.19.1.3 of this specification for voltage drop. 2.19.2.4 Cables Armoured cables shall be as described for underground cables in section 2.19.1.4. Cables in conduit or trunking shall be copper conductor, PVC insulated. Minimum size shall be 2.5 mm2. 2.19.2.5 Conduit & Trunking PVC conduit shall be used only inside buildings in locations not liable to mechanical damage. Only GI conduit shall be used for external work. Minimum conduit size shall be 20 mm. Design drawings should indicate the number and use (line, neutral and protective earth) of cables in each conduit. GI trunking should be used instead of multiple conduit runs. Trunking that is intended for the accommodation of different services shall be divided into separate compartments to provide complete cable separation. Steel conduit and trunking shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout. 2.19.2.6 Earthing & Bonding Earthing and bonding installations shall be shown on the electrical design drawings. All metallic electrical equipment enclosures shall be earthed as described in section 2.19.1.6. Exposed metalwork of all conduits, trunking, ducts, sheaths and armouring of cables, and all fixed metalwork which is in reach of electrical apparatus, shall be bonded and earthed. Such other fixed metalwork required, to be bonded and earthed shall include exposed metal pipes, sinks and tanks. The earth bonding connection to any water services entering a building shall be as near as possible to the point of entry, after the isolation valve. Minimum cable size for bonding metal pipes, sinks and the like shall be 6 mm2. 2.19.3
Indoor Lighting General requirements for the illumination of Company facilities are given in Appendix L. Where requirements are not listed in Appendix L, illumination levels should follow the standards listed below: Indoor lighting design should comply with the recommendations of the following. BS 8206: Code of Practice for Artificial Lighting. BS ISO 8995: Lighting of Indoor Work Places CIBSE: Code of Interior Lighting.
SP-1275
Page 97
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.19.3.1 Luminaries As well as first cost, lamps should be selected for long life, giving reduced maintenance and replacement costs, and low energy consumption. Where special requirements for colour rendering exist, they should be met. Incandescent lamps should only be used for decorative purposes. Low pressure sodium discharge lamps should not be used since they represent a fire hazard in the event of breakage. Table 31 gives typical lamp selections for standard applications. Table 31: Typical Indoor Lamp Selection Application
Lamp
General
Fluorescent
Types 2D,PL,SL,TL
Industrial
Fluorescent
Type TL, white
High bay
HP discharge
Type MBF
Fluorescent
Ex e
HP discharge
Ex d
Zone 1 & 2
Luminaries located in ablution and toilet areas shall be protected to IP54, in special cases, for example, where cleaning is by water hose, IP55 may be required. Light switches in ablution and toilet areas shall be pull cord operated. Luminaries, surface mounted on ceilings of combustible material, shall be offset by 50 mm. 2.19.4
Emergency Lighting Emergency lighting systems cover escape route lighting, exit sign indication and vital lighting. The function of emergency lighting shall be to: -
Indicate the escape routes clearly and unambiguously.
-
Provide illumination along such routes to allow safe movement towards and through the exits provided.
Ensure that the fire alarm call points and fire fighting equipment provided along escape routes can be readily located. -
Provide illumination to a facility which, when failing in operation, can cause an unsafe condition or can result in major damage.
Escape route and exit lighting shall be located at each exit door, emergency exit door, and where necessary to identify potential hazards, that is, -
At corridor intersections
-
At corridor changes of direction
-
At stair flights
-
At hazardous changes in floor level.
June 2004
Page 98
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
General requirements for escape route and exit lighting are given in Appendix L. An un-switched power supply shall be provided to keep the battery backup packs on charge, and to sense mains failure. Emergency lighting system design, installation and implementation shall confirm to the requirements of BS 5266, Emergency Lighting. 2.19.4.1 Escape Route Lighting Fixed escape route lighting shall actuate within 5 sec of normal lighting failure. Illumination should be not less than 0.2 lux. Light fittings should be non-maintained, self contained, slave luminaries, operated by a DC battery which shall be capable of 3 hour running time. Alternatively, battery backup conversion kits may be used on selected lamps to enable fluorescent luminaries to operate as emergency lighting. 2.19.4.2 Exit Lighting Exit light fittings should be maintained, self-contained slave units, with 3 hour battery backup. EXIT lettering, in Arabic and English, shall be green on a white background. 2.19.4.3 Vital Lighting In cases where vital lighting is required for operational purposes, battery backup conversion kits should be used in a proportion of the standard light fittings. Appropriate vital illumination levels should be calculated in each case, but in the absence of definitive data, the number of vital lamps as part of the total number of lamps may be determined using Table 32. Table 32: Typical Vital Lighting Requirements Area
2.19.5
Vital Lamps
Administrative Area
5%
Computer Room
10%
Control Room
50%
Field Auxiliary Room
30%
Switch House
30%
Utility Area
20%
Clinic Ward
25%
Outdoor Lighting Outdoor lighting installations shall comply with SP-1099 Specification for Electrical Installation Practice section 2.5.5 Lighting.
SP-1275
Page 99
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.19.5.1 Lighting Fixtures Outdoor lighting fixtures shall be located a minimum distance of 0.5 m from the face of roadway kerbs and a minimum 1.5 m from the face of car park kerbs. Polycarbonate diffusers shall not be used unless they are certified as UV resistant. Table 33 includes preferred lamp types for outdoor lighting applications. 2.19.5.2 Illumination Levels Table 33 also gives minimum maintained illumination levels for outdoor lighting. Table 33: Typical Outdoor Lighting Lamps & Illumination Levels Application
2.20
Lamp Type
Illumination
Football Pitch
SON
150 lux
Lay down Area
MBF
50 lux
Operational Area
MBF
10 lux
Roadway
MBF
10 lux
Tennis Court
SON
200 lux
Volleyball Court
SON
200 lux
Walkway
MBF.2D
10 lux
Workshop
MBF
50 lux
Fire Detection & Alarm The Company fire detection and alarm design parameters are set out in SP-1075 Specification for Fire, Explosion & Risk Management. General requirements are given in Appendix L. For the fire detection and alarm equipment and materials shall comply with the requirements as given in SP-1285-D Specification for Civil & Buildings Utility Services – ‘Fire Protection Works’. The above are considered as being the minimum standard, however each project shall be reviewed for particular requirements at the design stage.
2.20.1
Operational Criteria Power supplies for fire detection and alarm systems shall include a standby battery and automatic charger, and shall be designed so as not to become inoperative in the event of failure of the power supply. In general, stand by power supply shall be designed in accordance with DEP 33.65.50.31-Gen. ‘Static DC Uninterruptible Power Supply (DC UPS) Units’.
June 2004
Page 100
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
The main supply feeding the local annunciator panel shall be connected to a dedicated circuit way on a distribution board which is part of the main switch panel. No other service shall be connected to this circuit way and, where MCBs are used, the one serving the fire protection system shall be coloured red and labelled, white/red/white, FIRE ALARM-DO NOT SWITCH OFF (consideration should be given to providing a key switch; the key being held by the fire officer). The main supply cable should follow the least hazardous route available. The battery backup power supply shall provide at least 24-hour of system operation plus 15minute of full alarm. The battery charger shall be capable of restoring the battery to full capacity within 8 hours from fully discharged condition. Fault monitoring and alarm indication shall be provided for: a.
Main power failure by red light without opening the panel
b.
Battery power failure indication
c.
Charger output failure indication
A closed circuit principle shall be used, and all wiring shall be continuously monitored such that any of the following conditions cause a FAULT indication at the local annunciator panel. a.
Short circuit fault, indicating the affected zone.
b.
Open circuit fault, indicating the affected zone.
c.
Earth fault.
d.
Power supply fault.
The control circuitry shall be so arranged such that none of the above conditions cause the fire alarms to sound. Monitoring of the system shall be intrinsic in the control circuit design and shall be automatic in operation, and shall not require manual operation of switches or other apparatus. Large buildings shall be suitably zoned in accordance with BS 5839 Fire detection and Alarm system for buildings. The local annunciator panel shall be located at the building main entrance and shall be visible from outside the building. The panel shall indicate zone FAULT, and zone FIRE which shall be activated by manual call points and automatic detection systems. Activation of one zone alarm shall operate audible alarms on all zones. Activation of one zone alarm shall also shutdown airconditioning systems in all zones except for systems that do not cause the spread of smoke outside the area of the fire. FAULT and FIRE alarm shall be relayed to a central mimic panel, at a location specified by the Company. 2.20.2
Cables Fire alarm and detection cables shall be segregated from other electrical services, including those of similar voltage and frequency. Cables shall be protected by armour, conduit or trunking. Buried cables shall have steel wire armour and cables encased within building fabric may be in PVC conduit. Cables should be exposed only in industrial applications.
SP-1275
Page 101
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Cables should be single copper conductor, minimum size 2.5 mm2 for low voltage (240v) and minim size 1.13 mm2 for very low voltage (to 30v). Mineral insulated cable should not normally be required for fire detection and alarm systems.
2.21
Lightning Protection Lightning protection requirements, if any, should be based on the factors listed below and shall be agreed with the Company. -
Exposure risk
-
Use of structure
-
Type of construction
-
Contents or consequential effects
-
Height of structure and degree of isolation
-
Location topography
Lightning protection system designs should follow the requirements of BS 6651, Code of Practice for Protection of Structures Against Lightning.
2.22
Telecom Networks The design of telephone distribution systems shall be agreed with and approved by the Company Telecommunications Projects Department (TCT). The building services design shall include, but not be limited to, allocation of reserved rights of way, external layouts, internal layouts and schematics. A key sheet may also be required. The project scope of work, and the interface between the building services contractor and the telecoms contractor, shall also be agreed with TCT. Normally, this will exclude the pulling and the terminations of external telephone cable but will include the distribution points, telephone outlets, and terminations at the distribution points, conduit and wiring, and terminations at the outlets. Company supplied materials, which are free issue to the building services contractor, shall be specified by TCT. Normally, they will include: -
Underground ducting
-
Distribution boxes
-
Manhole accessories
Underground cables and handsets are installed by Telecom Specialist Contractors. General requirements for telephones are given in Appendix L. The Company Standards for cable laying, manhole construction, duct installation and for installation within buildings is given in PDO-ERD-71-01, Installation of Underground and Internal Telephone Cable Networks.
June 2004
Page 102
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.22.1
Version 1.0
Data Communications Networks The scope of building services design should normally be confined to the provision of distribution ways, conduit, trunking or trays, and outlet points together with spatial requirements for equipment. The scope and design shall be agreed with approved by the Company Telecommunications Department (TCT).
2.22.2
Television & Video Networks Normally, provision for TV shall be confined to built-in conduit and outlet points. However, in cases where reception for individual buildings is not possible, a central antenna system may be provided. For camps in the Oman Interior, a VCP system, as well as a satellite dish, may also be included. Concept design shall be part of the building services scope with detail design provided by a Specialist Vendor. Both concept and detail design shall be subject to Company approval. General requirements for TV outlets are given in Appendix L.
2.22.3
Audio Systems Concept and detail design scopes shall be as described in section 2.22.2.
2.22.4
Nurse Call Systems Concept and detail design scopes shall be as described in section 2.22.2. requirements for Nurse Call systems are given in Appendix L.
SP-1275
Page 103
General
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendices Appendix A: Glossary of Definitions & Abbreviations Appendix B: Weights of General Building Materials Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes Appendix D: Wall Finishes Appendix E: Floor Finishes Appendix F: Skirting Appendix G: Ceilings Appendix H: Door Types Appendix I: Window Types (Glazing) Appendix J: Ironmongeries Appendix K: Internal Environment Design Criteria Appendix L: Electrical Requirements Appendix M: SP User Comment Form
June 2004
Page 104
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix A: Glossary of Definitions & Abbreviations For the purposes of this document, the following definitions, terminology and abbreviations shall apply. A.1
General Definitions & Terminology Shall
:
The word 'shall' indicates a requirement
Should
:
The word 'should' indicates a recommendation
the Company
:
Petroleum Development Oman L.L.C.,
the Contractor Manufacturer
:
The party with which the Company has entered into a Contract
:
A Party responsible for the manufacture of equipment and services to perform the duties specified by the Consultant or the Company.
Vendor / Supplier:
:
A party responsible for the supply of equipment, materials or product related services in accordance with the purchase order issued by PDO or it’s nominated purchasing office.
Local Agent
:
An authorised agent of a Manufacturer in the Sultanate Of Oman who can supply the product and services.
National Product
:
A product defined as a National Product, in origin manufactured in the Sultanate Of Oman as per the General Conditions of Contract.
GCC Product
:
A product defined as a GCC Product, in origin manufactured in GCC country as per the General Conditions of Contract.
Works
:
The permanent Works to be executed and maintained in accordance with the contract together with all temporary works of every kind required in or about the execution or maintenance of the Works.
Workshop
:
A defined place, approved by the Company, where the Contractor executes fabrication works.
Worksite
:
The land and other places on, under, in or through which the Works are to be executed.
the User
:
The Company, and/or Consultant, designate using this document.
Temporary Structures
:
Any member or structure which needs to withstand loads and forces of a temporary nature, such as scaffolding, erection bracing, steel props, commissioning facilities, etc. The word ‘temporary’ shall be understood as a short period, limited to maximum of 2 years.
Semi Permanent Structures
:
Any member or structure which needs to withstand all meteorological conditions, loads and forces of a permanent nature, but designed for a short period. The word ‘semi-permanent’ shall be understood as a relatively short period, limited to maximum of 4 years.
:
Any member or structure which needs to withstand all meteorological conditions, loads and forces of a permanent nature, but designed for a long period. The word ‘permanent’ shall be understood as a relatively long period, say 30 years or more.
Permanent Structures
SP-1275
Page 105
June 2004
Version 1.0
A.2
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used in this document. AASHTO
:
American Association of State Highway and Transport Officials
ACI
:
American Concrete Institute
ACV
:
Aggregate Crushing Value.
ASME
:
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASNT
:
American Society Non-Destructive Testing
ASTM
:
American Society for Testing and Materials
AWS
:
American Welding Society
AWC
:
Asian Water Closet
B
:
Bottom
BLK
:
Block work
BOB
:
Bottom of Base
BOP
:
Bottom of Pipe
BS
:
British Standard
BWK
:
Brickwork
CBR
:
California Bearing Ratio
CIBSE
:
Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers
CP
:
Code of Practice
CWS
:
Code Water Service
CFDH
:
Corporate Functional Discipline Head
DB
:
Dry Bulb Temperature
DEP
:
Design and Engineering Practice (SIEP / Shell GSI Standard)
DFT
:
Dry Film Thickness
DIA
:
Diameter
June 2004
Page 106
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
A.2 Abbreviations (contd.) DIN
:
Deutsche Institute for Normung (West German Institute for Standardisation)
DRG
:
Drawing
DWF
:
Dry Weather Flow
EF
:
Each Face
EW
:
Each Way
ELCB
:
Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker
EPC
:
Engineering, Procurement & Construction
ERD
:
Engineering Reference Document
ESD
:
Emergency Shutdown
EWC
:
European Water Closet
EXL
:
Existing Level
FF
:
Far Face
FFL
:
Finished Floor Level
FS
:
Full Size
GCC
:
Gulf Cooperation Council
GI
:
Galvanised Iron
GRC
:
Glass Reinforced Concrete
GRG
:
Glass Reinforced Gypsum
GRE/GRP
:
(Fibre) Glass Reinforced Epoxy or Plastic
HDPE
:
High Density Polyethylene
HOR
:
Horizontal
HP
:
High Pressure
HW
:
Hardwood
HSE
:
Health, Safety and Environment
HV
:
High Voltage
IEE
:
Institution of Electrical Engineers (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 107
June 2004
Version 1.0
A.2
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Abbreviations (contd.)
JE
:
Junior Employee
JS
:
Junior Staff
LPG
:
Liquid Petroleum Gas
LV
:
Low Voltage
MAF
:
Mina Al Fahal (PDO Coastal Centre of Operations)
MAX
:
Maximum
MBF
:
High Pressure Mercury Discharge
MCB
:
Miniature Circuit Breaker
MIN
:
Minimum
MMMF
:
Man Made Mineral Fibres
MOC
:
Ministry of Communications
MRME
:
Ministry of Regional Municipalities & Environment
MPN
:
Most Probable Number
N
:
Neutral
N/A
:
Not Applicable
NF
:
Near Face
No.
:
Number
NTS
:
Not to Scale
OPC
:
Ordinary Portland Cement
PE
:
Protective Conductor
PDO
:
Petroleum Development Oman LLC
ppm
:
Parts per Million
PVA
:
Polyvinyl Acetate
PVC
:
Polyvinyl Chloride
PW
:
Potable Water
RC
:
Reinforced Concrete
RCD
:
Residual Current Device (Contd.)
June 2004
Page 108
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
A.2
SP-1275
Version 1.0
Abbreviations (contd.)
SELV
:
Safe Extra Low Voltage
Shell GSI
:
Shell Global Solutions International B.V.
SIEP
:
Shell International Exploration and Production B.V.
SIC
:
Shell International Chemicals B.V.
SIS
:
Sveriges Standard Institute)
SON
:
High Pressure Sodium Discharge
SPP
:
Sulphonate Petroleum Product
SP
:
Specification
SRD
:
HSE (Safety) Reference Document
SS
:
Senior Staff
SSL
:
Structural Slab Level
STD
:
Standard
SWA
:
Steel Wire Armour
SWB
:
Steel Wire Braid
T
:
Top
TE
:
Treated Effluent
TN-S
:
Separate N and PE Conductors
TOC
:
Top of Concrete
TOG
:
Top of Grating
TOS
:
Top of Steel
UPS
:
Uninterrupted Power Supply
UPVC
:
Unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride
UV
:
Ultra Violet
VERT
:
Vertical
WB
:
Wet Bulb Temperature
Page 109
Iseringskommision
(Swedish
Standards
June 2004
Version 1.0
A.3
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Abbreviations for Building Types The abbreviations used in this document for different building types are given in Table 34. Table 34: Building Type Codes Code
Building or Area
ABL
:
Ablutions
ABL/1
:
Ablution Block – SS
ABL/2
:
Ablution Block – JS
ABL/3
:
Ablution Block – JE
ACC
:
Accommodation
ACC/1
:
Accommodation – SS House
ACC/2
:
Accommodation – SS Bachelor Flats
ACC/3
:
Accommodation – SS Rooms
ACC/4
:
Accommodation – JS Units
ACC/5
:
Accommodation – JE Units
AIR
:
Air Terminal
AIR/1
:
Air Terminal – Building
AIR/2
:
Air Terminal – Sunshade
ANC
:
Ancillary Building (Catering / Laundry)
ANC/1
:
Ancillary Building – Main Camps
ANC/2
:
Ancillary Building – Satellite Camps
(Contd.)
June 2004
Page 110
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 34: Building Type Codes (contd.) Code
Building or Area
CON
:
Control Building
CON/1
:
Control Building – Type 1
CON/2
:
Control Building – Type 2
CON/3
:
Control Building – Type 3
ELE
:
Electrical Facility
ELE/1
:
Electrical Installation – Substation
ELE/2
:
Electrical Installation – Switch Yard
ELE/3
:
Electrical Installation – Power Station
EXP
:
Explosives Store
FIR
:
Fire Station
FIR/1
:
Fire Station – Type 1
FIR/2
:
Fire Station – Type 2
GAR
:
Garage / Fuel Station
GAR/1
:
Garage / Fuel Station – Type 1
GAR/2
:
Garage / Fuel Station – Type 2
GAR/3
:
Garage / Fuel Station – Type 3
GUA
:
Guard House
GUA/1
:
Guard House
GUA/2
:
Sentry Box (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 111
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 34: Building Type Codes (contd.) Code
Building or Area
HOS
:
Hospital / Clinic
HOS/1
:
Clinic – Type 1
HOS/2
:
Clinic – Type 2
HOS/3
:
First Aid Post
KIT
:
Kitchen (Separate Building)
KIT/1
:
Kitchen – SS
KIT/2
:
Kitchen – JS
KIT/3
:
Kitchen – JE
LAB
:
Laboratory
LAB/1
:
Laboratory – Production Chemistry
LAB/2
:
Laboratory – Geology
LAU
:
Laundry
MES
:
Mess / Canteen
MES/1
:
Mess / Canteen – SS
MES/2
:
Mess / Canteen – JS
MES/3
:
Mess / Canteen – JE
MOS
:
Mosque
MOS/1
:
Mosque – Permanent
MOS/2
:
Mosque – Prayer Shelter
(Contd.)
June 2004
Page 112
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 34: Building Type Codes (contd.) Code
Building or Area
OFF
:
Office
OFF/1
:
Office – Solid Partitions
OFF/2
:
Office – Demountable Partitions
REC
:
Recreational Facility
REC/1
:
Recreational Facility – SS
REC/2
:
Recreational Facility – JS
REC/3
:
Recreational Facility – JE
REC/4
:
Recreational Facility – Arts & Crafts
REC/5
:
Recreational Facility – Cinema Indoor
REC/6
:
Recreational Facility – Cinema Outdoor
REC/7
:
Recreational Facility – Swimming Pool
ROS
:
Reverse Osmosis Plant (Utilities)
SCH
:
School/Training Centre
SCH/1
:
Junior School
SCH/2
:
Kindergarten
SCH/3
:
Training Centre
SHO
:
Shop
SHO/1
:
Shop – Bulk Store (Liquor)
SHO/2
:
Shop – General Store (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 113
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 34: Building Type Codes (contd.) Code
Building or Area
SPO
:
Sports Facility
SPO/1
:
Sports Facility – Squash Court
SPO/2
:
Sports Facility – Sports Hall / Gym
SPO/3
:
Sports Facility – Boat Centre
SPO/4
:
Sports Facility – Golf Course
SPO/5
:
Sports Facility – Tennis / Volleyball Court
SPO/6
:
Sports Facility – Changing Rooms
SPO/7
:
Sports Facility – Sports Field
STO
:
Store
STO/1
:
Store – Edit and Seismic Tape
STO/2
:
Store – File Archives
STO/3
:
Store – Chemical
STO/4
:
Store – Core Shed
STO/5
:
Store – Loose Grain Store
STO/6
:
Store – Cold Store
STO/7
:
Store – Dry Store / Tinned Food Store
STO/8
:
Store – Gas Bottle
STP
:
Sewage Treatment Plant
TEL
:
Telecommunications Facility
TEL/1
:
Telecoms Buildings – Type A
TEL/2
:
Telecoms Buildings – Type B
TEL/3
:
Telecoms Buildings – Type C
TEL/4
:
Telecoms Buildings – Type D
(Contd.)
June 2004
Page 114
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 34: Building Type Codes (contd.) Code
SP-1275
Building or Area
TRU
:
Transportable Unit (Cabin)
TRU/1
:
Temporary Accommodation
TRU/2
:
Temporary Offices
TRU/3
:
Temporary Store
TRU/4
:
Temporary Mess
TRU/5
:
Temporary Kitchen
TRU/6
:
Temporary Ablution
WAH
:
Warehouse / Depot
WAH/01
:
Warehouse / Depot – Non-Inflammable Material
WAH/02
:
Warehouse / Depot – Personal Effects
WAH/03
:
Warehouse / Depot – Furniture & Semi-Inflammable
WAH/04
:
Warehouse / Depot – Inflammable Material
WOR
:
Workshop
WOR/01
:
Workshop – Electrical & Air-conditioning
WOR/02
:
Workshop – Mechanical
WOR/03
:
Workshop – Instrument
WOR/04
:
Workshop – Carpentry
WOR/05
:
Workshop – Light Vehicle
WOR/06
:
Workshop – Heavy Vehicle
WOR/07
:
Workshop – Integrated
Page 115
June 2004
Version 1.0
A.4
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Abbreviations for Room Types The abbreviations used in this document for different room types are given in Table 35. Table 35: Room Type Codes Code
Room Type
ALL
:
All rooms unless noted otherwise
BATH
:
Bathroom
BED
:
Bedroom
BAKE
:
Bakery
BAR
:
Bar
BTRY
:
Battery Room
CANT
:
Canteen
CHRM
:
Changing Room
CLNR
:
Cleaners Room
CLRM
:
Classroom
CONF
:
Conference Room
CORR
:
Corridor
CTRL
:
Control Room
CDST
:
Cold Store
DARK
:
Dark Room
DPFZ
:
Deep Freeze Store
DINE
:
Dining Room
DUCT
:
Service Duct
ELEC
:
Electrical Cupboard
ENTR
:
Entrance Hall
EQMT
:
Equipment Room
EXAM
:
Examination Room
FILE
:
Files Store (Contd.)
June 2004
Page 116
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 35: Room Type Codes (contd.) Code
Room Type
ICE
:
Ice Store
ISO
:
Isotope Pit
KTCH
:
Kitchen
LABC
:
Laboratory (Cores)
LABO
:
Laboratory (Oil)
LABW
:
Laboratory (Water)
LDRY
:
Laundry
LESR
:
Leisure
LBRY
:
Library
LIFT
:
Elevator
LNGE
:
Lounge/Sitting Room
MORT
:
Mortuary
OFF1
:
7 m2 Module Office
OFF2
:
10.5 m2 Module Office
OFF3
:
Drawing Office
PTRY
:
Pantry
PARK
:
Parking Bay
PRAY
:
Prayer Room
PREP
:
Food Preparation
PROJ
:
Projection Room
REC1
:
Recreation – Snooker Room
REC2
:
Recreation – Table Tennis Room
RECP
:
Reception
REDX
:
First Aid Room
RSNT
:
Restaurant (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 117
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table35: Room Type Codes (contd.) Code
Room Type
SH
:
Shower
SL
:
Sluice
SHOP
:
Shop
SQCT
:
Squash Court
SERV
:
Service Room
ST/B
:
Gas Bottle Store
ST/C
:
Chemical Store
ST/D
:
Dry Store
ST/E
:
Equipment & Tools Store
ST/G
:
General Supply Store
ST/H
:
Health Dept Store (Poisons)
ST/K
:
Kitchen Consumables Store
ST/L
:
Bulk (Liquor) Store
ST/M
:
Medical (Drugs) Store
ST/O
:
Office Supplies Store
ST/P
:
Pork Products Store
ST/S
:
Secure Store
ST/T
:
Edit & Seismic Tape Store
ST/U
:
UV Shielded Store
STND
:
Stand & Wait Area
STWL
:
Stairwell
SWGR
:
Switchgear Room
TLET
:
Public Toilet
TRMT
:
Treatment Room
TV
:
TV / Video Room (Contd.)
June 2004
Page 118
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table35: Room Type Codes (contd.) Code
SP-1275
Room Type
UTIL
:
Utility Room
VIEW
:
Viewing Gallery
WAIT
:
Waiting Room
WARD
:
Ward
WC
:
Toilet
WKSP
:
Workshop
XRAY
:
X-Ray Room
Page 119
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix B: Weights of General Building Materials kN/m2
Building Material Aluminium Roof Sheeting
0.7 mm thick
Asbestos Cement Sheeting
This material shall not be used.
Asphalt – Roofing, 2 layers
19 mm thick
0.41
25 mm thick
0.58
Bitumen, built up felt roofing – 3 layers incl chippings
kN/m3
0.023
0.29
Block work (excluding weight of mortar) Concrete, solid,
Per 25 mm thick
0.54
Concrete, hollow,
Per 25 mm thick
0.34
Lightweight, solid,
Per 25 mm thick
0.32
Clay, solid,
Per 25 mm thick
0.45
Low density
Per 25 mm thick
0.49
Medium density
Per 25 mm thick
0.54
High density
Per 25 mm thick
0.58
Clay, perforated,
Per 25 mm thick
Low density
25% voids
0.38
15% voids
0.42
25% voids
0.40
15% voids
0.46
25% voids
0.44
15% voids
0.48
Brickwork, (excluding weight of mortar)
Medium density
High density
(Contd.)
June 2004
Page 120
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix B: Weights of General Building Materials (contd.) kN/m2
Building Material
kN/m3
Boards Cork, compressed,
Per 25 mm thick
0.06
Fibre insulating,
Per 25 mm thick
0.07
Laminated blockboard,
Per 25 mm thick
0.11
Plywood,
Per 12.7 mm thick
0.09 23.55
Concrete, reinforced, 2% steel 4 mm
0.09
6 mm
0.14
Thermal insulation,
Per 25 mm thick
0.005
Acoustic insulation,
Per 25 mm thick
0.01
Glass – Clear float
Glass Fibre
Glazing, Patent 6.3 mm Glass Lead covered bars at 610 mm centres
0.29
Aluminium alloy bars at 610 mm centres
0.19
Plaster
12.5 mm thick
0.22
Gypsum
9.5 mm thick
0.08
Plasterboard Gypsum
12.5 mm thick
0.11
19.0 mm thick
0.17
19 mm thick
0.10
25 mm thick
0.12
32 mm thick
0.14
Roof Boarding Softwood rough sawn
(Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 121
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix B: Weights of General Building Materials (contd.) Building Material
kN/m2
kN/m3
Rendering & Screed Portland cement: sand, 1:3 mix
Per 12.5 mm thick
0.29
Concrete
Per 25 mm thick
0.58
Lightweight
Per 25 mm thick
0.32 77.22
Steel Steel Roof Sheeting – (as laid)
0.50 mm thick
0.05
0.70 mm thick
0.07
Tiling, Roof Clay or concrete, plain, laid to 10 mm gauge
0.62 – 0.7 0.48
Tiling, Floor Finishes
June 2004
Asphalt
3 mm thick
0.06
Clay
12.5 mm thick
0.27
Cork, compressed
6.5 mm thick
0.025
PVC, flexible
2.0 mm thick
0.035
Timber – Softwoods
Pine Spruce
4.72
Douglas Fir
4.72
Redwood
5.50
Pitch pine
6.60
Timber – Hardwood
Teak, Oak
7.07
Wood-wool Slabs
Per 25 mm thick
Page 122
0.15
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes Legend:
W = Wall
F = Floor
C = Ceiling
S = Skirting
D = Door
G = Glazing
Note: For Abbreviations of Building Types & Room Types refer Tables 34&35 in Appendix B.
SP-1275
Appendix D Wx Type
Appendix E Fx Type
Appendix F Sx Type
Appendix G Cx Type
Appendix H Dx Type
Appendix I Gx Type
2.0
W1/2
F4
S4
C3
D9
G5
BATH
1.5
W2
F4
S4
C3/5
D9
G5
BED
1.5
W1
F15
S1
C3
D9
G14
DINE
1.5
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
G13
DUCT
1.5
W7
F8
S7
C2
D9
ELEC
2.0
W7
F8
S1
C2
D9
ENTR
2.5
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
EXTR
2.5
W3
F6
S8
KTCH
3.0
W1/2
F2
S5
C3
D9
G14
LNGE
1.5
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
G13
ST/K
2.5
W1
F3
C2
D9
G6
Building
Room
ABL/1-3
ALL
ACC/1
Live Load kN/m2
Page 123
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes (contd.) Building
Room
Live Load kN/m2
Appendix D Wx Type
Appendix E Fx Type
Appendix F Sx Type
Appendix G Cx Type
Appendix H Dx Type
Appendix I Gx Type
STWL
3.0
W1
F1
S1
C3
WC
1.5
W2
F4
S4
C3/5
D9
G10
BATH
1.5
W2
F4
S4
C3
D9
G5
BED
1.5
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
G14
DINE
2.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
G6
DUCT
1.5
W7
F8
S7
C2
D9
ELEC
2.0
W7
F8
S1
C2
D9
ENTR
3.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
EXTR
3.0
W3
F6
S8
KTCH
3.0
W1/2
F2
S5
C3
D9
G14
LNGE
2.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
G13
ST/K
2.5
W1
F3
S1
C2
D9
G6
STWL
3.0
W3
F8
S7
C3
ACC/1
ACC/2
June 2004
Page 124
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes (contd.) Appendix D Wx Type
Appendix E Fx Type
Appendix F Sx Type
Appendix G Cx Type
Appendix H Dx Type
Appendix I Gx Type
1.5
W2
F4
S4
C3/5
D9
G10
BATH
1.5
W2
F4
S4
C3
D9
G10
BED
1.5
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
G7
DINE
2.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
G13
ENTR
3.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
EXTR
3.0
W3
F6
S8
KTCH
3.0
W1/2
F2
S4
C3
D9
G14
STWL
3.0
W3
F8
S7
C3
WC
1.5
W2
F4
S4
C3
D9
G5
BATH
1.5
W2
F4
S4
C8
D11
BED
1.5
W1/6
F3
S1
C8
D9
ELEC
2.0
W7
F8
S7
C2
D9
ENTR
3.0
W1
F3
S1
C8
D11
EXTR
3.0
W3
F6
S8
Building
Room
ACC/2
WC
Live Load kN/m2
AA/3
ACC/4
SP-1275
Page 125
June 2004
G8
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes (contd.) Building
ACC/4
ACC/5
June 2004
Room
Live Load kN/m2
Appendix D Wx Type
Appendix E Fx Type
Appendix F Sx Type
Appendix G Cx Type
Appendix H Dx Type
SERV
1.5
W1
F3
S1
C3
D11
SH
2.0
W6
F7
S4
C3
D11
ST/G
3.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
STWL
3.0
W3
F8
S7
C3
WC
1.5
W2
F4
S4
C8
D11
BATH
1.5
W2
F4
S4
C8
D11
BED
1.5
W1
F3
S1
C8
D9
ELEC
2.0
W7
F8
S7
C2
D9
EXTR
3.0
W3
F6
S8
C8
KTCH
3.0
W1/2
F3
S4
C3
D9
LNGE
1.5
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
SERV
1.5
W1
F3
S1
C3
D11
SH
2.0
W1/6
F7
S4
C3
D11
ST/G
3.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
Page 126
SP-1275
Appendix I Gx Type
G8
G13
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes (contd.) Appendix D Wx Type
Appendix E Fx Type
Appendix F Sx Type
Appendix G Cx Type
Appendix H Dx Type
1.5
W1/2
F4
S4
C7
D11
ALL
3.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D11
EXTR
3.0
W3
F6
S8
AIR/2
ALL
7.5
W-
F-
ANC/1 & ANC/2
BAKE
3.0
W2/6
F4
S1
C2
D11
CDST
7.5
W2
F11
S1
C2
D3
LDRY
3.0
W2/6
F4
S1
C2
D11
ST/B
7.5
W1
F8
S1
C2
D9
ST/D
7.5
W1
F4
S1
C2
D9
ST/G
5.0
W1
F4
S1
C2
D9
ST/K
7.5
W1
F4
S1
C2
D9
ST/P
5.0
W1
F4
S1
C2
D9
WC
2.0
W1/2
F4
S4
C8
D9
G5
C 7.5
C W1
C F12
C S1
C C5
C D1
C G-
Building
Room
ACC/5
WC
AIR/1
CON/1-3
SP-1275
CTRL
Live Load kN/m2
Page 127
June 2004
Appendix I Gx Type
G5
G5
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes (contd.) Appendix E Fx Type
Appendix F Sx Type
Appendix G Cx Type
Appendix H Dx Type
7.5
W7
F12/3
S1
C2
D3
BATY
7.5
W7
F14
S5
C2
D4
ALL
7.5
W7
F8
S7
C2
D4
EXTR
7.5
W3
F6
S8
ALL
7.5
W7
10cm
S7
C2
D4
EXTR
7.5
W3
F6
S8
ALL
7.5
W7
F8
S7
C2
D4
EXTR
7.5
W3
F6
S8
OFF
3.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
G-
WC
2.0
W1/2
F4
S4
C2
D9
G5
ALL
7.5
W1
F3
S7
C3
D11
G-
EXTR
5.0
W3
F8
S8
PARK
7.5
W1
F8
S7
WC
2.0
W1/2
F4
S4
Room
CON/1-3
EQMT
ELE/1
ELE/2
ELE/3
FIR/1
June 2004
Appendix D Wx Type
Building
Live Load kN/m2
Page 128
SP-1275
Appendix I Gx Type
D12 C2
D9
G5
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes (contd.) Appendix D Wx Type
Appendix E Fx Type
Appendix F Sx Type
Room
GAR/1
EXTR
40.0
W3
F6
S8
WC
2.0
W1/2
F4
S4
EXTR
40.0
W3
F6
S8
OFF
3.0
W1
F3
WC
2.0
W1/2
EXTR
40.0
ST/F
GAR/2
GAR/3
GUA/1
HOS/1 & HOS/2
SP-1275
Live Load kN/m2
Building
Appendix G Cx Type
Appendix H Dx Type
Appendix I Gx Type
C2
D9
G5
S1
C3
D11
G14
F4
S4
C2
D9
G5
W3
F6
S8
7.5
W7
F14
S4
C1
D8
WC
2.0
W1/2
F4
S4
C2
D9
G5
ALL
2.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D11
G9
EXTR
2.0
W3
F6
S8
WC
2.0
W1/2
F4
S4
C3
D9
G6
BATH
2.0
W2
F4
S4
C3
D9
G6
ST/M
2.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
G5
EXAM
2.0
W1/6
F3
S1
C3
D9
G5
Page 129
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes (contd.) Building
HOS/1 & HOS/2
HOS/3
KIT/1-3
June 2004
Room
Live Load kN/m2
Appendix D Wx Type
Appendix E Fx Type
Appendix F Sx Type
Appendix G Cx Type
Appendix H Dx Type
Appendix I Gx Type
OFF
2.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
G5
ST/H
2.0
W1
F7
S7
C3
D9
G5
MORT
2.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D3
BED
1.5
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
G9
PTRY
3.0
W1/6
F4
S4
C3
D9
G5
RECP
2.5
W1
F3
S1
C3
D2
G-
SL
2.0
W1/6
F4
S4
C3
D9
G6
TRMT
2.0
W1/6
F3
S1
C3
D9
G6
WC
2.0
W2
F4
S4
C3
D9
G6
REDX
2.0
W1/6
F3
S1
C3
D9
G5
WC
1.5
W1/2
F4
S4
C3
D9
G6
EXTR
3.5
W3
F6
S8
KTCH
3.0
W1/2
F4
S4
C3
D2
G5
Page 130
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes (contd.) Appendix E Fx Type
Appendix F Sx Type
Appendix G Cx Type
Appendix H Dx Type
C5
D2
G14
S3
C5
D9
G14
F2
S4
C4
D12
G1
W1
F3
S3
C3
D9
4.0
W1
F5
S4
C5
D1
DINE
4.0
W1
F3
S3
C5
D1
EXTR
5.0
W3
F6
S8
ICE
3.0
W1
F5
S4
C3
D9
KTCH
3.0
W2/9
F3
S4
C3
D11
G5
LNGE
2.0
W1/11
F10
S3
C5
D1
G1
RECP
2.0
W1/11
F3
S1
C3
D1
G1
ST/G
4.0
W1
F8
S4
C3
D9
ST/L
5.0
W1
F2
S4
C3
D12
Room
Live Load kN/m2
LAB/1-3
ALL
3.0
W2
F14
S4
EXTR
3.5
W3
F6
S8
OFF
2.5
W1
F14
BAR
5.0
W1
CLNR
2.0
CORR
MES/1
SP-1275
Appendix D Wx Type
Building
Page 131
June 2004
Appendix I Gx Type
G1
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes (contd.) Appendix E Fx Type
Appendix F Sx Type
Appendix G Cx Type
Appendix H Dx Type
3.0
W12/9
F2
S1
C3
D5
TV
2.0
W1
F10
S3
C3
D3
G1
WC
2.0
W1/2
F4
S4
C3
D9
G6
CLNR
2.0
W1
F3
S3
C3
D9
CORR
4.0
W1
F5
S4
C5
D1
DINE
4.0
W1
F3
S3
C5
D1/6
EXTR
4.0
W3
F6
S8
ICE
3.0
W1
F5
S4
C3
D9
KTCH
3.0
W1/2/9
F3
S4
C3
D11
G5
LNGE
2.0
W1/9/11
F10
S3
C5
D1
G1
RECP
2.0
W1/11
F3
S1
C5
D1
G1
ST/G
4.0
W1
F8
S4
C3
D9
SERV
3.0
W1/2/9
F2
S1
C3
D5
TV
2.0
W1
F3
S3
C3
D3
Room
Live Load kN/m2
MES/1
SERV
MES/2 & MES/3
June 2004
Appendix D Wx Type
Building
Page 132
SP-1275
Appendix I Gx Type
G1
G1
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes (contd.) Building
Room
Live Load kN/m2
MES/2 & MES/3
WC
2.0
MOS/1
DOME
MOS/2 OFF/1 & OFF/2
SP-1275
Appendix D Wx Type W1/2
Appendix E Fx Type F4
Appendix F Sx Type S4
W5
Appendix G Cx Type C3
Appendix H Dx Type D9
C2
ENTR
2.0
W1
F3
S1
EXTR
2.0
W3
F6
S8
PRAY
2.0
W1
F10
WC
2.0
W1/2
PRAY
1.5
CORR
Appendix I Gx Type G6 G7
C3
D12
S3
C3
D12
G3
F4
S4
C3
D9
G3
W1
F10
S3
C3
D9
G-
4.0
W1
F3
S1
C4
D1
G-
ELEC
3.5
W1
F8
S1
C2
D9
ENTR
4.0
W1
F3
S1
C5
D1
EXTR
5.0
W3
F6
S8
FILE
5.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D11
OFF
2.5
W1
F3
S3
C3
D11
Page 133
June 2004
G
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes (contd.) Appendix G Cx Type
Appendix H Dx Type
S1
C3
D9
F5
S4
C3
D9
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
2.5
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
STAND
4.0
W1
F7
S7
C3/5
D9
WC
2.0
W1/2
F4
S4
C3
D9
G6
REC/6
EXTR
3.0
W3
F6
S8
SCH/1 To SCH/3
CLRM
3.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
G-
CORR
4.0
W1
F3
S1
C3/5
D1
DINE
4.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D1
FILE
5.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
EXTR
7.5
W3
F6
S8
KTCH
3.0
W1/2
F2
S4
C3
D9
SERV
3.0
W1/2
F2
S4
C3
D3
Appendix D Wx Type
Appendix E Fx Type
Room
OFF/1 & OFF/2
ST/O
10.5
W1
F7
WC
2.0
W1/2
ELEC
3.0
PROJ
REC/5
June 2004
Live Load kN/m2
Building
Page 134
SP-1275
Appendix F Sx Type
Appendix I Gx Type
G6
G7
G-
G-
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes (contd.) Appendix E Fx Type
Appendix F Sx Type
Appendix G Cx Type
Appendix H Dx Type
Room
Live Load kN/m2
SCH/1 To SCH/3
ST/0
5.0/m
W1
F8
S7
C3
STWL
7.5
W7
F8
S1
C3
WC
3.0
W1/2
F4
S4
C5
D9
WKSP
10.5
W1
F8
S7
C2
D1
SHO/1
ALL
7.5/m
W1
F3
S1
C2
D11
& /2
EXTR
5.0
W3
F6
S8
SPO/1
ELEC
3.5
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
EXTR
4.0
W3
F6
S8
C3
SQCT
2.0
W4
F9
VIEW
4.0
W1
F8
WC
2.0
W1/2
ALL
4.0
EXTR WC
SPO/2
SP-1275
Appendix D Wx Type
Building
D3
C3
D12
S1
C8
D11
F4
S4
C3
D9
W1
F-
S2
C-
D-
4.0
W3
F-
S8
2.0
W1/2
F4
S4
C3
D9
Page 135
June 2004
Appendix I Gx Type
G6
G-
G6
G6
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes (contd.) Appendix E Fx Type
Appendix F Sx Type
Appendix G Cx Type
Appendix H Dx Type
C5
D-
S4
C3
D9
G5
F4
S4
C3
D9
G6
W1
F-
S1
C3/5
D3
W3
F6
S8
W1/2
F4
S4
C3
D9
10/m
W1
F11
S1
C2
D3
EXTR
5.0
W3
F6
S8
ST
5/m
W1
F4
S4
C2
D3
ALL
5.0
W2
F8
S7
C2
D3
EQMT
5.0
W2
F12
C2
D3
EXTR
5.0
W3
F6
S8
WC
2.0
W1/2
F5
S4
C3
D9
Room
Live Load kN/m2
SPO/3 & SPO/4
ALL
4.0
W1
F-
S3
EXTR
4.0
W3
F-
S8
KTCH
3.0
W1/2
F3
WC
2.0
W1/2
ALL
2.5/m
EXTR
2.5/m
WC
2.0
STO/5
ST
STO/6 & /7
STO/1 To STO/2
TEL/1
June 2004
Appendix D Wx Type
Building
Page 136
SP-1275
Appendix I Gx Type
G6/11
G5
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes (contd.) Appendix E Fx Type
Appendix F Sx Type
Appendix G Cx Type
Appendix H Dx Type
C2
D3
S4
C3
D9
F8
S2
C3
D3
W3/10
F6
S8
4.0
W1
F8
S2
C3
D9
OFF
2.5
W1
F8
S2
C3
D11
ST
2.5/m
W1
F8
D9
WARE
2.5/m
W7
F8
D3
WC
2.0
W1/2
F4
Room
Live Load kN/m2
TEL/2
ALL
5.0
W1
F7
S7
EXTR
5.0
W3
F-
S8
WC
2.0
W1/2
F4
CORR
5.0
W1
EXTR
7.5
FILE
WAR/1 To WAR/4
SP-1275
Appendix D Wx Type
Building
Page 137
June 2004
S4
C3
D9
Appendix I Gx Type
G5
G5
G5
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix D: Wall Finishes Type W1
Description Internal Render & Emulsion Paint 15mm cement/sand render applied in two coats. Primed with one coat PVA primer/seal and two coats PVA copolymer based putty filled, rubbed down with fine sandpaper to completely even surface and painted with two coats of washable and steam resistant emulsion paint – Vinyl Silk finish. (It should be noted that while Vinyl Silk finish is specified here this may not be always the case: sometimes Gloss Oil to Dado is required; or Matt finish; or Gloss finish all over, etc., if in doubt check with the Company and hence the Client).
W2
Ceramic Wall Tiles 10mm cement/sand render to blockwork walls applied in two coats. Second coat keyed with cross hatching and combing to receive 152x152x5.5mm glazed ceramic wall tiles. Tiles fixed and grouted with manufacturer’s recommended epoxy based adhesive. All adhesives should be waterproof. Shower grouting should be waterproof and kitchen grouting should be epoxy to prevent growth of bacteria etc. Tiling full height or to heights indicated on drawings. All external angles to be formed using round edged tiles. Round edged tiles to be used at change in wall finish.
W3
Heavy texturised External Paint Fair faced blockwork and fair faced in-situ concrete. Cleaned down and flush pointed. Cement/Sand wash bag rubbed, applied over entire surface and finished to 4.5mm overall thickness with one coat of PVA Copolymer emulsion paint. Emulsion paint priming coat and one coat roller applied heavy texturised external copolymer emulsion paint finish coat. Final texture by sponge or spatula.
W4
Fibrous Epoxy Plaster Fair faced blockwork walls cleaned down and dampened. Finished to 15mm overall thickness with two coats trowel. Fibrous Epoxy Plaster applied in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. Surface blemishes sanded down with fine sand paper. For Squash courts the wall court markings are to be made with polyurethane paint.
W5
Mosque Dome Rendering with steel float finish. One coat of primer sealer, two coats PvA, two undercoats and two coats of full gloss.
W6
Ceramic Tile Splash Backs Splash backs to back and sides of sink/vanity unit to be as specification W2 minimum 3 courses of tiles high x 4 tiles wide unless shown otherwise on drawings.
June 2004
Page 138
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix D: Wall Finishes (contd.) Type W7
Description Fair Faced Block work Fair faced blockwork cleaned down and flush pointed. Cement/sand wash, bag rubbed applied over entire surface and finished with 1 coat PVA Primer/sealer and 2 coats washable and steam resistant emulsion.
W8
Epoxy Glazed Finish Epoxy glazed finish to full height or as shown on Drawings/Instructions.
W9
Corner Gaurds (Stainless Steel Angle) Stainless steel angle corner guards 2.0m long to protect all external angles of walls, including door jambs. Bottom edge level with top of skirting.
W10
Stucco embossed Finish Composite insulated aluminium cladding panels with 0.55m aluminium inner skin with white Stucco embossed (or to clients choice) finish.
W11
Veneer Finish Timber partitions with HW veneer faced ply facing.
W12
Demountable Partition Finish Demountable galvanised steel framed partitions with plastic coated steel face. (A great deal of demountable partitions are also made from gypsum plasterboard covered in vinyl cloth or paper – which can be used as an alternative).
Note:
SP-1275
Refer Appendix C for wall finishes in different buildings and rooms.
Page 139
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix E: Floor Finishes Type F1
Description Vinyl Floor Tiles Size 300m x 300m x 2mm fixed with manufacturer’s recommended bituminous adhesive to cement/sand screed. Overall thickness of tiles and screed 50mm.
F2
Clay Floor Quarry Tiles Size 150mm x 150mm x 12.5mm shot faced clay floor quarry tiles (BS 6431 type A). Bedded and jointed in cement/sand mortar (1:4) on cement/sand floor screed. Overall thickness of tiles and screed 50mm or laid to falls as required.
F3
Pre cast Terrazzo Tiles 300mm x 300mm x 25mm tiles bedded and joined in cement/sand mortar to overall thickness of 50mm. Pointed with matching grout, ground to a high degree of accuracy, polished and sealed on completion with metalized emulsion polish/sealer to manufacturers recommendation.
F4
Non-slip Ceramic Floor Tiles Size 152mm x 152mm x 9.5mm. Fixed with manufacturer’s recommended adhesive to cement/sand screed and pointed with matching epoxy grout. Overall thickness 50mm or laid to falls as required. Matching ribbed step tread tiles to be provided across all shower entrances.
F5
Unglazed Ceramic Floor Tiles Size 152mm x 152mm x 9.5mm. Fixed as item F4.
F6
PC Interlocking Tiles To be specified by the client as there are several different varieties in terms of thickness, sizes, patterns and colours.
F7
Non-slip Granolothic Pavings 40mm minimum thickness granolithic topping applied to matured concrete slab. Concrete slab surface to be cleaned, hacked and wetted and cement grout brushed over entire surface before laying of granolithic concrete. Granolithic concrete to be laid in 15m2 bays and carborundum dust sprinkled and trowelled into finished surface at a rate of 1.5 kg/m2 while still ‘Green’. Granolithic toppings to stairs to be laid monolithically on fresh base concrete within 3 hours and sprinkled with carborundum dust as above. Where indicated as being to falls maximum thickness to be 65mm.
June 2004
Page 140
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix E: Floor Finishes (contd.) Type F8
Description Hardened & Sealed Granolithic Floor 40mm minimum thickness granolithic topping laid monolithically on fresh base concrete (within three hours) and finished with case hardening, dust proofing and oil proofing compound for granolithic floors applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended instructions. Where indicated as being to falls maximum thickness to be 65mm. (Note: Where specified in services cupboard’s or ducts topping can be applied to matured slabs, not monolithically).
F9
Squash Court Flooring Proprietary squash court flooring system comprising semi-resilient under carriage of 50mm x 50mm preservative treated battens at 300mm centres on rubber pads on steel floated concrete floor slab. Maple or beech 25mm thick strip flooring tongued and grooved and secretly nailed to battens. Machine sanded. Court markings applied in polyurethane paint. Entire surface sealed with matt polyurethane varnish (2 coats). This item is not tabulated being a one off item.
F10
Carpet Tiles Size of tiles 500mm x 500mm x 7.3mm. Laid with medium stick latex anti-slip solution on 50mm cement/sand screed, sealed with anti-dust compound.
F11
Epoxy Coated Flooring Two pack high build epoxy coating. Applied onto 50mm cement/sand screed. Wire brushed to remove laitence and filled with solventless filter.
F12
Raised Access Floor (Pedestal Floor) Medium grade raised access floor with vinyl infill. To include MS channel bridging to services trenches. O/A depth 600mm (or as stated) from finished floor level to structural slab level. Weight capacity to be determined. Slab to be finished with non-dusting coating (epoxy coating). It should be noted that if carpet tiles are used then these need to be antistatic.
SP-1275
F13
Flexible Sheet PVC Gymnasium Flooring
F15
Fitted Carpets
Note:
Refer Appendix C for floor finishes in different buildings and rooms.
Page 141
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix F: Skirting Types Type
June 2004
Description
S2
Vinyl tile with toe ‘sit on’ skirtings (pre-formed corners).
S3
Hardwood matching door architecture, minimum 18m x 100mm of even grain and colour. Rounded leading edge, PX65 satin wood stain preservative and ‘Sadotop’ finish.
S4
Coved ceramic tiles with special corners, matching floor tiles.
S5
Wall tiles with right angle butt to floor with 3mm mastic pointed abutment.
S6
Trunking skirting.
S7
Coved Granolithic integral with floor.
S8
Bituminous paint skirting on fair face concrete or block work.
Note :
Refer Appendix C for skirting in different buildings and rooms.
Page 142
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix G: Ceilings Type
Description
C1
Smooth fair face concrete.
C2
Emulsion painted smooth fair face concrete.
C3
Brilliant white textured finish on smooth fair face concrete.
C4
Suspended ceiling, 600mm x 600mm exposed grid self finish acoustic mineral fibre lay in panels.
C5
Suspended ceiling, 600mm x 600mm exposed grid self finish washable mineral fibre lay in panels.
C6
Softwood ‘T’ and ‘G’ chamfered match boarding with secret fixing and clear matt finish (all as detailed).
C7
As C6 but hardwood (all as detailed).
C8
Hardwood framing with ‘Glasal’ white enamel faced panels, HW PX65 wood stain perservative and clear gloss finished (all as detailed).
C9
Insulated sandwich construction profiled aluminium with white shade embossed finish, soffit and coloured polyester externally.
C10
Polyester finished aluminium rib ceiling with or without filler.
C11
Metal lay-in ceiling with exposed grid and bagged sound insulation over.
Note :
1. Access panels shall be provided and coordinated into ceilings and allow proper access to equipment over. 2. Refer Appendix C for ceilings in different buildings and rooms.
SP-1275
Page 143
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix H: Door Types Type
Description
D1
Double Door with middle rail and glazed.
D2
Double Door with half glazing only.
D3
Double Door solid core flush door.
D4
Double Door steel faced flush door.
D5
As D1 and HW louvres.
D6
As D4 single door.
D7
Flush door with flush side panel for wide furniture access.
D8
As D7 with HW louvres.
D9
Single flush door.
D10
Full glazed door.
D11
Half glazed door.
D12
By Specialist.
Note:
1. Doors will vary in width to suit the plan, also where required frames may be storey height and ventilation grilles may be set into the doors. 2. Refer Appendix C for doors in different buildings and rooms.
June 2004
Page 144
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix I: Window Types (Glazing) Type
SP-1275
Description
G1
Low-level fixed lights with high level bottom hung ventilator (1450mm high, 1250mm wide).
G2
Mid height sliding window fixed light over (1200mm wide).
G3
Side hung to floor fixed light over (400mm wide).
G4
Fixed light to floor (400mm wide).
G5
High level, one fixed, one bottom hung (1600mm wide).
G6
High level, bottom hung (800mm wide).
G7
High level, fixed light (1400mm, 800mm, 400mm wide).
G8
Mid height, 2 fixed lights, 2 bottom hung over (1200mm wide).
G9
Mid height, fixed light with bottom hung over (800mm wide).
G10
Mid height, 2 pane fixed (400mm wide).
G11
Mid height, fixed light (400mm wide).
G12
Mid height, two fixed light (1000mm wide).
G13
Low level, one sliding, one fixed (2000mm wide) patio door.
G14
Mid height, double sliding window (1000mm wide).
Note:
Refer Appendix C for window types in different buildings and rooms
Page 145
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix J: Ironmongeries Table 36: Ironmongery Pack Pack 100X75 3 knuckle butt hinges s.s. washers (pairs)
A
B
C
D
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
100x75 Aluminium rising butt rust proof 1 1
1
Mortise security dead lock with escutcheon Bathroom Mortise lock with indicator and extension release
1
Heavy duty roller latch
June 2004
Page 146
G
H
J
1.5
1.5
3
1.5
1
K
L
M
N
1.5
1 1
Mortise latch 5 lever Mortise lock-latch
F
SP-1275
1
O 1.5
1.5
Mortise dead lock with escutcheon Mortise cylinder lock-latch with release turn
E
1
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 36: Ironmongery Pack (contd.) Pack
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
2
2
2
2
2
2
O
Heavy duty magnetic catch Toilet indicator bolt extension release and pull lip Back plate to suit lock with shaped levers and fansorite spindle (pair) 150x19 ‘D’ handle with secret fixing
1 1
1
1
1 1
1
300x19 ‘D’ handle with secret fixing (pair)
1
Flush 75mm cabinet handle and batch set for Squash Court
1
Panic latch with external cylinder lock and latch knob Overhead door closer with hydraulic check & 900 hold
2
1
One way medium duty floor spring (adjustable) with 900 hold
2
Two way medium duty floor spring (adjustable) with 900 hold
1
2 (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 147
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 36: Ironmongery Pack (contd.) Pack
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
1
2
1
2
2
1
2
Perko pneumatic closer with check action Perko spring closer 200mm high kick plates, pair to suit Coat hook – door stop
1
Wall mounted stop or floor stop
1
1
1
2 No. 150 flush lever bolts with anti dirt sockets
2
2
Limit stays Push plate
1
‘M’ of ‘F’ indicator plate
1
Note: All Cylinder locks to have 5 individual keys, 3 Sub-Master keys per block/ floor, 2 Builders Master key, and 1 Grand Master.
June 2004
Page 148
SP-1275
2
O
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 37: Typical Ironmongery Building ACC/1
Room
A
B
BATH
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
O
a
BED
a
DINE
a
DUCT
a
ELEC
a
EXTR
ACC/2
KTCH
a
LNGE
a
ST/K
a
BATH BED
a a
DUCT
a
ELEC
a (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 149
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 37: Typical Ironmongery (contd.) Building ACC/2
Room
A
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
O
EXTR ST/K
ACC/4
B
a
BATH BED
a a
ELEC
a
EXTR SERV
a
ST/K
a
STWL WC ACC/5
a
BATH BED
a a
ELEC
a (Contd.)
June 2004
Page 150
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 37: Typical Ironmongery (contd.) BUILDING
ROOM
ACC/5
EXTR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
O
KTCH LNGE
a
SERV
a
ST/K
a
WC CON/1 - 3
CLNR
ELE/1 & ELE/2
ALL
a a a
EXTR ELE/3
ALL
a
EXTR OFF
a
WC (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 151
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 37: Typical Ironmongery (contd.) BUILDING
ROOM
GAR/1
EXTR
A
WC GAR/2
B
C
D
E
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
O
a
EXTR OFF
a
WC GAR/3
F
a
EXTR ST/F
GUA/1
WC
a
ALL
a
EXTR WC HOS/1
BATH
a
ST/M (Contd.)
June 2004
Page 152
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 37: Typical Ironmongery (contd.) BUILDING
ROOM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
HOS/1
EXAM
a
OFF
a
ST/H
a
MORT
a
BED
a
PTRY
a
RECP
J
K
L
M
N
O
a
SL
a
WC
HOS/2
H
a
TRMT
a
REDX
a
WC
a (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 153
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 37: Typical Ironmongery (contd.) BUILDING
ROOM
KIT/1/2/3
EXTR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
KTCH LAB/1 & LAB/2
H
J
K
L
M
N
O
a
ALL EXTR OFF
MES/1
a
BAR
a
ST/L
a
CLNR
a
CORR
a
DINE
a
EXTR
a
ICE
a
KTCH
a (Contd.)
June 2004
Page 154
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 37: Typical Ironmongery (contd.) BUILDING
ROOM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
LNGE
H
J
K
N
O
a
SERV
a
ST/K
a
WC
a
TV MES/2 & MES/3
M
a
RECP
MES/1
L
a
CLNR
a
CORR
a
DINE
a
EXTR
a
ICE
a
KTCH
a
LNGE
a (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 155
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 37: Typical Ironmongery (contd.) BUILDING
ROOM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
RECP
MES/2 & MES/3
M
N
O
a
SERV
a
ST/K
a
WC
a
TV MOS/1
L
a
DOME ENTR
a
EXTR PRAY
a
WC
a
MOS/2 OFF/1 To OFF/3
CORR
a
ELEC
a (Contd.)
June 2004
Page 156
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 37: Typical Ironmongery (contd.) BUILDING
ROOM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
OFF/1 TO OFF/3
ENTR
a
EXTR
a
OFF
a
ST/G
a
H
WC REC/5
J
O
a
WC
ALL
N
a
STND
SCH/1 To SCH/4
M
a
PROJ
EXTR
L
a
ELEC
REC/6
K
a a a
EXTR
a
KTCH
a (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 157
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 37: Typical Ironmongery (contd.) BUILDING
ROOM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SCH/1 TO SCH/4
SERV
a
ST/G
a
WC
L
M
N
O
a
ALL
a
EXTR SPO/1
K
a
WKSP SHO/1 & /2
J
a
ELEC
a
EXTR
a
SQCT
a
WC
a
VIEW SPO/2
ALL
a
EXTR
a
WC
a (Contd.)
June 2004
Page 158
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 37: Typical Ironmongery (contd.) BUILDING
ROOM
SPO/3 & SPO/4
ALL
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
a
KTCH
a
EXTR
a
WC STO/1 & STO/2
J
a
ALL EXTR WC
STO/5 & /7
ST/E
TEL/1 & TEL/2
ALL
a a
EXTR WC WAR/1 To WAR/4
a
EXTR OFF
a
WARE
SP-1275
Page 159
June 2004
K
L
M
N
O
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix K: Internal Environment Design Criteria 0
Room Temp C
Relative Humidity %RH
Min Fresh Air l/s
Min Air Change Per h
Max Noise Rate NR
Min Illumination Lux
Standard (Std)
24±2
45-60
10/pers
-
-
-
Project Specific
*
*
*
*
*
*
BAR
Std
Std
Std
10
40
200
BATH
“
“
No
6
40
150
BED
“
“
“
No
30
150
BTRY
10-30
No
“
*
45
150
CANT
Std
Std
Std
8
45
200
CHRM
“
“
“
No
40
150
CLNR
No
No
No
“
45
100
CLRM
Std
Std
Std
Std
“35
300
CONF
“
“
“
6
35
300
CORR
No
“
No
No
40
150
Building
Room
Standard Rooms
ALL
(Contd.)
June 2004
Page 160
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix K: Internal Environment Design Criteria (contd.)
0
Room Temp C
Relative Humidity %RH
Min Fresh Air l/s
Min Air Change Per h
Max Noise Rate NR
Min Illumination Lux
Standard (Std)
24±2
45-60
10/pers
-
-
-
Project Specific
*
*
*
*
*
*
CTRL
Std
“
Std
“
35
300
DARK
“
“
No
6
35
*
DINE
“
“
Std
8
40
200
ENTR
“
“
No
No
40
300
FILE
“
“
“
“
40
300
GYM
“
“
Std
“
40
300
ICE
“
“
“
“
45
150
LBRY
“
“
Std
3
35
300
LNGE
“
“
Std
4
35
300
OFF1
“
“
“
4
35
500
OFF2
“
“
“
4
35
500
Building
Room
Standard Rooms
ALL
(Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 161
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix K: Internal Environment Design Criteria (contd.) Room Temp 0C
Relative Humidity %RH
Min Fresh Air l/s
Min Air Change Per h
Max Noise Rate NR
Min Illumination Lux
Standard (Std)
24±2
45-60
10/pers
-
-
-
Project Specific
*
*
*
*
*
*
OFF3
“
“
“
4
35
750
PRAY
“
“
“
No
35
150
PROJ
“
“
No
*
35
150
RECP
“
“
“
No
40
300
RSNT
“
“
Std
8
40
200
SHOP
“
“
No
No
40
300
SQCT
“
“
“
“
40
500
SERV
“
“
“
“
45
150
SH
No
No
“
6
45
150
ST/O
“
“
“
No
45
150
SWGR
30+5
90 max
“
“
45
150
Building
Room
Standard Rooms
ALL
(Contd.)
June 2004
Page 162
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix K: Internal Environment Design Criteria (contd.) Room Temp 0C
Relative Humidity %RH
Min Fresh Air l/s
Min Air Change Per h
Max Noise Rate NR
Min Illumination Lux
Standard (Std)
24±2
45-60
10/pers
-
-
-
Project Specific
*
*
*
*
*
*
TLET
No
No
No
6
45
150
TV
Std
Std
Std
6
35
200
UTIL
“
“
No
No
45
150
VIEW
“
“
“
“
40
150
WAIT
“
“
“
“
40
200
WC
No
No
“
6
45
150
ACC (ALL)
KTCH
Std
Std
No
6
40
300
ANC (ALL)
BAKE
24+4
No
*
*
45
300
CDST
5±1
1“
No
No
45
150
DPFZ
-18± 1?? (depends)
“
“
“
45
150
Building
Room
Standard Rooms
ALL
(Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 163
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix K: Internal Environment Design Criteria (contd.) Room Temp 0C
Relative Humidity %RH
Min Fresh Air l/s
Min Air Change Per h
Max Noise Rate NR
Min Illumination Lux
Standard (Std)
24±2
45-60
10/pers
-
-
-
Project Specific
*
*
*
*
*
*
LDRY
24+4
“
*
*
45
300
ST/K
Std
Std
No
No
40
150
ST/P
“
“
“
“
40
150
AUX
Std
Std
No
No
45
150
CTRL
“
“
Std
“
40
300
EXAM
Std
“
Std
No
35
300
MORT
“
“
No
“
40
150
RECP
“
“
“
“
40
300
REDX
“
“
Std
“
40
300
ST/M
“
“
No
“
40
150
TRMT
“
“
“
“
35
300
Building
Room
Standard Rooms
ANC (ALL)
CON (ALL)
HOSP (ALL)
(Contd.)
June 2004
Page 164
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix K: Internal Environment Design Criteria (contd.) Room Temp 0C
Relative Humidity %RH
Min Fresh Air l/s
Min Air Change Per h
Max Noise Rate NR
Min Illumination Lux
Standard (Std)
24±2
45-60
10/pers
-
-
-
Project Specific
*
*
*
*
*
*
WARD
“
“
Std
“
35
XRAY
“
“
“
“
35
200
KTCH
24+4
90 max
80%
20
40
500
PTRY
Std
Std
No
No
40
150
PREP
“
“
“
10
40
500
ST/K
“
“
“
No
45
150
CORR
Std
Std
No
No
40
150
LABO
“
“
100%
*
40
500
LABW
“
“
100%
*
40
500
ST/B
“
“
*
*
45
150
ST/F
“
“
*
*
40
500
Building
Room
Standard Rooms HOSP (ALL)
KIT (ALL)
LAB (ALL)
(Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 165
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix K: Internal Environment Design Criteria (contd.) Room Temp 0C
Relative Humidity %RH
Min Fresh Air l/s
Min Air Change Per h
Max Noise Rate NR
Min Illumination Lux
Standard (Std)
24±2
45-60
10/pers
-
-
-
Project Specific
*
*
*
*
*
*
REC1
Std
“
Std
No
40
*
REC2
“
“
“
“
40
500
ST/E
“
“
No
“
40
150
ST/L
“
“
“
“
40
150
KTCH
Std
Std
No
6
40
300
ST/B
No
No
*
*
45
150
ST/C
*
Std
No
*
40
150
ST/F
Std
“
“
*
40
150
ST/H
“
“
“
*
40
150
ST/M
“
“
“
6
40
150
ST/T
22±1
50±2
“
No
40
300
Building
Room
Standard Rooms
MES (ALL)
SCHO (ALL) STO (ALL)
WAH (ALL)
(Contd.)
June 2004
Page 166
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix K: Internal Environment Design Criteria (contd.) Room Temp 0C
Relative Humidity %RH
Min Fresh Air l/s
Min Air Change Per h
Max Noise Rate NR
Min Illumination Lux
Standard (Std)
24±2
45-60
10/pers
-
-
-
Project Specific
*
*
*
*
*
*
ST/U
Std
Std
“
“
40
150
WOR/1
WKSP
Std
Std
Std
No
40
300
WOR/2
WKSP
No
No
No
No
45
200
WOR/3
WKSP
Std
Std
Std
No
40
300
WOR/4
WKSP
No
No
No
6
45
200
WOR/5 & /6
WKSP
No
No
No
No
45
200
Building
Room
Standard Rooms WAH (ALL)
Note: * = Project Specific Requirements
SP-1275
Page 167
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix L: Electrical Requirements Table 38: Legend for Electrical Requirements Ref No
Service
Legend
E1
POWER OUTLET
Qty Y = qty as rqd
E2
SHAVER OUTLET
qty
E3
HAND DRYER
qty Y = qty as rqd
E4
LIGHTING
BLD = external ROOM = internal A = automatic
E5
FIRE ALARM M = manual
E6
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
Y = qty as rqd
E7
NURSE CALL
Y = qty as rqd
E8
TELEPHONE OUTLET
Qty
E9
TELEVISION OUTLET
Qty
E10
AIR-CONDITIONED
Y = qty as rqd
E11
MECH VENTILATION
Y = qty as rqd
E12
WATER HEATER
Qty Y = qty as rqd
E13
DRINKING WATER COOLER
Qty Y = qty as rqd
E14
COOKER
Qty Y = qty as rqd
E15
REFRIGERATOR
Qty Y = qty as rqd
E16
INSECTOCUTOR
Qty Y = qty as rqd
Note: * = Means Special Application in the following pages under table 38
June 2004
Page 168
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 39: Electrical Requirements Schedule BUILDING
ROOM
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
E10
E11
E12
E13
Standard Rooms ALL
E15
E16
Y BAR
Y
BTRY
SP-1275
E14
Y
M
Y
A M
Y
1
Y
*
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
CANT
Y
Y
CHRM
Y
Y
CLNR
Y
Y
CLRM
Y
Y
CONF
Y
Y
M
Y
CORR
Y
Y
A
Y
CTRL
Y
Y
M
DARK
Y
Y
DINE
Y
Y
M
ENTR
Y
Y
A
FILE
Y
Y
Y
GYM
Y
Y
Y
Page 169
Y
Y
Y
Y Y Y
Y Y
Y
June 2004
Y Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
*
Y
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 39: Electrical Requirements Schedule (contd.) BUILDING
ROOM
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
E10
ICE
Y
Y
LBRY
Y
Y
LDRY
Y
Y
LNGE
Y
Y
OFF1
4
Y
1
1
OFF2
4
Y
2
1
OFF3
Y
Y
Y
Y
PRAY
Y
Y
PROJ
Y
Y
RECP
Y
Y
M
RSNT
Y
Y
M
SHOP
Y
SQCT SERV
E11
E12
E13
E14
E15
E16
Y
ALL Y
Y
M
Y
Y
M
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
Y Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
Y
Y
1
Y
Y
Y
1
Y
Y
Y
Y 1 Y
Y 1 1
Y
(Contd.)
June 2004
Page 170
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 39: Electrical Requirements Schedule BUILDING
ROOM
ALL
SH ST/O
E1
Y
TLET TV
E2
Y
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
E10
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y Y
UTIL
Y
Y
VIEW
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
WC
Y
ABL
BLD
Y
ACC/1 & ACC/2
BLD
Y
BATH
1
E11
Y
Y
WAIT
Y
E3
4
Y
KTCH
Y
Y
E13
E14
E15
*
1
E16
Y
Y
Y M
Y Y
Y
BED
E12
Y 1
1
Y
Y Y
Y
(Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 171
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 39: Electrical Requirements Schedule (contd.) BUILDING
ROOM
ACC/3
BLD
E1
BATH BED ACC/4 & /5
E2
Y 1
E4
E5
Y
M
E7
1
E8
E9
E10
M
Y
M
ANC (ALL)
BLD
Y
M A
CDST
Y
DPFZ
1
E14
1
E15
E16
1
Y
Y 2
BLD
Y
E13
Y
2
AIR/1
Y
E12
Y
Y
BAKE
E11
Y
Y
Y 1
E6
Y
BLD BED
E3
1
1
1
Y Y
Y
Y
?
Y
*
Y
*
Y
Y
*
Y
*
LDRY
Y
Y
Y
Y
ST/K
Y
Y
Y
ST/P
Y
Y
Y
* (Contd.)
June 2004
Page 172
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 39: Electrical Requirements Schedule (contd.) BUILDING
ROOM
CON (ALL)
BLD
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
Y
M
AUX
Y
Y
CTRL
Y
Y
E6
E7
Y
Y
M
EXP
BLD
Y
*
FIR (ALL)
BLD
Y
A
GAR (ALL)
BLD
Y
M
GUA/1
BLD
Y
HOS (ALL)
BLD
Y
BATH
Y
1 Y
Y
EXAM
2
Y
MORT
2
Y
RECP
2
Y
REDX
Y
Y
E10
E11
E12
E13
E14
E15
E16
Y
BLD
3
E9
Y
ELE (ALL)
BED
E8
Y
Y Y
M
Y
Y
Y 2
1
2
1
1
1 1
M
Y
Y
1
Y
1
Y
(Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 173
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 39: Electrical Requirements Schedule (contd.) BUILDING
HOS/ALL
ROOM
E1
E2
ST/M
1
Y
TRMT
Y
Y
WARD
Y
Y
WC XRAY KIT (ALL)
LAB (ALL)
E3
E4
E5
M
Y Y
BLD
M A
Y
PTRY
Y
Y
PREP
Y
Y
Y
1
Y
Y
E8
E9
E10
E11
Y
Y
E12
E13
E14
E15
E16
*
*
Y
Y 1
1
Y Y
1
Y Y
E7
1
Y
KTCH
E6
Y Y Y
Y
*
Y M
ST/K
Y
BLD
Y
M
Y Y Y
CORR
1
Y
A
Y
LABO
Y
Y
*
Y
Y
*
LABW
Y
Y
*
Y
Y
* (Contd.)
June 2004
Page 174
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 39: Electrical Requirements Schedule (contd.) BUILDING
ROOM
LAB (ALL)
MES (ALL)
E4
E5
ST/B
Y
A
ST/F
Y
A
BLD
Y
M
REC
E1
E2
Y
E3
Y
E6
E7
E8
E9
E10
E11
E12
E13
E14
E15
E16
* Y
Y Y
Y
Y
ST/E
Y
Y
ST/L
Y
Y
REC/1-/4
BLD
Y
M
REC/5
BLD
Y
M
REC/7
AREA
Y
M
ROS
AREA
Y
SCH/1-/3
BLD
Y
M
SHO/1
BLD
Y
M
SHO/2
BLD
Y
SPO/1-/3
BLD
Y
SPO/5
AREA
Y
Y
Y
Y M
Y Y
(Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 175
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 39: Electrical Requirements Schedule (contd.)
June 2004
BUILDING
ROOM
SPO/6
E1
E2
E4
E5
E12
E13
BLD
Y
M
Y
Y
SPO/7
AREA
Y
STO/1
BLD
Y
A
Y
STO/2
BLD
Y
M
STO/3
BLD
Y
A
STO/4
BLD
Y
M
STO/5-/7
BLD
Y
M
STO/8
AREA
Y
TEL (ALL)
BLD
Y
M
WAR/1 & /2
BLD
Y
M
WAR/3 & /4
BLD
Y
A
WOR (ALL)
BLD
Y
M
Page 176
E3
E6
E7
E8
E9
E10
E11
Y
Y
Y
SP-1275
E14
E15
E16
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix M: SP User - Comment Form SP User-Comment Form If you find something that is incorrect, ambiguous or could be better in an SP, write your comments and suggestions on this form. Send the form to the Document Control Section (DCS). They make a record of your comment and send the form to the correct CFDH. The form has spaces for your personal details. This lets DCS or the CFDH ask you about your comments and tell you about the decision. SP Details
Title
Issue Date:
Heading Number:
Figure Number:
Number: Page number: Comments: Suggestions: User’s personal details Name:
Ref. Ind:
Signature:
Date: Phone:
Document Control Section Actions Comment Number:
CFDH
Dates Recd:
Ref. Ind:
To CFDH:
CFDH Actions Recd Date:
Decision:
Inits:
Ref. Ind:
Date:
Date:
Inits:
Reject: Accept, revise at next issue: Accept, issue temporary amendment Comments: Originator Advised:
SP-1275
Date:
Inits:
Document Control Section Advised:
Page 177
June 2004
UNRESTRICTED June 2004
Document ID: SP-1275 Filing key: 1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works
Design Criteria Manual
SP-1275 (OLD ERD 17-04)
This document is the property of Petroleum Development Oman, LLC. Neither the whole nor any part of this document may be disclosed to others or reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form by any means (electronic, mechanical, reprographic recording or otherwise) without prior written consent of the owner.
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Authorised For Issue June 2004
Signed:............................................................ Ali Nasser Al Jahadhamy, TTO/2 (UEC) CFDH, Civil Engineering
The following is a brief summary of the recent revisions to this document. Details of all revisions prior to these are held on file by the issuing department.
Version No. Revision 0
Date
Author
Scope / Remarks
May ‘90
W. Von Schmidt, TTH/4
First Issue
Revision 1
April ‘95
BEZ/5
Updated to standard format
Version 1.0
June ‘04
Ali Nasser Al Jahadhamy, TTO/2 (UEC)
Converted to Specification as per PDO policy and minor changes to the text
SP-1275
Page i
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Contents Authorised For Issue June 2004................................................................................................ i Contents ..................................................................................................................................... ii 1.0 Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 1 1.1 Purpose............................................................................................................................. 1 1.2 User Guidelines................................................................................................................ 1 1.3 Changes to the Specification............................................................................................ 1 1.4 Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes ............................................................. 2 1.4.1 PDO Standards................................................................................................ 2 1.4.2 Omani Standards ............................................................................................. 3 1.4.3 International Standards ................................................................................... 3 1.4.4 SIEP / Shell GSI Standards ............................................................................. 5 1.5 Compliance with Standards ............................................................................................. 5 2.0 Scope ..................................................................................................................................... 6 2.1 General............................................................................................................................. 6 2.2 Units of Measurement...................................................................................................... 6 2.3 Civil Design Requirements .............................................................................................. 7 2.3.1 Basic Information............................................................................................ 7 2.3.2 Soil Investigation ............................................................................................ 7 2.3.2.1 Scope of Investigation .................................................................................... 8 2.3.2.2 Soil Investigation Report................................................................................ 9 2.3.3 Preliminary Civil Design................................................................................. 9 2.3.4 Final Civil Design ......................................................................................... 10 2.3.5 Structural Design........................................................................................... 11 2.3.5.1 Steelwork...................................................................................................... 11 2.3.5.2 Concrete ....................................................................................................... 12 2.3.5.3 Block Work .................................................................................................. 15 2.3.6 Engineering Drawings................................................................................... 16 2.3.7 Design Requirements for Specific Buildings ................................................ 20 2.3.8 Design Requirements for Pipe Supports ....................................................... 20 2.4 Design Loads ................................................................................................................. 20 2.4.1 Dead Loads ................................................................................................... 20 2.4.2 Live Loads..................................................................................................... 21 2.4.3 Wind Loading ............................................................................................... 21 2.4.4 Design Loading For Crane Gantry Girders ................................................... 23 2.4.5 Dynamic Loads ............................................................................................. 24 2.4.6 Load Combinations ....................................................................................... 24 2.5 Climatic Aspects of Buildings ....................................................................................... 24 2.5.1 Climatic Design Criteria................................................................................ 25 2.5.2 Siting & Orientation...................................................................................... 25 2.6 Means of Escape and Fire Protection............................................................................. 29 2.7 Minimum Building Requirements.................................................................................. 29 2.7.1 PDO Buildings .............................................................................................. 29 2.7.1.1 PDO Office Buildings .................................................................................. 29 2.7.1.2 PDO Sleeping Accommodation ................................................................... 30 2.7.1.3 PDO Ablution Requirements........................................................................ 30 2.7.2 Contractors Buildings ................................................................................... 30 2.7.2.1 Contractors SS Accommodation & Ablution Facilities................................ 30 2.7.2.2 Contractors JS/JE Accommodation & Ablution Facilities ........................... 31 2.7.2.3 Contractors Kitchen and Messing Facilities................................................. 31 2.8 Building Elements and Finishes..................................................................................... 38 2.8.1 Walls ............................................................................................................. 38 2.8.1.1 Structural Loading........................................................................................ 38 2.8.1.2 Thermal Requirements ................................................................................. 39 June 2004
Page ii
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
2.8.1.3 Noise Requirements......................................................................................39 2.8.1.4 Thermal Movements / Structural Freedom ...................................................39 2.8.1.5 Economic Aspects ........................................................................................39 2.8.1.6 Wall Finishes ................................................................................................40 2.8.2 Floors.............................................................................................................40 2.8.2.1 External Floors & Hard standings ................................................................40 2.8.2.2 Internal Floors...............................................................................................40 2.8.2.3 Floor Finishes ...............................................................................................41 2.8.3 Skirting ..........................................................................................................41 2.8.4 Ceilings..........................................................................................................41 2.8.5 Doors .............................................................................................................41 2.8.6 Windows........................................................................................................41 2.8.7 Ironmongery ..................................................................................................41 2.9 Staircases and Platforms.................................................................................................41 2.9.1 Flow Capacities of Staircases ........................................................................42 2.9.2 Riser / Going Relationship ............................................................................42 2.9.3 Fire Rating for Structures ..............................................................................45 2.10 Roofs ...................................................................................................................50 2.10.1 Thermal Requirement ....................................................................................50 2.10.2 Water Discharge ............................................................................................50 2.10.3 Flat Roofs ......................................................................................................50 2.10.4 Pitched Roofs ................................................................................................51 2.10.5 Roof Sheeting ................................................................................................51 2.11 Built-in-Furniture ................................................................................................52 2.12 Security ...............................................................................................................52 2.12.1 Fencing and Gates .........................................................................................52 2.13 Paint Finish & Colour .........................................................................................55 2.13.1 External Surfaces...........................................................................................55 2.13.2 Internal Surfaces............................................................................................55 2.14 External Works ...................................................................................................55 2.14.1 Site Preparation .............................................................................................55 2.14.2 Landscaping...................................................................................................56 2.14.2.1 Hard Landscaping.......................................................................................56 2.14.2.2 Soft Landscaping ........................................................................................56 2.14.2.3 Screening Requirements .............................................................................56 2.14.3 Roads .............................................................................................................56 2.14.3.1 Internal Access Road ..................................................................................56 2.14.3.2 External Access Roads ...............................................................................57 2.14.4 Car Parks .......................................................................................................58 2.14.4.1 Standard Parking Layout ............................................................................58 2.14.4.2 Car Parks Construction ...............................................................................58 2.14.4.3 Road Signs & Markings..............................................................................58 2.14.5 Materials Storage Yards ................................................................................66 2.14.6 Footpaths .......................................................................................................66 2.14.6.1 Footpath Dimensions ..................................................................................66 2.14.6.2 Footpath Construction ................................................................................66 2.14.7 Well Location and Flow/Bulk Line Layout...................................................66 2.14.7.1 Piping Corridors .........................................................................................68 2.15 Building Services Design Requirements.............................................................68 2.15.1 Manufacturers & Vendors .............................................................................68 2.15.2 Specification & Drawings .............................................................................68 2.15.3 As Built Drawings .........................................................................................69 2.15.4 External Services ...........................................................................................69 2.16 Air-Conditioning & Ventilation..........................................................................69 2.16.1 Design Criteria for Air Conditioning & Ventilation Works..........................70 2.16.1.1 Outdoor Conditions ....................................................................................70 2.16.1.2 Indoor Conditions .......................................................................................70 2.16.1.3 Equipment Overcapacity.............................................................................70 2.16.2 Chilled Water ................................................................................................70 SP-1275
Page iii
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.16.2.1 Chiller compounds & Equipment............................................................... 70 2.16.2.2 Controls ...................................................................................................... 71 2.16.2.3 Pipe work.................................................................................................... 71 2.16.3 Specialist Areas............................................................................................. 71 2.16.3.1 Battery rooms ............................................................................................. 71 2.16.3.2 Electrical Substations & Switch Houses .................................................... 72 2.16.3.3 Gas Bottle Stores ........................................................................................ 72 2.16.3.4 Kitchens...................................................................................................... 73 2.16.3.5 Laboratories................................................................................................ 73 2.16.3.6 Temporary Buildings.................................................................................. 74 2.16.4 Condensate Drains ........................................................................................ 74 2.16.5 Refrigerant Pipe work ................................................................................... 74 2.16.6 Automatic Shutdown..................................................................................... 74 2.16.7 Legionnaires Disease .................................................................................... 74 2.17 Plumbing............................................................................................................. 74 2.17.1 Potable Water................................................................................................ 75 2.17.1.1 Water Demand............................................................................................ 75 2.17.1.2 Isolating Valves, Air Valves, Washouts..................................................... 75 2.17.1.3 Water Meters .............................................................................................. 76 2.17.1.4 Storage........................................................................................................ 76 2.17.1.5 Pumping ..................................................................................................... 76 2.17.1.6 Sterilisation................................................................................................. 76 2.17.2 Domestic Hot & Cold Water............................................................................... 76 2.17.2.1 Water Consumption.................................................................................... 76 2.17.2.2 Water Systems............................................................................................ 77 2.17.2.3 Isolation...................................................................................................... 77 2.17.2.4 Insulation.................................................................................................... 77 2.17.2.5 Sterilisation................................................................................................. 77 2.17.2.6 Flush Control Valves.................................................................................. 77 2.17.2.7 Water Closet spray Assemblies .................................................................. 78 2.17.2.8 Emergency Showers ................................................................................... 78 2.17.2.9 Emergency Eye Wash Stations................................................................... 78 2.17.2.10 Hot Water Service Dead legs ................................................................... 78 2.17.3 Drainage ........................................................................................................ 78 2.17.4 Sewerage ....................................................................................................... 78 2.17.4.1 Flow Rates.................................................................................................. 79 2.17.4.2 Minimum Pipe Diameters........................................................................... 79 2.17.4.3 Location of Manholes................................................................................. 79 2.17.4.4 Interceptors................................................................................................. 79 2.17.4.5 Pipe work Under Buildings ........................................................................ 79 2.17.4.6 Structural Penetrations ............................................................................... 80 2.17.4.7 Connection to Existing Sewers................................................................... 80 2.17.4.8 Sewage Pumping Stations .......................................................................... 80 2.17.5 Liquid Petroleum Gas ................................................................................... 80 2.17.5.1 Gas Cylinder Stores.................................................................................... 80 2.17.5.2 Regulators................................................................................................... 80 2.17.5.3 Emergency Shutdown................................................................................. 80 2.17.5.4 Domestic Installations ................................................................................ 81 2.17.6 Laboratory Piped Services ............................................................................ 81 2.17.6.1 Pipe work.................................................................................................... 81 2.17.6.2 Hot and Cold Water.................................................................................... 81 2.17.6.3 Distilled Water ........................................................................................... 81 2.17.6.4 Compressed Air.......................................................................................... 81 2.17.6.5 Vacuum ...................................................................................................... 81 2.17.6.6 Special Gases.............................................................................................. 81 2.17.7 Fire Fighting Water....................................................................................... 82 2.17.7.1 Hose reels ................................................................................................... 83 2.17.7.2 Hydrants ..................................................................................................... 83 2.17.7.3 Fire Storage Tanks...................................................................................... 83 June 2004
Page iv
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
2.17.7.4 Fire Pumps ..................................................................................................83 2.17.8 Irrigation........................................................................................................83 2.17.8.1 Demand.......................................................................................................84 2.17.8.2 System Components ...................................................................................84 2.17.8.3 Storage ........................................................................................................85 2.17.8.4 Pumping & Filtration ..................................................................................85 2.17.8.5 Control Systems..........................................................................................85 2.17.8.6 Pipe work Identification .............................................................................85 2.17.8.7 Sprinklers....................................................................................................85 2.17.8.8 Emitter Allocations .....................................................................................85 2.17.9 Swimming Pools............................................................................................86 2.18 Sewage Treatment...............................................................................................86 2.18.1 Location of STP.............................................................................................87 2.18.2 Pollution Load ...............................................................................................87 2.18.3 Sewage Treatment Plant ................................................................................87 2.18.4 Treated Effluent Standard..............................................................................89 2.18.5 Facultative Ponds ..........................................................................................91 2.18.6 Septic Tanks ..................................................................................................91 2.18.7 Hydrocarbon Disposal Pits ............................................................................92 2.19 Electrical Services...............................................................................................92 2.19.1 Electrical Supply ...........................................................................................93 2.19.1.1 Rated Voltage & Frequency .......................................................................93 2.19.1.2 Loads ..........................................................................................................93 2.19.1.3 Voltage Drop ..............................................................................................93 2.19.1.4 Underground Cable De rating.....................................................................94 2.19.1.5 Underground Cables ...................................................................................95 2.19.1.6 Earthing ......................................................................................................95 2.19.2 Small Power ..................................................................................................95 2.19.2.1 Power Supply..............................................................................................96 2.19.2.2 Power Consumption....................................................................................96 2.19.2.3 Voltage Drop ..............................................................................................97 2.19.2.4 Cables .........................................................................................................97 2.19.2.5 Conduit & Trunking ...................................................................................97 2.19.2.6 Earthing & Bonding....................................................................................97 2.19.3 Indoor Lighting..............................................................................................97 2.19.3.1 Luminaries ..................................................................................................98 2.19.4 Emergency Lighting ......................................................................................98 2.19.4.1 Escape Route Lighting................................................................................99 2.19.4.2 Exit Lighting...............................................................................................99 2.19.4.3 Vital Lighting..............................................................................................99 2.19.5 Outdoor Lighting...........................................................................................99 2.19.5.1 Lighting Fixtures ......................................................................................100 2.19.5.2 Illumination Levels ...................................................................................100 2.20 Fire Detection & Alarm ....................................................................................100 2.20.1 Operational Criteria .....................................................................................100 2.20.2 Cables ..........................................................................................................101 2.21 Lightning Protection .........................................................................................102 2.22 Telecom Networks ............................................................................................102 2.22.1 Data Communications Networks.................................................................103 2.22.2 Television & Video Networks.....................................................................103 2.22.3 Audio Systems.............................................................................................103 2.22.4 Nurse Call Systems......................................................................................103 Appendices .............................................................................................................................104 Appendix A: Glossary of Definitions & Abbreviations.....................................................105 A.1 General Definitions & Terminology .................................................................105 A.2 Abbreviations ....................................................................................................106 A.3 Abbreviations for Building Types.....................................................................110 A.4 Abbreviations for Room Types.........................................................................116 SP-1275
Page v
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix B: Weights of General Building Materials ....................................................... 120 Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes .................................................................... 123 Appendix D: Wall Finishes ............................................................................................... 138 Appendix E: Floor Finishes............................................................................................... 140 Appendix F: Skirting Types .............................................................................................. 142 Appendix G: Ceilings ........................................................................................................ 143 Appendix H: Door Types .................................................................................................. 144 Appendix I: Window Types (Glazing) .............................................................................. 145 Appendix J: Ironmongeries ............................................................................................... 146 Appendix K: Internal Environment Design Criteria.......................................................... 160 Appendix L: Electrical Requirements................................................................................ 168 Appendix M: SP User - Comment Form ........................................................................... 177
June 2004
Page vi
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
1.0
Introduction
1.1
Purpose
Version 1.0
The purpose of this document is to specify the minimum requirements and recommendations for “Structural Design and Detail Engineering of Civil and Building Works” and is intended for use by PDO and its nominated Consultants and Contractors for the development and operation of Company facilities. This specification is intended to:
1.2
-
Set the Company standards for facilities along the facilities life cycle.
-
Disseminate and record facilities related information, experience and procedures.
User Guidelines This Specification supersedes the ERD-17-04 ‘Civil & Building Design Criteria Manual’. Other than the conversion or formatting, the following are the main changes to this document. -
Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes are revised.
-
Tanking Details for the Concrete Protection Works are revised
-
Accommodation facility requirements for PDO and Contractors camps in section 2.7 and its subsections are revised
-
Staircases & Platforms requirements in section 2.9 revised and added more.
-
Mandatory Warning Sign requirement for the Graded/Tarmac Transition are added as new in section 2.14.3
-
Graded Road section details (Fig 4) and its material specifications are revised.
For all HSE requirements, the User should refer the CP-122 ‘Code of Practice for Health, Safety and Environmental Protection’ and other documents referenced therein.
1.3
Changes to the Specification Custodian of this document is the Corporate Functional Discipline Head (CFDH) of Civil Engineering. Any User of this document, who encounters an inaccuracy or ambiguity, is requested to notify the CFDH using the SP user-comment form provided in Appendix-M. Reviews and modifications or changes to the specification will normally be made by the CFDH every four years or earlier when justified.
SP-1275
Page 1
June 2004
Version 1.0
1.4
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Applicable Standards, Specifications and Codes This Specification shall be read in conjunction with the latest revisions of the following Standards, Specifications and Codes.
1.4.1
PDO Standards
June 2004
PDO-ERD-00-01
:
PDO Guide to Engineering Standards & Procedures
PDO-ERD-00-06
:
Preparation & Content of Engineering Drawings
IP 15
:
Institute of Petroleum Model Code of Safe Practice Part 15 – Area Classification Code for Petroleum Installations
SP-1273
:
Specification for Civil & Buildings - ‘Standard Drawing Index’
SP-1278
:
Specification for Site Selection and Soil Investigation Works – ‘Engineering Guidelines Manual’
SP-1274
:
Specification for Civil & Building Construction ‘Guideline to Materials Testing’
SP-1279
:
Specification for Civil & Building Construction
SP-1285
:
Specification for Civil & Building’s Utility Services
SP-1280
:
Specification for Swimming Pools – ‘Design & Construction Guidelines’
SP-1281
:
Specification for Roads – ‘Guide to Safe Road Works’
SP-1282
:
Specification for Reinforced Concrete – ‘Production & Construction Guidelines’
SP 1283
:
Specification for Standard Sunshades – ‘Design Requirements & Standard Drawings’
SP-1276
:
Specification for Standard Control Building – ‘Design Requirements & Standard Drawings’
SP-1099
:
Specification for Electrical Installation Practice
SP-1104
:
Specification for Electrical Safety Rules.
SP-1105
:
Specification for Electrical Standard Drawings List.
SP-1109
:
Specification for Earthing & Bonding.
SP-1110
:
Specification for Electrical Supplies in Mobile Camps.
SP-1127
:
Plant Equipment Layout Specifications
PDO-ERD-71-01
:
Underground & Internal Telephone Cable Networks.
SP-1075
:
Specification for Fire & Explosion Management
Page 2
-
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
1.4.2
1.4.3
SP-1275
Version 1.0
SP-1284
:
Specification for Signs & Signboards – ‘Standard Signs Catalogue’
SP-1277
:
Specification for Transportable Accommodation Units – ‘Design Requirements & Standard Drawings’
CP122
:
Code of Practice for ‘Health, Safety & Environmental Protection’
SP-1231
:
Health, Safety & (Occupational Health)
PGSC List
:
Product Group Service Codes List for Civil Products
Environment
Specification
Omani Standards Highway Design Manual
:
Sultanate of Oman - Ministry of Communications
General Specification for Roads
:
Sultanate of Oman - Ministry of Communications
Limits of Reuse & discharge of Waste Water
:
Ministry of Environment
Bye-Laws & Ordinances
:
Sultanate of Oman - Royal Oman Police
Street Names & Property Numbering Signs
:
Sultanate of Oman – Capital Municipality
International Standards BS 449
:
Specification for the use of Structural Steel in Buildings.
BS 648
:
Schedule of weights of building materials
BS 2573
:
Rules for the design of cranes
BS 3202
:
Laboratory Furniture & Fittings
BS 4800
:
Schedule of Paint Colours for building purpose
BS 5266
:
Emergency Lighting
BS 5268
:
Structural Use of Timber.
BS 5482
:
Code of Practice for Domestic Butane and Propane gas burning installations
BS 5588
:
Fire Precaution in the Design, Construction and use of buildings
BS 5628
:
Code of Practice for the Use of Masonry.
BS 5925
:
Code of Practice for ventilation, principles and designing for natural ventilation
BS 5839
:
Fire detection and Alarm systems for buildings
Page 3
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
BS 5930
:
Code of Practice for Site Investigations.
BS 5950
:
Structural Use of Steelwork in Buildings.
BS 6399
:
Loading for Building.
BS 6651
:
Code of Practice for Protection of Structures against Lightning
BS 6700
:
Specification for Design, Installation, Testing & Maintenance of services supplying water for domestic use within buildings & their Cartilages.
BS 7543
:
Guide to durability of buildings and building elements products and components
BS 7668
:
Specification for weldable structural steels. Hot finished structural hollow sections
BS 8004
:
Code of Practice for Foundations.
BS 8110
:
Structural Use of Concrete.
BS 8206
:
Code of Practice for Artificial Lighting
BS 8666
:
Specification for scheduling, dimensioning, bending and cutting of steel reinforcement for concrete
BS EN 54
:
Fire detection and Fire Alarm system
BS EN 197
:
Cement composition, specification criteria for common cements
BS EN 752
:
Drain & Sewer systems outside buildings
BS EN ISO 4066
:
Construction drawings bar scheduling
BS EN 10025
:
Hot rolled products of non alloy structural steels
BS EN 10210
:
Hot Finished Structural Hollow Sections of non alloy and fine grain structural steels
BS EN 12056
:
Gravity Drainage systems inside buildings
BS EN 13150
:
Work Benches for Laboratories. Requirements and Test Methods
BS ISO 15686
:
Buildings and Constructed assets – Planning, General Principles and Prediction Service Life Procedures
BS ISO 8995
:
Lighting of Indoor Work Places
CP 3
:
Code of Basic Data for the Design of Building.
CP 2012
:
Code of Practice for Foundations for Machinery
ASHRAE
:
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Airconditioning Engineers Inc. (ASHRAE).
June 2004
Page 4
and
conformity
Dimensions, Safety
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
1.4.4
1.5
Version 1.0
CIBSE
:
Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) Guides.
CARRIER
:
Carrier Air-conditioning Co. conditioning System Design.
IEE
:
Institution of Electrical Engineers (IEE) Regulations for Electrical Installations.
IEC 60364
:
Electrical Installation of Buildings
IEC 60439-4
:
Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies
DIN 57510 / VDE 0510
:
Specifications Equipment.
for
Handbook
Accommodation
for
and
Air-
Battery
SIEP / Shell GSI Standards DEP 31.76.10.10-Gen.
:
Heating, Ventilation and Air-Conditioning of Plant Buildings
DEP 31.76.10.11-Gen.
:
Installation, Testing, Balancing & Commissioning of HVAC systems
DEP 32.31.50.31-Gen.
:
Analyser Houses
DEP 33.64.10.10-Gen.
:
Electrical Engineering Guidelines
DEP 33.65.50.31-Gen.
:
Static DC Uninterruptible Power Supply (DC UPS) Units.
DEP 34.00.01.30-Gen.
:
Minimum Requirements for Structural Design and Engineering
DEP 34.17.00.32-Gen.
:
Design and Engineering of Buildings
DEP 34.17.10.30-Gen.
:
Reinforced Control Buildings (Explosive Proof)
DEP 34.17.10.31-Gen.
:
Laboratories
DEP 34.19.20.11-Gen.
:
Fire Hazards and Fireproofing/cold splash protection of steel structures
DEP 34.28.00.31-Gen.
:
Steel Structures
DEP 80.00.10.10-Gen.
:
Area Classification (Amendment / Supplement to IP 15)
Compliance with Standards Any deviations from this part of Specifications shall be subject to Company approval and shall be advised in writing to the Custodian. In all cases the Company shall determine the adequacy of the design carried out and Works executed by the Contractor in accordance with this Specifications.
SP-1275
Page 5
June 2004
Version 1.0
2.0
Scope
2.1
General
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
This Specification is an Engineering Guidelines for the Company Civil & Building Facilities and includes applicable design and detailing data and requirements.
2.2
Units of Measurement In general the SI Units of Measurements shall apply. In addition, the following are used in this document. Acidity / Alkalinity of Water
:
pH
Biochemical oxygen demand
:
BOD
Dimension
:
metre, millimetre
Electrical resistance
:
ohms
Flow
:
litres per second
Force
:
Newton N = 0.9807 kg
Frequency
:
hertz Hz
Power
:
watt, kilowatt
W, kW
Pressure
:
kilopascals (gauge)
kPa, kPa(g)
Atmospheres bar
100 kPa
m, mm
l/s
Noise
:
decibel ‘A’ scale
dBA
Refrigeration :
:
kilowatt
kW
:
Tons of refrigeration
TR = 3.517 kW
Relative Humidity
:
RH
Temperature
:
degrees Celsius
0
Velocity
:
metres per second
m/s
Weight
:
gram, kilogram
g, kg
June 2004
Page 6
C
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.3
Civil Design Requirements
2.3.1
Basic Information
Version 1.0
The Company should provide the information required to carry out the project to the Consultant in the following form: -
Scope of works
-
Project specification
-
Location drawing(s)
The information should include, but not be limited to, the following: -
The intended use of the structure(s) or project
-
The required Design Life of the structure or various structures indicating whether Permanent, Semi-permanent or Temporary (as defined in Appendix A section A.1 of this document).
-
Any information on existing site surveys, site investigations etc. that may be available.
The Consultant shall bear in mind the following: Building appearance shall conform to established PDO requirements, local customs, and if applicable, existing buildings. Engineering drawings shall comply with PDO-ERD-00-06 ‘Preparation & Content of Engineering Drawings’ and shall be issued in the following stages: -
Preliminary
-
Final (Tender for comment)
-
Tender
-
Contract
-
Working (for construction)
-
As built
Building should be designed to allow for future horizontal extension unless specified otherwise by the Company. 2.3.2
Soil Investigation The purpose of soil investigation is to provide information on the soil conditions for design and construction of civil and structural engineering works. The soil investigation work shall be carried out in accordance with SP-1278: ‘Specification for Site Selection & Soil Investigation Works – ‘Engineering Guidelines’.
SP-1275
Page 7
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
The main aims of a soil investigation may be defined as follows: -
To enable a safe, durable and economic design for the works to be produced.
-
To enable the works to be constructed safely.
-
To ensure that the construction of the works does not infringe on environmental requirements.
2.3.2.1 Scope of Investigation Depending on the requirements of the project, the investigation may be used to obtain information on, but not limited to, the following: -
Bearing capacity
-
Settlement (and differential settlements)
-
Behavior of ground water in respect of uplift on foundations, effects on bearing capacity, pollution and flow into excavations
-
Slope stability of embankments, cuttings and excavations
-
Swelling properties of soils (clays, silts, gypsum etc.)
-
Suitability of soil for fill
-
Chemical composition of soil and groundwater with particular reference to chemical attach/corrosion on construction materials
-
Dynamic Shear Modulus for Machine Foundations
-
Details of rock strata, dip, strike etc.
The Consultant shall however carefully investigate the necessity for a soil investigation, and if required, the type of information needed. The Consultant may consider the following: A study of available information of the area such as geological maps, water and oil well logs, hydrological data and site investigation reports of adjacent sites. A site visit shall be carried out to obtain the information on the type and behaviour of adjacent structures (cracks, sags due to differential settlements, rock outcrops which give an indication of the presence of the depth of bed rock etc). For extensions, single storey buildings on raft type foundations, pipelines etc., the Consultant may consider a site investigation unnecessary based on the information obtained from above, nevertheless it is the Consultants responsibility to ensure foundations are suitable for the building/structure and ground conditions. However, for multi-storey structures, installation of large sized tanks (where settlement predictions are important) installation of vibrating or rotary equipment (with considerable dynamic loading) etc, dedicated soils investigations shall be undertaken.
June 2004
Page 8
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
2.3.2.2 Soil Investigation Report Soil Investigation Reports shall comply with SP-1278 Specification for Site Selection & Soil Investigation Works – ‘Engineering Guidelines’ and BS-5930: Code of Practice for Site Investigations. The report shall provide information on the items noted in section 2.3.2.1 as necessary. The report shall be factual with engineering recommendations. Recommendations, information and discussions shall be based on anticipated details of the structure such as, type of foundations, founding levels, foundation loadings, overturning forces, construction procedures and details and any special construction methods. Should any of these items significantly change during the procedure of design, the Consultant shall review the validity of the original report recommendations and seek further advice as necessary. The soils report shall clearly state how the recommendations have been arrived at and shall include copies of the Terzaghi curves used etc, to enable the Consultant to conclude the size of safety factors used to obtain the allowable bearing pressures, etc. All reports shall be loaded in electronic form to PDO live link system for reference. 2.3.3
Preliminary Civil Design The Consultant shall undertake preliminary designs. During this process, the Consultant shall advise the Company on alterations considered necessary, if any, regarding orientation, location etc, in view of local climatic conditions, topography or any other aspects. Such alternations shall only be implemented if agreed by the Company. In order to achieve preliminary designs, the Consultant shall be fully acquainted with the site. To obtain the necessary knowledge the Consultant shall visit the site. The number of visits, and personnel visiting the site, will be dependent on the project, however the Consultant shall ensure adequate knowledge is gained. Preliminary designs shall comprise: -
Site surveys (preliminary or final), which shall include details of existing services, etc, as applicable (Various site and topographical surveys are already available within the Company).
-
Site layout plan(s), showing the location of buildings and plant, and indicating true North and prevailing wind direction(s).
-
A plan of every floor, indicating positions, dimensions, levels and intended use of the rooms in the building, including typical furniture and equipment layout where applicable.
-
Schematic elevations and typical cross sections.
-
Details of ground water levels for buildings containing basements.
-
Schedules of basic structural materials (concrete, steel, timber, etc,).
It shall be noted that locally manufactured materials shall be used wherever possible as long as such materials are technically acceptable. In support of the Company’s drive to promote local industry.
SP-1275
Page 9
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
The Consultant is required, to some extent, to consider relaxing design specifications (and hence investigate the financial consequences of the resulting operating and capital costs associated with such a relaxation). All other civil/building materials shall be chosen out from the Company PGSC (Product Group Service Codes) list for Civil Products. All of which (with minor exceptions) have local agents. -
Preliminary civil/structural design assessment to cover structural stability, robustness, concept, preliminary sizing of major elements and details of any key elements.
-
A list of any assumed design parameters.
Preliminary designs shall include details of alternative construction and cost comparisons in order to achieve both technically and economically viable solutions. 2.3.4
Final Civil Design The Consultant shall obtain, as a minimum, the following information in order to undertake the final design and details. -
Intended use of structure (refer section 2.3.1).
-
The design life of the structure (Temporary, Semi-permanent or Permanent (refer Appendix A section A.1).
-
Detailed site surveys including details of all existing services (if applicable) and likely future building service runs for water, power, sewage disposal, telephones, etc.
-
Soil Investigation (refer section 2.3.2)
-
Design load requirements including meteorology (refer section 2.4)
-
Details of surrounding topography
-
Details of exposure conditions (acidic environment, saline environment, etc.)
The Consultant shall produce thorough and complete sets of detailed design calculations and shall be approved by the Company. All calculations shall indicate, clearly and concisely the output and conclusions of each particular solution. Calculations shall be preceded with a standard information sheet, containing all of the above information, plus additional details as shown in the project related drawings and documents. The following Codes of Practice and British Standards shall be used as a minimum for the final design, unless alternative codes are agreed and approved by the Company.
June 2004
BS 6399
:
Loading for Building
BS 5950
:
Structural use of Steelwork in Buildings
BS 5628
:
Code of Practice for the use of Masonry
BS 5268
:
Structural use of Timber
BS 8110
:
Structural use of Concrete
Page 10
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
BS 8004
:
Code of Practice for Foundations
CP 2012
:
Code of Practice for Foundations for Machinery
Final design shall include, but not be limited to:
2.3.5
-
Layout plan(s) showing the locations and orientation of the building(s).
-
Full working drawings showing the structural and civil designs of the entire project giving full details of all the elements in the building(s) (refer section 2.3.6).
-
Full working drawings showing all the architectural, mechanical, electrical and plumbing details for the entire project (refer section 2.3.6).
-
Plans of every floor and roof, cross sections through individual floors and essential elevations of the building. These drawings shall show the position, form, dimensions and materials of all the various parts of the buildings and structures.
-
Collected design data and calculations for climatic consideration, logically leading to the conditions expected to prevail in the building.
-
Proof, by means of calculations, material and equipment data that the criteria for comfort shall be satisfied.
-
Particular Specifications of works, to be added to the PDO Standard Specifications, and any other specifications necessary, in sufficient detail to invite competitive bids from erection contractors, so drafted as to provide minimum possible disparity between the interpretations by such contractors. These specifications shall also include a concept programme of erection, the final material specifications and working details.
-
Such additional detailed designs, specifications and drawings, in order to define fully all details of the building, and to ensure a smooth and effective completion of the work.
-
A complete set of calculations for all disciplines, properly headed, indexed and numbered, with the contract number on each sheet. All sheets shall be A4 format and of a suitable quality for easy reproduction.
Structural Design In the design for structural elements, the load factors, material factors, permissible stresses, etc. shall be in accordance with the requirements of the design code being applied. Due consideration shall be given to exceptional load conditions and accident cases for which the design may be undertaken with reduced load and material safety factors as allowed by the design code. Refer to Appendix B for Weights of General Building Material and Appendix C for Live Loads. 2.3.5.1 Steelwork Deflection in steel structures shall be limited to the values given in Table 1. Deflections due to dead loads, where limits are given for live loads in Table 1, shall not impair the strength and efficiency of the structure, lead to damage of the finishing or to be unsightly. Measures to nullify the effects of deflection due to dead loads by adjusting the casing on cased members or by pre-cambering should be considered.
SP-1275
Page 11
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Horizontal deflections at crane rail level due to spread of the supporting structure shall be considered and shall not exceed the value in Table 1, the manufacturers recommendations or affect the performance of the crane. When checking for deflections the most adverse realistic combination and arrangement of loads should be assumed. Material grades should be as follows: Structural hollow sections: BS EN 10210 Grade S275 All other structural steelwork: BS EN 10025 Grade S275 JR Connections should, whenever possible, avoid the use of high strength friction grip bolts. However, if used for special technical reasons, the mode of checking tension shall be by the use of load indicating washers. Bolt grades on a particular job should be standardised where possible to prevent incorrect usage of bolt types on site. Table 1: Allowable Deflections for Structural Steelwork Live Loadings.
Member
Maximum allowable Deflection where Piping is supported
Maximum allowable Deflection where Piping is not supported
Purlins
N/A
1/250th of the span
Supporting beams
1/500th of the span (due to Live Loading)
1/360th of the span (due to Live Loading)
Crane Girders (Vertical deflection for 10 to 40 Tonnes capacity)
N/A
1/80th of the span
Crane girders & Runaway Beams (Vertical deflection up to 10 Tonnes capacity)
N/A
1/600th of the span
Cantilevered Beams
1/200th of overhang (due to Live Loading)
1/180th of overhang (due to Live Loading)
Portal Frames (Horizontal)
1/250th of the height
1/200th of the height
Portal Frames (Vertical)
1/500th of the span (due to Live Loading)
1/360th of the span (due to Live Loading)
All Cranes (Horizontal)
N/A
1/500th of the span
2.3.5.2 Concrete Concrete elements shall contain suitable materials to meet the requirements of both strength and durability. Consideration to both the levels of chloride and sulphates shall always be given when specifying cement type. One of the following three typical land based exposure conditions needs to be stipulated as the basis of the design criteria of concrete foundations (chemical analysis to be assessed from the soil investigation report): June 2004
Page 12
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
1.
Concrete placed in soils containing only SULPHATES, with no significant risk of chloride induced corrosion, shall follow the recommendations of BRE Digest 363 (Building Research Establishment) Table 1. In addition the concrete surface shall be treated with two coats of ‘FOSROC Nitoproof 100’ bituminous paint or any other approved equivalent.
2.
Concrete placed in soils containing only CHLORIDES, with no significant exposure to sulphates, shall use Ordinary Portland Cement to BS EN 197 or ASTM Type I (that is, with medium to high C3A content). In addition, the concrete surface shall be protected in the form of tanking membrane system or protective coating system as detailed below.
3.
Concrete placed in soils containing both CHLORIDES and SULPHATES shall adopt the following criteria. When the chlorides are less than 0.05% in the soil or ground water, the recommendation shall be as (1) above, that is, for soils containing only sulphates. When the chlorides exceed 0.05% in the soil or ground water, the recommendation shall be as (2) above, that is, for soils containing only chlorides.
When the chlorides or sulphates or both (chlorides & Sulphates) in the soil or ground water, are not in a significant level or totally free, the recommendation shall be ordinary port land cement (OPC) to BS EN 197 or ASTM Type I. In addition, the concrete surface shall be treated with two coats of ‘FOSROC Nitoproof 100’ bituminous paint or any other approved equivalent. The membrane system of tanking shall consist of primer, membrane, corner fillet, reinforcing strip, protection board etc., Typical tanking details for concrete foundations (above and below grade) are shown in Figure: 1. The tanking system product shall be ‘Schlegel’ or any other approved equivalent. The exposed surface shall be treated with two coats of ‘FOSROC Dekguard S’ Anti-Chlorides and Carbonation coatings or any other approved equivalent with a dft of 350 microns. This coating shall be required to protect the above ground concrete from the atmospheric effects and windborne salts. For more details of the exposure condition refer SP-1282 Specification for Reinforced Concrete – ‘Production & Construction Guidelines’. The coating system for tanking shall be two coats of ‘FOSROC Nitocote PE135’ or any other approved equivalent with a dft of 400 microns. All membrane or coating system shall be strictly in accordance with the relevant manufacturers instruction. Covers to all reinforcement including links shall never be less than the value shown in Table 2. Table 2: Minimum Concrete Cover to Reinforcement Element
Absolute Minimum Nominal Cover
Internal
:
50mm
External
:
50mm
Below Ground
:
50mm
Building floor / roof slabs
:
25mm
Note: The above are minimum nominal covers and shall be increased if required by the relevant design standard being used. SP-1275
Page 13
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
For more information on recommended concrete cover to reinforcement related to external exposure condition refer SP-1282 Specification for Reinforced Concrete – ‘Production & Construction Guidelines’. The use of crushed ice and admixtures should be considered when specifying concrete to ensure the production of good quality concrete. Reinforced concrete should be general contains aggregates not exceeding 20mm and mass concrete should in general contain aggregates not exceeding 40mm. The design and details of concrete and concrete mixes shall be in accordance with SP-1282 Specification for Reinforced Concrete – ‘Production & Construction Guidelines’. All structural concrete shall be of Grade C35 (that is, having a characteristic strength of 35 N/mm2 at 28 day), unless specified otherwise. Mass concrete shall be used for general filling as required. Blinding concrete shall be 50 mm thick. Both Blinding and Mass Concrete shall have a characteristic strength of at least 10 N/mm2 at 28 days. All edges of exposed concrete shall have a chamfer of approx. 25 mm.
Figure 1:
Typical Tanking Details for Concrete Foundations (Above & Below Grade)
Note: 1. Product Brand Name: Schlegel for Membrane system and Fosroc for Exposed surface coating. 2. For Special foundations like pumps, compressors, GT etc., additional care shall be taken as per the consultant/vendor’s advise. June 2004
Page 14
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Foundation bolts shall be in accordance with the latest revision of PDO Standard Drawing STD-2-3950-001. Unless stated otherwise, the standard minimum lap lengths of concrete reinforcement shall be as shown in Table 3. Table 3: Minimum Reinforcement Lap Lengths Minimum Lap Lengths (mm) Size
Tension / Compression
Size
Tension / Compression
R6
300
T6
350
R8
350
T8
450
R10
400
T10
550
R12
500
T12
650
R16
650
T16
850
R20
800
T20
1050
R25
1000
T25
1300
R32
1250
T32
1650
R40
1600
T40
2050
Concrete reinforcement for Hot-Rolled Mild Steel and Hot-Rolled Deformed High-YieldStress Bars, shall be detailed as follows:
12
– R/T 10
– 3
-
200 SPACING OF BARS BAR MARK BAR TYPE AND SIZE NUMBER OF BARS REQUIRED
2.3.5.3 Block Work Careful consideration should be given to the partial safety factors used for materials when designing block work. Details of supervision and quality of blocks required to meet the design assumptions should be stated on the drawings or in the specification. Blockwork shall be designed to carry all the applied loading and combinations of loading, giving due consideration to differential and thermal movements.
SP-1275
Page 15
June 2004
Version 1.0
2.3.6
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Engineering Drawings Engineering drawings shall be prepared in accordance with PDO-ERD-00-06 Preparation & Content of Engineering Drawings. A0 drawing shall not be used unless agreed in writing by the Company. Reinforcement shall be fully scheduled by the Consultant for working civil/structural drawings in accordance with BS 8666 & BS EN ISO 4066, including bar bending schedules. All welding symbols used shall comply with BS 449 Part 2C. All drawings shall cross - refer to associated drawings. All drawings shall provide details of required material grades. Legend / Symbols are given below and for definitions and abbreviations see Appendix A. Should other symbols or abbreviation be required (excepting welding symbols) a key shall be provided on the drawing clearly describing their meaning. Lettering and figures shall be distinct and uniform to ensure the production of good legible prints. The style should be simple and unaffected. Capital letters should be used for all titles and sub-titles. Lowercase letters should be used only for notes. The size of all lettering shall be as follow:For A1 Drawings
:
3.0mm high minimum
For A2 & A3 Drawings
:
2.5 high minimum
All drawings should be to scale. The following scales should be used: Civil/Structural Site layout & simple GA’s:
:
1:200
General arrangement
:
1:100 or 1:50
Foundation Location Plans
:
1:100
Simple wall and slab details
:
1:50
Beam and column elevations
:
1:20
Beam and column sections
:
1:20 or 1:10
Note: 1.
Where larger scale details are desirable, the following should be used 1:5, 1:2 or FS.
2.
For projects with large foundations a scale of 1:25 may be used when scales of 1:50 or 1:20 are clearly unsuitable.
All structural slab levels or finished floor levels should be indicated and related to a datum. Levels shall be expressed in metres. All other dimensions shall be expressed in millimetres.
June 2004
Page 16
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Structural steelwork working drawings should show details of main connections. For minor connections all moments, forces and shears shall be required to enable their design by the contractor. The Consultants scope of work shall include the checking of shop drawings and connection details designed by the contractor. The Consultant shall produce a full set of As Built drawings, based on fully marked up drawings by the contractor, which shall contain all civil, structural, mechanical, electrical details etc. They shall clearly indicate the true location of all hidden and underground services, structures and the like. Complete copy of drawings shall be submitted in electronic form and loaded to PDO live link system.
SP-1275
Page 17
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
The following legends / symbols shall be used where applicable: Legend / Symbols
June 2004
Page 18
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Legend / Symbols (contd.)
SP-1275
Page 19
June 2004
Version 1.0
2.3.7
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Design Requirements for Specific Buildings The specification gives minimum general requirements for the design and engineering of all new building, however additional requirements for specific buildings are specified in the following documents: DEP 32.31.50.31 – Gen.
:
Analyser Houses
:
Typical Analyser Houses for Tropical Areas
Shell Standard Drawing S 17.002
:
Typical Analyser Houses for Non-Tropical Areas
DEP 34.17.10.31 – Gen.
:
Laboratories
SP-1276
:
Specification for Standard Control Buildings – Design Requirements & Standard Drawings
DEP 34.17.10.30 – Gen.
:
Reinforced Proof)
SP-1283
:
Specification for Standard Sunshades – Design Requirements & Standard Drawings
Shell Standard 17.001
2.3.8
Drawings
S
Control
buildings
(Explosive
Design Requirements for Pipe Supports The design of Standard Pipe Supports is covered in a separate dedicated document: SP-1187 Specification for ‘Selection of Standard Pipe Supports’.
2.4
Design Loads The design shall take into account all loading conditions foreseen as occurring during the design life of the structure. If applicable, loading from future extensions shall be allowed for. These shall include any alterations to wind loading effects due to the change in structure size. Details of assumptions made in this respect shall be clearly stated in the design concept section of the calculations. Loadings that will occur during construction of the structure shall be designed for. Details of any specific construction procedural requirements such as back propping; de-propping etc. shall be clearly stated to the contractor in the drawings or specifications as necessary.
2.4.1
Dead Loads The self-weight of all the building elements including services, specific plant etc. shall be calculated and used in the design of the structure. For proprietary systems, equipment and machines specific details of loading shall be obtained from the manufacturers and used in the design. These details shall correspond to the items specified on the contract drawings and in the specifications. Where permanent partitions are shown in the plans their actual weights shall be included in the dead load. The weights of tanks and other receptacles and of their contents shall be considered as dead loads. These loads need to be calculated for the cases when a tank or receptacle is full and when empty.
June 2004
Page 20
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Dead loads should be calculated from the unit weights given in BS 648 or from actual known weights of the materials used. For general building materials, however, the values given in Appendix B may be used. 2.4.2
Live Loads Live loads for buildings, and method of calculation, shall be in accordance with BS 6399 Part 1, however the live loads shown in Appendix C may be used as a guideline. For structural steel platforms on Oil/Gas projects, the following live loads shall be used: Access Walkways (not including operating floors)
:
250 kg/m2
Operating Floors (not next to heat exchangers)
:
500 kg/ m2
Special Cases (e.g. Floors located at the draw end of a shell tube heat exchanger).
:
750 kg/ m2
Under desert conditions roof with a pitch of less than 50 shall be designed for sand loading and shall be a minimum of 1 kN/m2. For structural calculations, local codes or regulations, and actual loading situations shall be adhered to if more stringent than the values obtained from Appendix C. Where applicable, the weight of vehicles shall be included as live loading and shall be applied to produce the most critical design cases. 2.4.3
Wind Loading Wind load calculations shall comply with the requirements of BS 6399-2 Loading for Buildings – ‘Code of Practice for Wind Loads’ and DEP 34.00.01.30-GEN. Figure 2 specifies highest Mean Hourly Wind Speed, V10 (m/s), at a height of 10 m, which shall be accounted for in the design. The Design Wind Speed at any height z above the ground, Vz (m/s), is derived from the formula below: Vz = F x V10 x (z/10)1/y x S3 (m/s) Where, Vz = The Design Wind Speed at height z. V10 = The Mean Hourly Wind Speed F = Gust Duration Factor Z = Height above grade 1/y = Locality Factor S3 = Structure Category Factor (S1 and S2 are included in the above). Refer Table 4 for the values of F & 1/y and Table 5 for the value of S3.
SP-1275
Page 21
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Figure: 2 MEAN HOURLY WIND SPEED CHART
June 2004
Page 22
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 4: Values Of Gust Duration Factor & Locality Factor Categor y
F
1/y
Topography 3 sec gust
10 sec gust
1
Extreme exposure. Large expanses of open water, grassland, desert, etc.
1.5
1.3
1/14
2
Open country with low obstructions, trees, 2storey buildings, etc.
1.7
1.4
1/11
3
Built-up areas and areas with high obstructions. Towns, refineries, etc.
2.0
1.6
1/8
Although 3-second gust speeds, are sometimes quoted and certainly of great importance when dealing with wind forces on structures, the above formula takes this into account. It is intrinsically incorrect to stipulate 3-second gust duration values, as these depend on location, obstructions and the influence of neighbouring structures (which could cause eddies and complex flow resulting in much higher gust velocities), as well as height above the ground. Therefore only use highest mean hourly wind speeds at 10 metres above the ground. The values of S3 are shown in Table 5 and shall be used for the various category of structure as described in section 2.5. Table 5: Values Of S3 For Wind Loading Structure Type
S3
Permanent
1.00
Semi Permanent
0.83
Temporary
0.77
Note: The values given above shall not be applicable for Telecom Type Towers and for any special structures for a particular project and shall be calculated from BS 6399. 2.4.4
Design Loading For Crane Gantry Girders The following applies only to single crane operation and to simple forms of crane gantry construction. Loads for heavy crane, high-speed operation or multiple cranes on a single gantry have to be specially calculated. For crane gantry girders, the following allowances can be used to cover all forces set up by vibration, shock from slipping of slings, kinetic action of acceleration and retardation and impact of wheel loads:
SP-1275
Page 23
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
a. For loads acting vertically, the maximum static wheel loads shall be increased by the following percentages. For an electric overhead cranes:
25%
For a hand operated cranes:
10%
b. The horizontal force acting transverse top the rails, the following percentages of the combined weight of the crab and the load lifted: For an electric overhead crane:
10%
For a hand operated crane:
5%
c. The horizontal forces acting along the rails shall be taken as a percentage of the static wheel loads, which can occur on the rails, as follows: For overhead cranes, either electric or hand operated: 5% The forces specified in either (b) or (c) above, may be considered as acting at the rail level and being appropriately transmitted to the supporting system. Either of the horizontal forces in (b) or (c) above may act at the same time as the vertical load on gantry girders and their vertical supports. The design loadings for Overhead Travelling Cranes and outdoor gantries shall be determined in accordance with BS 2573. 2.4.5
Dynamic Loads Where loads arising from machinery, and other plant producing dynamic effects, are supported by or communicated to a structure, allowance shall be made for these dynamic effects by increasing the load by an adequate percentage. Foundations, which directly support vibrating equipment such that the effects need to be taken account of in the calculations, shall be designed in accordance with BS CP 2012. In general it is advisable to provide anti-vibration pads.
2.4.6
Load Combinations Load combinations shall be such that both maximum and minimum load cases are checked if applicable to investigate not only design loadings on particular elements but also stability, uplift and overturning conditions. Load combinations shall also be in accordance with the requirements of the particular design code of practice or standard.
2.5
Climatic Aspects of Buildings Attention shall be paid to the prevailing climatic conditions in various seasons (using records of local climatic design data), such as air temperature, temperature differences, saline atmosphere, sand and dust storms, possible sand infiltration of buildings, humidity, solar influence, wind, micro climatic variations, etc., to arrive at a satisfactory design. Buildings shall be designed and constructed so that, within operational and physical constraints, they are able to maintain the necessary internal comfort condition with the minimum of capital and operations costs over the whole range of external prevailing conditions.
June 2004
Page 24
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.5.1
Version 1.0
Climatic Design Criteria Outdoor design conditions should be based on the relevant meteorological data for each project. For further detail refer section 2.16.
2.5.2
Siting & Orientation 1
Residential and Housing Areas
If at all possible, camps & housing plots etc., shall be sited up wind of industrial areas, so that prevailing winds drive smoke & fumes away from accommodation/residential areas. They shall also be sited a reasonable distance away from mosques and recreational facilities.
2
Industrial Areas
As mentioned in section 1 if at all possible, industrial areas shall be sited down wind of accommodation/residential areas but up wind of flare areas and burn pits.
3
Individual Accommodation Units or Houses
As opposed to Western European standard, orientation of houses shall, if at all possible, be such as to avoid excessive sun and wind exposure. Advantage shall be taken where possible to make best use of scenic outlook and privacy. Living rooms and bedrooms should face the garden, while kitchens and ancillary rooms etc., should face the street.
4
Mosques and Prayer Shelters
All mosques and prayer shelters shall be orientated towards Mecca. Once the building foundation trenches have been excavated, final approval by the local religious authority shall be received before further work commences. Mosques shall be located away from any sources of noise.
5
Outdoor Sports Facilities
Tennis courts, volley ball courts (and preferably football pitches) shall be orientated in the N-S direction because of sun light problems at dawn and dusk. Care need to be taken in siting these facilities in relation to problems of night time glare from flares/burnpits. Shelter is needed from the wind, especially for badminton or tennis courts. Sports facilities shall not be located close to areas from which there is high level of noise, for example, turbines, or close to likely source of fumes/smoke, for example, fire training ground.
6
Open Cinemas
Open Air Cinemas are usually only used at night. Therefore if such a facility has been specified by the Company (no longer considered a standard facility), their location and orientation shall depend on problems associated with glare from flares etc., and noise to accommodation, mosques, etc., or from adjacent plant and equipment. Prevailing wind problems with fumes, dust, etc., shall also be taken into account, not forgetting the effects of the glare from the sun (least important).
7
Power Stations
Air
Power Stations are generally very noisy and therefore their location shall be such as to cause the least amount of discomfort to occupants of camps, building, potential building plots, etc., still ensuring cost effectiveness of cable lengths, O/H lines, fuel lines etc. Gas Turbines have the added hazard of gas explosions (as well as possible H2S problems). Noise levels are defined in the section 3.0 of SP 1231 and section 4.6 of DEP 34.17.00.32. (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 25
June 2004
Version 1.0
2.5.2
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Siting & Orientation (contd.) 8
Clinics
Clinics shall be sited such that easy access to both Residential and Industrial Areas is achieved. Noise is considered the major hazard for clinics even though hazards due to fumes/smoke/flare glare, etc., shall also be taken into account.
9
Schools
Schools generally have a certain amount of noise associated with them, and therefore should not be too close to housing. A more important factor is the hazard of fast traffic. Speed bumps shall be located on both sides of the School, with appropriate traffic warning signs, etc., to control traffic speeds. All hazard facilities, such as electrical substations, sewage pumping pits, etc., shall be securely fenced off with suitable locks.
10
Offices
Offices should have an E-W main axis, with the windows facing either north or south, as the penetrating morning and evening sun is undesirable. The sun can be kept out by sun blinds, window U/V film, or roof overhang. Siting is dependant on client needs but care must be taken against noise and fume/smoke hazards. Space is needed directly outside the office space for off loading supplies and adequate car parks. Natural day light is very desirable but not necessarily essential. Artificial lighting, to correct levels, may be used if no other option is available.
11
Workshops
Workshop orientation is dependent on access to and from the workshop to the access road. Siting of workshops is dependent on client needs, services availability, noise factor, hazardous factors, wind blown dust.
12
Warehouses & Stores
13
Hydrocarbon Laboratories
Warehouses are normally located at the entrance of the supply lay down area and orientated for easy access and removal of material by fork lift trucks, transport trucks, etc. Materials that need sun shading shall be orientated to obtain maximum effect of side cladding while still attaining high efficiency of access. In general this results in the main axis of the building being orientated in the E-W direction, with access from the North Wind blown dust also needs to be carefully taken into account. Hydrocarbon Laboratories shall be located well away from points of ignition and other such hazards (see IP Part 15 ‘Model Code of Safe Practice’). They shall be free standing with their own supply of uncontaminated air supply. Orientation shall be such as to avoid direct sun light from entering the laboratory, that is, the windows shall have a northerly aspect.
14
Airstrips & Air Terminals
When siting an Airstrip in the Interior the following points shall be considered: 1. Air Lane activity in the area including for military flying. 2. Type of development in the surrounding area (camps, garbage dumps, sewage lagoons, etc.). All these attract birds, which are a hazard to incoming aircraft. (Contd.)
June 2004
Page 26
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.5.2
Version 1.0
Siting & Orientation (contd.) 14 Airstrips & (contd.) Air Terminals (contd.)
3. Communication (all types) problems and availability, radio interference, etc. 4. Utilities available – aviation fuel, water, electricity, etc. 5. Surrounding obstructions: telecom towers, sand dunes, etc. 6. Meteorological conditions throughout the year. 7. Likely use by non-PDO personnel Other factors to take into account are the expected lifetime of the airstrip, type of planes that will be used, the effect and condition of both the take off and approach zones, and access to camp site or oil installation. The orientation of the airstrip shall be dependent on prevailing winds and the surrounding obstructions within the take off and approach zones. The terminal building shall have the main axis parallel to the airstrip. For the airstrips safety refer the PDO Safety Reference Document M.3.9 or the appropriate standards as stated CP-122 Code of Practice for the Health, Safety and Environment Protection.
15
Explosives Stores
Explosives stores shall be located a minimum of 1000 m from roads and public buildings, which does not include the access road to the store. These stores shall also be located a minimum of 2000 m from vulnerable installations such as pipe lines, production facilities, power lines and telecom facilities. The compound itself shall be double security fenced 6 m apart, with an outer 1 m deep, 2 m wide security anti vehicle ditch. The associated guard house shall be located along the approach access road, 400 m from the Explosives store security fencing. All explosives stores shall conform to the Royal Oman Police regulations.
16
Fuel Stations
Fuel Stations are considered as a hazardous area, especially during fuel delivery/despatch time, and therefore its location shall be dependent on minimum distances from a point of ignition to fuel vents. All fuel stations shall conform to the ‘Model Code of Safe Practice’ IP Part 15.
17
Fire Training Areas
The Fire Training Area is a source of ignition and a source of smoke (and possible H2S). These areas shall be located well away from Residential and Recreational facilities. They shall also be located well away from any installations, which have inflammable or hydrocarbon compounds such as oil/gas installations, fuel stations, explosive stores, laboratories, warehouses/stores, etc. Building facilities, other than buildings within the compound itself, shall not be less than 150 m away from a point of ignition in the Fire Training Area. Prevailing winds and hence the effects of smoke must be taken into consideration when locating such an area. (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 27
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.5.2 Siting & Orientation (contd.)
June 2004
18
STP’s (Sewage Treatment Plants) and Evaporation Ponds
Both Sewage Treatment Plants (and associated ponds) and Dedicated Evaporation Ponds are sources of smell and sanitary pollution. All residential facilities and schools shall not be located within 100 m of a STP or evaporation ponds. Smell/bad odours are mainly caused by anaerobic (septic) conditions even though excessive algae blooms do contribute to the smell. Prevailing wind is a major factor when siting STP's and evaporation ponds so that all manned locations shall be located upward of such facilities. Wind is a major element in the efficient running of an evaporation pond. Fencing to ponds, to stop camels entering the area, shall be located away from the pond itself to avoid effecting the wind fetch of the pond. Location is also decided by ground water contamination, closeness to potential flooding of wadi’s, or problems of percolation/leakage under the bunds into manned areas (that is, ponds to be located down hill of manned facilities).
19
Isotope Stores
Location of Isotope Store are defined in the Safety Reference document section M.2.1 or CP-122 Code of Practice for ‘Health, Safety and Environment Protection’ and other documents referenced therein.
20
Telecom Installations
Telecom installations are affected by heavy atmospheric disturbance and high voltage. Care must be taken to ensure that high voltage cables or overhead lines are located away from such installations. Commonly associated with Telecom facilities are high towers which affect take off and approach zones of airstrips. Microwave towers need to be free of any other outside obstructions.
21
Transportable Units (Portacabins)
The main problem with Transportable Units is their risk of fire. The minimum distance between Units shall be 5 m. Units shall be considered as a point of ignition when dealing with facilities such as fuel stations, fuel tanks, etc. For access reasons, a minimum space of 7 m shall be maintained between Units and a fence/boundary wall.
22
R O Plants
These should, when possible, be located close to the supply and disposal wells, preferably between the wells and the user facility.
23
Garbage Dumps
Garbage dumps should be sited down wind from the camp and in particular away from any aircraft landing strip or helicopter pad as these attract birds, etc.
24
Scrap Heaps
Scrap heaps shall be located such as to minimise environmental impact and shall be regularly backfilled as dumping continues. Where removable scrap is stored this shall be within screened areas.
25
Military Installations
Following is applicable for Military installations. 1) No construction allowed within 20m from outside fence 2) No more than one storey building is allowed within 200m 3) No more than two storey building is allowed within 300m 4) No more than three storey building is allowed within 400m 5) No construction allowed between the main road and outside fence 6) ROP approval is required before constructing within 400m from the outside fence. (Contd.) Page 28
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.5.2
Version 1.0
Siting & Orientation (contd.)
2.6
25
Car Parks
In the design of car parks particular attention shall be drawn to save ingress to and egress from the approach roads. In congested areas right angle parking should be used to maximise space usage and overall cost. Elsewhere 450 parking is considered desirable. Whilst it is mandatory in the Interior to build car parks suitable for Reverse Parking, for the Coast uses normal drive in parking (see Figure 5 in this document).
26
Shops
Shops shall be provided with a storeroom, toilet and wash hand basin. The store shall be minimum 15% of the shop floor area.
Means of Escape and Fire Protection The planning of all buildings shall be in accordance with the BS 5588 Part 1 to 5 Fire Precautions in the Design & Construction of Buildings and shall comply with the requirements of Royal Oman Police regulations. Building layouts and proposed fire protection systems shall be subject to Company approval. The layouts shall show safe means of escape routes, protected corridors, travelling distances to the protected corridors, protected shafts and means of escape exists. A statement shall be provided specifying the proposed air-conditioning supply and return air systems, and fire protection systems for the project. The location of all hand held fire-fighting equipment shall be agreed with the Company. All matters relating to Fire Detection, Protection and Alarms is covered under Section 2.17.7, 2.19.4 and 2.20 of this document.
2.7
Minimum Building Requirements
2.7.1
PDO Buildings 2.7.1.1 PDO Office Buildings These buildings shall be designed with an overall building width of 13 m. One of the centre corridor walls shall coincide with the centre of the building giving offices of internal dimensions of: Office 1
4.15 m
x (3.38) m = 14 m2
Office 2
6.25 m
x (3.38) m = 21 m2
Corridor width
1.80 m
4 Walls of 200 mm each
0.80 m
Hence
13.00 m
(Width of building)
Provision shall be made for installation of partition walls at approximately 1.69 m intervals so that following rooms sizes can be formed: 7 m2, 10.5 m2, 14 m2, 21 m2, 31.5 m2 and 42 m2.
SP-1275
Page 29
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.7.1.2 PDO Sleeping Accommodation All rooms in the PDO sleeping accommodation blocks shall have a bedroom, attached bath/toilet and storage facilities. Standard room sizes are given in the Table 6. The accommodation unit allocation shall be one person/room for senior staffs and two persons/room for junior staffs. Table 6: Areas of Sleeping Accommodation Staff (Grade) Item SS
JS
Bedroom m2
20.80
20.80
Shower/WC m2
3.20
3.20
Storage m3
2.00
2.00
Total Area m2
24.00
24.00
Notes
En suite shower/wc
En suite shower/wc
2.7.1.3 PDO Ablution Requirements In general toilets shall have minimum internal dimensions of 1.0 m x 1.6 m for both SS and JS. This may be reduced to 0.9 m x 1.3 m in offices. Showers shall have minimum dimensions of 1.0 m x 1.8 m, divided into a wet area and a dry area by a simple curtain, the latter area having a seat. 2.7.2
Contractors Buildings Contractor’s temporary site offices shall have areas as stated in section 2.7.1.1 or to suit the requirements of a particular contract. Accommodation for contractors shall be provided in the PAC (Permanent Accommodation for Contractors) and its facilities are similar like PDO facilities. If there is no PAC accommodation the Contractors can have their own camp and to provide the same facilities to their staffs. The accommodation unit allocation in the PAC or in the Contractors camp shall be one person/room for senior staffs and two persons/room for junior staffs and all other category staffs. Three persons sharing per room shall be allowed for JE and other staff categories, if the bedroom size is more than 21 m2 or as stated in Table 6. 2.7.2.1 Contractors SS Accommodation & Ablution Facilities Contractors SS accommodation shall have a sleeping room with an attached bath/toilet facilities. The room sizes shall not be less than 13 m2.in case of portable accommodation units otherwise the size shall be the same as given in Table 6. The following sanitary ware fittings shall be provided for each bath /toilet unit. Refer Table 7.
June 2004
Page 30
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table7: Contractors SS Ablution Facilities Sanitary Fittings Item
Staff
2a
SS
√
√
√
2b
SS
√
√
√
2c
SS
√
√
√
WC (Western) 1.6 m2
WC (Eastern) Urinals 1.4 m2
Handwash Basins
Shower Units 1.8 m2
2.7.2.2 Contractors JS/JE Accommodation & Ablution Facilities Contractors JS/JE and all other staff’s accommodation units shall have a sleeping room with attached bath/toilet facilities. The room sizes shall not be less than 13 m2.in case of portable accommodation units otherwise the size shall be the same as given in Table 6. The following minimum number of sanitary ware fittings shall be provided for each bath / toilet unit. Refer Table 8. Table8: Contractors JE Ablution Facilities Sanitary Fittings Item
Staff
WC (Western) 1.6 m2
WC (Eastern) 1.4 m2
Urinals
Handwash Basins
Shower Units 1.8 m2
3a
JS
√
√
√
3b
JE
√
√
√
3c
JE
√
√
3d
Others
√
√
3e
Others
√ √ √
√
2.7.2.3 Contractors Kitchen and Messing Facilities In general, the Kitchen and Associated Facilities should be constructed in block work, and the use of porta-cabin type kitchens shall be discouraged. The Kitchen and Associated Facilities for Contractors have been sized using the following design criteria, based on international norms: Individual space requirements in the kitchen for the various functions are shown in the Figure 3.
SP-1275
Page 31
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Figure 3: Kitchen Facilities Dimension Chart
M2 60
Preparation
40 20 0 0
200
400
600
800
Meals 3.a. Preparation
M2 80 60
Service
40 20 0 0
200
400
600
800
Meals 3.b. Service
M2 60 40
Staff Facilities
20 0 0
200
600
800
3.c. Staff Facilities
Meals
June 2004
400
Page 32
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Figure 3: Kitchen Facilities Dimension Chart (contd.)
M2 60
Cooking
40 20 0 0
200
400
600
800
600
800
Meals 3.d. Cooking
M2 60 40 Wash-Up
20 0 0
200
400
Meals 3.e. Wash-Up
M2 60
Storage (total)
40 20 0 0
200
400
600
800
Meals 3.f. Storage (total)
SP-1275
Page 33
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 9: Contractor Kitchen Facilities Dimensions/Sizes Total Manpower of Contractor Item
June 2004
Description
0 to 10 People
10 to 25 People
25 to 50 People
50 to 100 People
100 to 200 People
200 to 400 People
4
Kitchen Area
4a
Preparation
N/A
10 m2
10 m2
11 m2
15 m2
23 m2
4b
Service
N/A
18 m2
18 m2
19 m2
22 m2
36 m2
4c
Staff Facilities
N/A
10 m2
10 m2
13 m2
15 m2
19 m2
4d
Cooking
N/A
19 m2
19 m2
20 m2
23 m2
39 m2
4e
Wash Up
N/A
8 m2
8 m2
10 m2
13 m2
18 m2
4f
Storage (Total)
N/A
25 m2
25 m2
27 m2
32 m2
35 m2
4
Total Kitchen Area JS and SS
N/A
90 m2
90 m2
100 m2
120 m2
170 m2
Page 34
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 10: Contractors Dining Room Facilities Dimensions/Sizes Total Manpower of Contractors Item
SP-1275
Description 0 to 10 People
10 to 25 People
25 to 50 People
50 to 100 People
100 to 200 People
200 to 400 People
Motel Accommodation
SS + JS Eat Together
SS + JS Eat Together
SS + JS Eat Separately
SS + JS Eat Separately
SS + JS Shift & Eat Separately
5a
Condition of Dining/ Messing Facilities
5b
Assumed Average Population
N/A
20
40
80
170
180 - 2 No Shifts
5c
Assumed Split Between JS and SS
N/A
1 to 4
1 to 5
1 to 6
1 to 7
1 to 8
5d
Assumed Number of Meals/sitting
N/A
20
40
80
170
360 - 2 No Shifts
5e
Dining Space factor for JS
N/A
1.6per’s/m2
1.5per’s/m2
1.4per’s/m2
1.4 persons/m2
07 persons/m2
5f
Dining Space factor for SS
N/A
N/A
N/A
1.8per’s/m2
1.7 persons/m2
08 persons/m2
JS Dining Area Space Requirement in m2
N/A
32m2
60m2
93m2
203m2
220m2
JS Servery and Extra Circulation Space
N/A
18m2
30m2
47m2
107m2
110m2
Page 35
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 10: Contractor Dining Room Facilities dimensions/Sizes (cont’d…) Total Manpower of Contractors Item
5g
5h
5i
June 2004
Description
0 to 10 People
10 to 25 People
25 to 50 People
50 to 100 People
100 to 200 People
200 to 400 People
Total Dining Space Requirement for JS
N/A
50m2
90m2
140m2
310m2
330m2
Dining Area Space Requirement for SS
N/A
N/A
N/A
25m2
43m2
36m2
SS Servery and Extra Circulation Space
N/A
N/A
N/A
15m2
27m2
24m2
Total Dining Space Requirement for SS
N/A
N/A
N/A
40m2
70m2
60m2
Dining Area Space Requirement in m2 for both JS & SS
N/A
32m2
60m2
118m2
246m2
256m2
Servery and Extra Circulation Space For JS & SS
N/A
18m2
30m2
62m2
134m2
134m2
Total JS & SS Dining Area Requirement
N/A
50m2
90m2
180m2
380m2
390m2
Page 36
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 11: Other Kitchen/ Messing Related Facilities Dimensions/ Sizes Total Manpower of Contractors Item
Description 0 to 10 People
10 to 25 People
25 to 50 People
50 to 100 People
100 to 200 People
200 to 400 People
6
Other Facilities
6a
Bakery
N/A
16m2
16m2
20m2
30m2
40m2
6b
Laundry
N/A
35m2
35m2
55m2
70m2
110m2
6c
Catering Offices
N/A
14m2
14m2
20m2
20m2
30m2
6d
SS Toilet / Wash
N/A
10 m2
15 m2
15 m2
24 m2
24 m2
6e
JS Toilet / Wash
N/A
25 m2
30 m2
30 m2
36 m2
36 m2
6
Total Other Facilities
N/A
100m2
110m2
140m2
180m2
240m2
Table 12: Overall Area of Contractor’s Kitchen/ Messing Facilities Total Manpower of Contractors Item
7
SP-1275
Description
Overall Area of Kitchen/ Messing
Page 37
0 to 10 People
10 to 25 People
25 to 50 People
50 to 100 People
100 to 200 People
200 to 400 People
N/A
240m2
290m2
420m2
680m2
800m2
June 2004
Version 1.0
2.8
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Building Elements and Finishes Building elements shall be designed and detailed to comply with fire regulations as detailed in the United Kingdom Building Regulations 1985 produced by the Department of the Environment and the Welsh Office. Designs and details shall also comply with the requirements of the local fire authorities. Refer Appendix C for the relative values of the different Building Elements and Finishes of PDO buildings.
2.8.1
Walls All wall designs and details shall take into consideration the following: -
Structural Loading Requirements
-
Thermal Insulation Requirements
-
Noise Insulation Requirements
-
Water/Moisture Repelling Requirements
-
Thermal Movement/Structural Freedom
-
Acoustic Reverberation Requirements
-
Economic Aspects
-
Finishing Requirements
-
Animal, Vermin, Insect Penetration Requirements
-
Dust Penetration Requirements
In addition external walls shall be designed and detailed to resist moisture penetration, to prevent the occurrence of condensation. Damp proofing is required, as in temperate climates (regarding the omission of damp proof courses, refer section 2.8.1.5). Termite barriers are essential in the construction of walls. Internal walls for wash rooms and other wet rooms shall be designed and detailed to be moisture resistant and shall contain a damp proof course. Walls for control buildings shall be solid with no cavities to prevent the possible build up of gases and therefore hollow blocks shall not be used in these instances. Holes for cable entries in these buildings shall be sealed with polyurethane foam after cables have been installed. 2.8.1.1 Structural Loading All load bearing block work walls shall have a minimum compressive strength of 10 N/mm2. All non - load bearing block work walls shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3.5 N/mm2. Mortar shall as a minimum comply with the requirements of designation II as described in BS 5628. All openings for windows, doors, etc. in hollow block work shall be framed on all sides by providing a minimum of one T12 reinforcing bar placed centrally in the block hollow adjacent to the opening. The hollow shall subsequently be filled with concrete as the block work progresses. The concrete shall be a minimum of grade 20. (Characteristic strength of concrete shall be 20 N/mm2 @ 28 days with 10 mm aggregate). June 2004
Page 38
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
The framing bar shall run from the floor below the opening to the ceiling above and where applicable shall pass through and be cast into the lintels above the opening. It shall also, where applicable, be cast into the slab below and soffit above the block panel under consideration. Walls shall be designed to withstand all vertical, horizontal and longitudinal loads, including wind and stability loading, as necessary. Due consideration shall be given to the eccentricity of loading in the design. 2.8.1.2 Thermal Requirements Light colour, heat reflecting, thermal qualities and low maintenance shall be the main considerations in selecting the external finish. ‘U’ values should not exceed 0.6 W/m2 0C for external walls. Cavity walls with insulation shall be considered in all external wall designs for air conditioned buildings to help conserve energy. See also section 2.8.1.5. 2.8.1.3 Noise Requirements All walls shall be suitably designed and constructed to ensure compliance with the room noise ratings specified in Appendix K. 2.8.1.4 Thermal Movements / Structural Freedom Vertical movement joints in walls shall be placed at intervals not exceeding the following: Table 13: Movement Joints Wall Type
Max. Joint spacing
Concrete framed buildings and structures
30 m
Concrete walls
30 m
Fired clay brick walls
12 m
Calcium silicate bricks
8m
Concrete brick walls
8m
Concrete block walls
6m
Parapet walls
5m
Horizontal movements joints may be required where block work/brickwork is built in a frame to allow the frame to move independently. All movement joints in buildings shall be sealed to prevent the ingress of water. 2.8.1.5 Economic Aspects Consideration shall be given to exceeding the ‘U’ value of 0.6 W/m2 °C stipulated in section 2.8.1.2 where the environmental condition within the space is not critical. Non-fair faced un-rendered block work may be used in areas of non-aesthetic importance. Where wall cladding is used, un-plastered non-fair faced blocks shall be used on faces covered by the cladding. SP-1275
Page 39
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
External walls constructed on concrete ground beams or slabs which are a minimum of 150 mm above surrounding ground level shall not require a horizontal damp proof cover. 2.8.1.6 Wall Finishes Wall finishes as detailed in Appendix D of this document shall be used. 2.8.2
Floors 2.8.2.1 External Floors & Hard standings Where reinforced concrete floors are required externally they should be constructed in bays not greater than 4.5 m in width, which shall separated by longitudinal construction joints. Every other longitudinal construction joint shall be formed to allow shrinkage to occur. Each bay shall be divided into lengths not exceeding 5 m by transverse shrinkage control joints. Expansion joints shall be provided in both directions every 30 m. Where mass concrete hard standings are used they shall be formed in bays not exceeding 5 m x 5 m, which shall be separated by isolation joints. All external floors and hard standings shall be laid with adequate falls (minimum 1:100) such that, allowing for normal tolerances, there is no possibility of water ponding and to ensure quick and effective drainage. Consideration shall be given, particularly with temporary or semi permanent floor to laying the concrete directly on the ground. 2.8.2.2 Internal Floors All exposed concrete floors shall be treated with an anti-dust compound. All exposed concrete floors subject to oil/acid spillage shall be treated with a suitable epoxy based flooring cover. In workshops, due consideration shall be given to fork lift loading, racking and machine foundations. All vibrating and large machine foundations shall be isolated from the ground floor slab by way of an isolation joint. For the installation of computers and other instrument or electrical equipment with cable connecting at the bottom of the equipment cavity floors shall be provided. These shall comprise a reinforced concrete lower floor and a removable panel upper floor of 600 x 600 module supported on pedestals. The pedestals shall be fixed to the concrete floor in such a manner as to form a firm bedding and shall be in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. They shall be adjustable in height and the adjustable section shall have automatic positive locking. Ensure that the pedestals and the frames, supporting either the instrument or electrical cabinets, are able to provide independent stability to the structure at all times. Each floor panel shall be capable of supporting, as a minimum, a concentrated load of 4450 N, applied on an area of 650 mm2 at any point. The floor shall also be capable of carrying, as a minimum, 15 kN/m2 with a maximum deflection of 1 mm. The reinforced concrete floor below the cavity shall be painted with an epoxy paint to prevent formation of dust. All pre-cast suspended floors shall be suitably tied to the structure to provide robust and stable construction.
June 2004
Page 40
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
2.8.2.3 Floor Finishes Floor finishes as detailed in Appendix E of this document shall be used. To all wet areas such as toilets the floor and 200 mm up surrounding walls shall be painted with two coats of bitumen and sharp sand splattered for key. At change of finishes line, at all doorways and in bays not exceeding 15 m2 brass dividing strips finished flush to the surface shall be provided. 2.8.3
Skirting Skirting as detailed in Appendix F of this document shall be used.
2.8.4
Ceilings Ceiling finishes as detailed in Appendix G of this document shall be used.
2.8.5
Doors Doors as detailed in Appendix H of this document shall be used. All doors shall be either solid teak framed or teak faced solid core flush doors. Where doors are fire rated their composition shall change accordingly.
2.8.6
Windows Refer Appendix I for Window Types. Contractors shall verify the final dimensions at site before making shop drawings. Approval to shop drawings shall be given prior to commencement of manufacture. All windows to be silver anodised aluminium with 6 mm thick glazing. Windows shall be fixed into a timber frame. Glazing to floor level windows shall be armour plated glass. To bathrooms and toilets shall be rough - cast narrow receded.
2.8.7
Ironmongery Subject to the building type the quality of fittings to be used shall be determined by the Company Representative. Generally ironmongery shall be in packs. Ironmongeries pack and typical requirements are detailed in Appendix J of this document.
2.9
Staircases and Platforms All stairs shall be designed and located to meet the requirements of the Royal Oman Police for means of escape in the case of fire. All doors shall open in the direction of the escape route and be positioned so as not to block any stairway. For steel stairs the minimum width of stairway, walkway & platforms shall not be less than 750mm. Stair treads shall not be made GRP or aluminium and shall be hot-dip galvanised steel. On platforms, the distance to a stair or ladder shall not be more than 25m. The Concrete platforms in front of equipment doors shall be calculated to be able to bear the equipment that will be transported through the doors.
SP-1275
Page 41
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
No stairway shall exceed sixteen risers in any one flight, if more are necessary a landing shall be provided. 2.9.1
Flow Capacities of Staircases For fire safety purposes (fire escapes) a flow capacity of 1.3 persons per second per metre width shall be used. This is greater than normal use flow capacity which, shall be determined as shown in Table 14 below: Table 14: Normal Use Staircase Flow Capacities Free Flow Mean Plan Density <0.6 persons/m2 Speed along Slope (m/s)
Limit of stair capacity with free flow (persons/min/m/width)
0.9
2.9.2
27
Full Design Capacity 1-way Plan Density 2 persons/m2 Speed along Slope (m/s) 0.6
Stair capacity (persons/min/m/width) 60
Riser / Going Relationship The following formula shall be used to determine the suitable relationship of riser to going for normal staircases: 2 R + G = 550 TO 700 mm, Where: R= Riser & G = Going Refer Table 15 for the stairs dimensions, headroom clearances, travelling distances and other requirements.
June 2004
Page 42
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 15: Dimensions For Staircases Office Type Building
Dimensions in mm
Domestic Serving for 1 Dwelling
Domestic Serving >1 Dwellings
Industrial
Office/ Domestic Fire Escape
Industrial Fire Escape
(max.)
180
210
180
210
180
210
(min.)
75
75
75
75
75
75
(max.)
310
280
310
280
310
280
(min.)
280
240
280
240
280
240
(min.)
2100
2100
2100
2100
2100
2100
Minimum clearance (*) perpendicular to flight.
1650
1650
1650
1650
1650
1650
Height of handrail above front of treads
900
900
900
900
900
900
Height of handrail above landing
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
1100
Riser
Going
Headroom
(Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 43
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 15: Dimensions For Staircases (contd.) Office Type Building
Domestic Serving for 1 Dwelling
Max. number of risers in flight
12
16
12
Length of landings (+)
900
900
1100
Dimensions in mm
Domestic Serving >1 Dwellings
Industrial Fire Escape
16
12
16
900
1100
900
Maximum travel distance along fire escape route (Escape possible in one direction only)
30 m
30 m
30 m
30 m
30 m
30 m
Maximum travel distance along fire escape route (Escape possible in more than one direction)
46 m
46 m
46 m
46 m
46 m
46 m
*
Minimum clearance above flights between: a. Line drawn through nosings; and, b. Ceiling at edge of stairwell
+
June 2004
Office/ Domestic Fire Escape
Industrial
Length of landing shall not be less than width of staircase relevant to location of stairs.
Page 44
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.9.3
Version 1.0
Fire Rating for Structures The minimum fire rating values of the building for various purposes and types are indicated in the Table 16, however these shall meet the requirements of the latest Royal Oman Police regulations. Table 16: Guide To Fire Ratings For Various Structures Minimum Period (h) for Elements of Structure
Maximum Dimensions Purpose, Group &Type of Building
Office – Single storey building or separated part (no basement)
Building or separated part which is not single storey
Shop – Single storey building or separated part (no basement)
Height (m) of Building or of Separated Part
Floor Area (m2)
Cubic (m3) Capacity
Ground or Upper Storey
Basement Storey (incl. Floor Over)
no limit
3000
no limit
0.5
not applicable
no limit
no limit
no limit
1.0
not applicable
7.5
250
no limit
0.5*
1.0
7.5
500
no limit
0.5*
1.0
15.0
no limit
3500
1.0**
1.0
28.0
500
14000
1.0
1.5
no limit
no limit
no limit
1.5
2.0
no limit
2000
no limit
0.5*
not applicable
no limit
3000
no limit
1.0
not applicable
no limit
no limit
no limit
23.0
not applicable (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 45
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 16: Guide to Fire Ratings for various structures (Contd.) Maximum Dimensions Purpose, Group & Type of Building
Building separated part which is not single storey
Building separated part which is not single storey
Industrial single storey building or separated part (no basement)
Minimum Period (h) for Elements of Structure
Height (m) of Building or of Separated Part
Floor Area (m2)
Cubic (m3) Capacity
Ground or Upper Storey
Basement Storey (incl. Floor Over)
7.5
150
no limit
0.5*
1.0
7.5
500
no limit
0.5*
1.0
15.0
no limit
3500
1.0**
1.0
28.0
1000
7000
1.0**
2.0
no limit
2000
7000
2.0
4.0
7.5
150
no limit
0.5*
1.0
7.5
500
no limit
0.5*
1.0
15.0
no limit
3500
1.0**
1.0
28.0
1000
7000
1.0
2.0
No limits
4000
14000
2.0
4.0
no limit
2000
no limit
0.5*
not applicable
no limit
3000
no limit
1.0
not applicable
no limit
no limit
no limit
2.0
not applicable (Contd.)
June 2004
Page 46
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 16: Guide to Fire Ratings for various structures (Contd.) Minimum Period (h) for Elements of Structure
Maximum Dimensions Purpose, Group & Type of Building
Building separated part which is not single storey
Other non-residential single storey building or separated part (no basement)
Height (m) of Building or of Separated Part
Floor Area (m2)
Cubic (m3) Capacity
Ground or Upper Storey
Basement Storey (incl. Floor Over)
7.5
250
no limit
0.5*
1.0
7.5
no limit
1700
0.5*
1.0
15.0
no limit
4250
1.0**
1.0
28.0
no limit
8500
1.0
2.0
28.0
no limit
28000
2.0
4.0
no limit
2000
5500
2.0
4.0
no limit
500
no limit
0.5*
not applicable
no limit
1000
no limit
1.0
not applicable
no limit
3000
no limit
2.0
not applicable
no limit
no limit
no limit
4.0
not applicable (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 47
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 16: Guide to Fire Ratings for various structures (Contd.) Minimum Period (h) for Elements of Structure
Maximum Dimensions Purpose, Group & Type of Building
Height (m) of Building or of Separated Part
Floor Area (m2)
Cubic (m3) Capacity
Ground or Upper Storey
Basement Storey (incl. Floor Over)
7.5
150
no limit
0.5*
1.0
7.5
300
no limit
0.5
1.0
15.0
no limit
1700
1.0**
1.0
15.0
no limit
3500
1.0
2.0
28.0
no limit
7000
2.0
4.0
28.0
no limit
21000
4.0
4.0
over 28.0
1000
no limit
4.0
4.0
Building separated part which is not single storey
(Contd.)
June 2004
Page 48
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Modifications Any element of structure should have at least the minimum period needed for any other element structure, which it carries or supports (whether that other element is load bearing or not). *
Increased to 1 hour for separating walls. Reduced to 0.5 hour if the area of the basement is 50 m2 less.
**
Reduced to 0.5 hour for any floor (which is not also a compartment floor), but not for any part of floor, which contributes to the support of the building as a whole and not for any beam, which supports the floor.
Notes: 1. The floor area of each storey in the building or where the building is divided in compartments the floor area of each storey in the compartment of which the element structure forms part. 2. The cubic capacity of the building or where the building is divided into compartments cubic capacity of the compartment of which the structure forms part. 3. Where the building is fitted throughout with an automatic sprinkler system meeting relevant recommendations of BS 5306: Part 2.
SP-1275
Page 49
June 2004
Version 1.0
2.10
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Roofs Due consideration shall be given to the provision of access to roofs, where necessary for maintenance etc. In situations where required, a safe means of access shall be provided. Also waterproofing details in these instances shall be such that they will satisfactorily withstand the likely subsequent wear and tear.
2.10.1
Thermal Requirement Roofs should have a maximum ‘U’ value of 0.6 W/m2 0C. Insulation should be capable of withstanding rodent attack in situations where it may be exposed to the same. Roofs are subject to intense heat and thermal movement and waterproof membranes shall be adequately protected or detailed to withstand these conditions. It should be possible to inspect and repair the membrane periodically and consideration should be given to permanent access. Because of its exposure special care should be taken when specifying roof insulation for ‘Upside-Down’ roofs, in terms of required insulation characteristics, durability, water absorption and physical strength.
2.10.2
Water Discharge Rain is infrequent, but when it does occur it can be torrential, consequently, traditional gargoyles are the preferred method of rainwater disposal from flat roofs and should be employed. Careful consideration shall be given to the projection of gargoyles and to the ground treatment where rain water discharges. Gargoyles shall be provided with suitable drips to prevent water running down the face of the building causing unsightly stains. Gargoyles shall be sited away from doors, lights and where possible windows.
2.10.3
Flat Roofs Flat roofs should be promoted where possible. Pitched roofs, other than for warehouses/ workshops, are not permitted in the Muscat Area. The upside down flat roof has the added advantage that the roof insulation protects the waterproofing layer from both the intense heat and puncturing. Extremely careful detailing of such roofs is essential to ensure durability. Flat roofs shall be provided with a minimum fall of 1.80. Consideration shall be given to pre-cambering, particularly on long span roofs to prevent ponding. In any case ponding shall not occur. Parapets on flat roofs are a natural source of building defects, particularly when of block work construction. Parapets shall be carefully detailed to control thermal movement with control joints not exceeding the spacing in section 2.8.1.4. Parapets shall be securely fixed to the roof slab and shall be capable of resisting a minimum horizontal load, on access roofs, of 0.75 kN/m run at the top of the parapet which should be a minimum of 1.1 m above the roof covering. Flat roofs cast on load bearing block work should contain a slip plane between the block work and slab soffit to allow for thermal movement of the slab without distressing the block work. The roof slab, however, must be suitably held in place to ensure stability criteria are maintained.
June 2004
Page 50
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.10.4
Version 1.0
Pitched Roofs Pitched roofs shall be avoided wherever possible. As a general rule, only flat roof designs shall be used in the Muscat Area. Pitched roof designs may be considered in the Interior only if it needs to match existing pitched roofs, or used for warehouses/ workshops and sunshades. Pitched roofs in the Muscat Area have to be hidden by using appropriate facades. When used, pitched roof plan shapes shall be kept as simple as possible, hips and valleys should be avoided. The construction shall be such as to result in a completely waterproofed roof. Consideration shall be given to ridge vents in order to reduce internal design pressures arising from wind loading and where required to provide natural ventilation. Pitched roofs shall generally have a slope of 200. Gutters and downspouts shall only be provided over entrances and where people have to pass. However adequate details at ground level shall be provided to prevent erosion and percolation. Design of Sunshades and standard details are covered under a separate document: SP-1283 Specification for Standard Sunshades – ‘Design & Standard Drawings’.
2.10.5
Roof Sheeting It is important to fully specify the roof sheeting requirements on design drawings. The following minimum requirements shall be used: Galvanised Steel Sheeting shall: 1.
Be painted with a protective coating on both sides, with a minimum of 25 microns on the external face, and 12.5 microns for the internal face.
2.
Have a minimum thickness of the metal of 0.5 mm.
3.
Have a profile depth of not less than 26 mm.
4.
Not be used in severe marine areas (for example, MAF, RAH, etc.): this is also in line with the requirements of the Muscat Municipality.
5.
Be thoroughly inspected during erection and before acceptance, looking carefully how drilled holes and cut edges are finished off (ensure drill cuttings are not left as a deposit on the sheeting upon completion of the works).
6.
Be inspected on a yearly basis for deterioration, resulting in the sheets being washed down to remove salt deposits.
Aluminium Sheeting shall:
SP-1275
1.
Be painted with a minimum of 50 microns on the external face, and the internal face is painted or lacquered,
2.
Have a minimum thickness of the metal of 0.7 mm,
3.
Have a profile depth of not less than 26 mm,
Page 51
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
4.
Be inspected on a two yearly basis, resulting in the sheets being washed down to remove salt deposits,
5.
Be fixed with stainless steel self-tapping screws and isolated from the purlins with In-seal Tape.
In addition to the above two materials (but ignoring sheeting materials such as GRP/ GRE/ etc.), a third type of material may be used known as 55%AIZn Coated Steel Sheeting. This material has an ideal mix of 55% Aluminium, 43.4% Zinc and 1.6 Silicon. The material shall follow the same requirements as Galvanised Steel (see above), but can be used for Coastal Areas (MAF, RAH, etc.). There might be problems related to powder coating this material and therefore colour choices will be limited.
2.11
Built-in-Furniture All cupboards shall be fitted with shelving to maximise the use of the storage space. In the layout of kitchens particular attention shall be paid to safe distances between electric points and the sink. Kitchens shall be designed to be ergonomically and correctly related in the layout of the parts. In general, Broom cupboard – Fridge/Freezer – Worktop – Sink Worktop – Cooker Worktop. Worktop shall have integral up stands. Fitted wardrobes shall be provided in all bedrooms including SS rooms and Clinic wards. Where rooms are in use by two persons two wardrobes shall be provided. In each dwelling bathroom, and each room with bed(s) and basin, a bathroom cabinet shall be provided with mirror front, two sections, shaver point and light. Pin boards shall be provided to all: 1.
JS Messes – Entrance Halls, Billiards Rooms, Table Tennis Rooms, Dining Rooms.
2.
Offices.
3.
Squash viewing gallery.
To detached and semi-detached accommodation and mess block, curtain pelmets shall be provided. To outdoor cinemas, slatted hardwood seating shall be provided. To SS Mess firm bar with back display and storage shall be provided.
2.12
Security
2.12.1
Fencing and Gates All fencing and gates shall comply with the requirements of the Company standard specification SP-1279-P Specification for Civil & Building Construction – ‘Fencing & Gates’. The consultants drawing shall make reference to the fencing and gate types contained therein. Types of fences to be used in various locations are shown in Table 17:
June 2004
Page 52
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 17: Types of Fences Location
Type of Fence
Air Fields and Air Strips
D
Booster Station
B
Contractors Area – (Industrial)
C
Contractors Area – (Residential)
C
Corrosion Monitoring Pit
Barrier
Explosives Store
A
Farms
C
Flares – Ground
C
Flares – Tower
C
Garbage Dumps
C
Gas Plants (Double Fence)
A
Gathering Station
B
H2S Well
B
High Pressure Gas Well Heads
B
Interior Camps
B
Isotope Pit
A
Main Line Block Valve Station
B
Main Line Pump Station
A
Microwave Areas
B
Oil Tank Farm – Primary
B
Oil Tank Farm – Secondary
B
Oil Terminal & Metering Station (Double Fence)
A
Oxydation Ponds
C
Pig Launchers/ Catchers (when separate)
B
PDO Industrial Area – Camp Workshop
C (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 53
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 17: Types of Fences (contd.) Location
Type of Fence
PDO Industrial Area – Fire Station
C
PDO Industrial Area – Fire Training
C
PDO Industrial Area – Main Workshop
C
Power Station
B
Production Station
A
Reverse Osmosis Plant
C
Right of Way (only in Populous Areas)
Barrier
Sewage Treatment Plants
C
Sub Station
B
Supply Yard – Sub Station
B
Supply Yard – Surplus
B
Supply Yard – Scrap
B
Telecom Centres
A
Telecom Towers
B
Water Injection Area (when separate)
B
Well Test Module
B
In addition to the above requirements, a standard signboard (refer SP-1284 Specification for Signs & Signboards – ‘Standard Signs Catalogue’ shall be placed at the entrance of the fenced compound, indicating the presence of a ‘Restricted Area’ (refer CP-122). It should be noted that the rationale for installing fences and gates as tabled above, is as a direct result of having identified Specific HSE Site Hazards and/ or Specific Security related Access Control Requirements. The HSE Access Control Procedure (refer CP-122 and the documents referenced therein), Stipulates that the asset holder (as defined in the Corporate Asset Holder Register) is required to specify those areas, which need Access Control (based on what hazards and threats have been identified). It is possible therefore, that asset holders may decide to install fences/ gates in locations not included in the above table. Low Pressure Well Heads and Remote Manifolds do not require fencing. For details refer SP-1127 Plant Equipment & Layout Specification.
June 2004
Page 54
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.13
Version 1.0
Paint Finish & Colour Colours shall be to British Standard BS 4800. If specific colours are not requested or specified, the following colours should be used for: 08-B-15
:
Magnolia
10-B-15
:
Ivory
08-B-17
:
Wood Smoke
06-C-33
:
Honeysuckle
14-C-31
:
Light Green
00-E-55
:
White
For the non-specialised buildings, that is, accommodation, offices, exposed service pipes, for example water pipes, shall be painted to match their background colour. 2.13.1
External Surfaces All external walls should be 06-C-33 throughout (unless specified otherwise). All exposed drainage or vent pipes in front of the external wall shall be painted the same colour as the wall.
2.13.2
Internal Surfaces All Mess Dining Rooms, Games Rooms, Lounges, Billiards Rooms and TV/Video Rooms shall be 08-B-17 - Wood Smoke. All Clinic and Hospital Wards shall be 14-C-31 – Light Green. All Detached and Semi-detached Housing shall be 08-B-15 - Magnolia. Where the soffit of the ceiling is exposed (either exposed concrete or plastered ceilings) use 00-E-55. All other areas shall be 10-B-15 - Ivory. The type of paint finish shall be as described in Wall Finishes (Appendix D).
2.14
External Works External works shall be designed to suit the particular traffic, whether vehicular or pedestrian. Emphasis is to be placed on cost saving by, for example, minimising lengths of roads, paving only essential areas and providing a finished level, which will minimise earthworks and yet function to the technical requirements.
2.14.1
Site Preparation Site is to be inspected and general site clearance requirements established. Design is to include for removal of debris, vegetation and vegetable soil, removal or replanting plants, trees, bushes, etc. and protection measures for plants, trees and bushes where they are to remain within the project works.
SP-1275
Page 55
June 2004
Version 1.0
2.14.2
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Landscaping All projects involving landscaping should incorporate the current PDO landscaping specification SP-1279-Q. Particular attention should be paid to the creation of a localised microclimate with low, medium or high canopies as appropriate to the particular situation. For Landscaping Irrigation refer to section 2.17.8. 2.14.2.1 Hard Landscaping Hard landscaping should be designed with regard to considerations of general aesthetics. Within open spaces hard landscaping/foot paths etc. should be designed with curves, that is, straight lines should be avoided. An aesthetically pleasing variety of colour should be achieved in hard landscaping. 2.14.2.2 Soft Landscaping Soft Landscaping should be designed considering both the aesthetic aims and long term maintenance requirements. 2.14.2.3 Screening Requirements Consideration should be given to the need to reduce dust nuisance in amenity areas by landscaping in conjunction with other appropriate means, for example, fabric attached to fences.
2.14.3
Roads 2.14.3.1 Internal Access Road Where internal access roads are required to serve buildings, car-parking areas etc., the Consultant must clarify the likely range of vehicles that will be requiring access. Where the layout is designed for private vehicle usage, mountable kerbs should be provided where necessary to allow for occasional heavy vehicle passage. 1. Geometric Design: Typical desirable and minimum standards for internal access roads for both light and commercial vehicle usage are given in Table 18. It should however be borne in mind that the dimensional requirements may vary according to the actual size of commercial vehicle requiring access. Table 18: Typical Design Standards For Internal Access Roads Light Vehicle
Commercial Vehicle
Dimensions in metres Max.
Min.
Max.
Min.
Carriageway Width – 1 way
4.5
3.0
5.5
4.5
Carriageway Width – 2 way
6.0
4.5
7.0
6.0
Centre Line Radius
30.0
10.0
60.0
30.0
Kerb Radius at Junctions
6.0
4.0
15.0
10.0
Roadside Parking bay Width
June 2004
2.5
Page 56
3.5
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Roads are to be cambered or with cross fall at 1.5% and provided with adequate longitudinal gradient to ensure dispersal of storm water into the proposed drainage system. Care shall be taken in the design to avoid flat spots and consequent ponding of storm water. Care shall be taken to ensure adequate visibility sightlines particularly where buildings are located adjacent to junctions. 2. Pavement construction The pavement is to be constructed to suit the future loading over the specified design life. Where loadings are light, consideration should be given to designing a pavement of granular material sealed with surface dressing (e.g. “spray and chip”, SPP stabilised and sand sealed or slurry dressing). Where roads will be trafficked by commercial vehicles, the anticipated traffic loading should be predicted and the pavement designed in accordance with the procedure set out in the latest issue of the “Oman Highway Design Manual”, as well as what is advised in both SP1279-R & S (Specification for Civil & Building Construction – ‘Roads & Paving’, and ‘Graded Roads, Rig Locations, Airstrips, Tank Pads & Bund Works). 3. Road Signs & Markings: Road signs and markings should be minimised and yet give clear direction to drivers. Road signs should be of minimum 600mm size and be in accordance with SP-1284 Specification for Signs and Signboards – ‘Standard Signs Catalogue’. Road markings should be either thermoplastic or road marking paint to suit the scale of works. A mandatory warning sign is required below the danger warnings at all junctions of the Grades/Tarmac transition to give more information about the dangerous situation. 2.14.3.2 External Access Roads Where external access roads are required to serve a facility, the road must be designed to suit the initial level of service and yet allow for future upgrading if required. 1. Geometric Design Roads are to be designed to the geometric design standards set out in the latest issue of the “Oman Highway Design Manual”, using an appropriate design speed. Road surfaces are to be profiled to ensure rapid dispersal of storm water. 2. Pavement Construction Figure 4 details standard pavement construction for PDO interior roads, which will allow progressive development of the standard of road as required. These are further detailed in SP-1279-S Specification for Civil & Building Works – Graded Roads, Rig Locations, Airstrips, Tank Pads & Bund Works’. Roads, which are to be adopted by the Ministry of Communications, are to be constructed with asphaltic concrete overlying granular pavement layers. The pavement is to be designed in accordance with the latest issue of the “Oman Highway Design Manual”. Currently tests are being performed using road material stabilisers. Their performance in these tests might well promote the use of road stabilisers in the construction of both graded
SP-1275
Page 57
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
and paved roads. The road designer shall therefore investigate the status of these tests, and hence assess their suitability in the design of all roads. Successful road base stabilisation, say with SPP (Sulphonated Petroleum Product), could result in CBR of greater than 120, which will in turn allow cheaper road surface dressings to be used, such as Sand Seal and Slurry. However, the latter road seal thickness is only in the order of 6 to 8 mm, and therefore road surface finish tolerance (and therefore the road’s “riding comfort”) is likely to be poor. 3. Road Signs and Markings: Road signs and markings should be provided to suit the scale of the road and shall be in accordance with the latest issue of SP-1284 Specification for Signs and Signboards – Standard Signs Catalogue and the “Oman Highway Design Manual”. A mandatory warning sign is required below the danger warnings at all junctions of the Grades/Tarmac transition to give more information about the dangerous situation. 2.14.4
Car Parks Car parks should be provided on-site to cater for employees, operational needs and visitors typical car park spacing requirements are given in Table 19. Car parks shall be designed so as to discourage parking in the aisles and access routes. Where parking is designed for commercial vehicles, the standards to be applied are to suit the particular usage. 2.14.4.1 Standard Parking Layout Car parking facilities shall be generally designed to the layout standards shown in Figure 5. Parking bays are based on a 3 m x 6 m module. Where available space permits, parking areas should be designed for 900angle parking. Car parks shall be profiled to ensure dispersal of storm water to the proposed drainage system. 2.14.4.2 Car Parks Construction Car parks be surfaced with 80 mm thick interlocking block paving, asphaltic concrete or surface dressing as appropriate to the scale of construction and required aesthetics. Pavement construction is to be designed to cater for the relevant loading over the design period. Where the construction is in interlocking block work, use should be made of different colours to clearly distinguish between vehicle routes and parking areas. In general vehicles routes are to be paved with grey blocks and parking areas with charcoal grey blocks. Landscaping and street furniture should be set back from kerb lines to allow overhang of vehicles. 2.14.4.3 Road Signs & Markings Road signs and markings should be minimised and yet give clear direction to drivers. Where interlocking block work construction is proposed, use should be made of coloured blocks for markings and bay divisions. Road signs should be of minimum 600 mm size and in accordance with the latest issue of SP-1284 Specification for Signs & Signboards – ‘Standard Signs Catalogue’.
June 2004
Page 58
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Figure 4: Standard Pavement Construction for Interior Roads
(Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 59
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Figure 4: Standard Pavement Construction for Interior Roads (contd.)
(Contd.)
June 2004
Page 60
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Figure 4: Standard Pavement Construction for Interior Roads (contd.)
(Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 61
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Figure 4: Standard Pavement Construction for Interior Roads (contd.)
June 2004
Page 62
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 19: Typical Car-parking provision Parking Spaces Facility
On Site
Off Site
500 – 900 m2
2
1
200 – 400 m2
1
1
Flats/ Town Houses
1
0.5
Kindergarten
14
12
Elementary
16 – 38
24 – 96
Preparatory
23 – 54
22 – 86
Secondary
200 - 375
38 – 77
Hospital (40 bed)
44
0
Clinic (18 bed)
20
0
Social and Cultural
Social Centres
20
30
Offices
All Centres
1/50 m2 (1)
1/50 m2 (1)
Retail
Camp Shops
1/30 m2 (1)
Other Centres
1/30 m2 (1)
Residential
Education
Health Care
Transport Services
SP-1275
Type
Facility Housing
Bus Station
0
20
Bus Terminus
0
40
Bus Garage
50
0
Page 63
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Figure 5: Standard Parking Layouts
(Contd.)
June 2004
Page 64
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Figure 5: Standard Parking Layouts (contd.)
SP-1275
Page 65
June 2004
Version 1.0
2.14.5
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Materials Storage Yards Material storage yards should be designed to suit the particular material to be stored. Where applicable, the following are to be included: -
Storage areas for perishable goods and non-perishable goods.
-
Lay down areas for perishable goods and non-perishable goods.
-
Shake out and sorting out areas.
-
Surplus material store.
-
Area for scrap material.
-
Dedicated facilities for receipt and despatch.
Particular attention must be made for access and manoeuvre of forklifts and delivery vehicles. 2.14.6
Footpaths Footpaths are to be provided, where required, to clearly define pedestrian routes. Analysis is to be carried out of the desirable walkway routes, bearing in mind that pedestrians tend to try to minimise the distance walked. 2.14.6.1 Footpath Dimensions Footpaths are to generally 2 m wide. This may be reduced to 1.5 m minimum where layouts and volume of pedestrian traffic permits. 2.14.6.2 Footpath Construction Footpath are generally to be surfaced with 60 mm coloured interlocking block work or pre cast concrete slabs overlying sand laying course and granular base material. Footpaths are to be bound by kerbs.
2.14.7
Well Location and Flow/Bulk Line Layout In principle, all costs associated with access to wells and routing of flow lines to the Gathering Station, shall be kept to a minimum. The simplified sketch, shown below (Figure 6), shows how the above may be achieved. Here, the access field roads enter the field from one side, whilst the services to the wells, as well as the flow lines and/or bulk lines, enter/exit from the other side of the field. By doing so, the number of road crossing is kept to a minimum (in this example only one road crossing is required), allowing all power cables to be routed under roads.
June 2004
Page 66
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Figure 6: Concept Layout Of Wells, Drilling Locations Flow/Bulk Lines Using Min. Road Crossing
SP-1275
Page 67
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.14.7.1 Piping Corridors Design of piping corridors shall take account of:-
2.15
-
Manifolds flow lines into bulk lines, located off-centre.
-
Potential use of multi port selector valves,
-
Expansion loops and pipe support loads/overturning effects,
-
Future possibility of infill wells, and therefore access to them,
-
Access to wells, to services, to flow lines and bulk lines,
-
Power/signal distribution, located off-centre.
-
Well platform location and orientation, and rig access.
Building Services Design Requirements Building services design criteria shall be established in consultation with the Company. Designs shall be fit for purpose and requirements for economy, reliability, maintainability, flexibility and life expectancy shall be agreed with the company. The requirements here described shall apply to the following Sections of this documents. 2.16: Air Conditioning & Ventilation 2.17: Plumbing 2.18: Sewage Treatment 2.19: Electrical One set of the final approved design calculation shall be submitted to the Company for the record purpose.
2.15.1
Manufacturers & Vendors Material and equipment shall be selected from the latest PGSC (Product Group Service Codes) list. .As stipulated, Type A materials, shall be identified by duty and specification only, not by the manufacturer. In the selection of materials and equipment, building services designs shall show a preference for the use of local, and GCC, manufacturers.
2.15.2
Specification & Drawings Building services designs should take the following form. -
Company Standard Specifications
-
Project Particular Specification
-
Equipment Schedules
-
System Schematics & Isometrics
-
Control Logic & Line Diagrams
June 2004
Page 68
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.15.3
-
Electrical Line Diagrams
-
Wiring Diagrams
-
External Layout Drawings, Scale 1:200 or 1:100
-
Internal Layout Drawings, Scale 1:50
-
Equipment Area Drawings, Scale 1:20
-
Details drawings, Scale 1:10
-
The maximum drawing size shall be A1.
Version 1.0
As Built Drawings Building services design should normally include updating the drawings to “As Built”.
2.15.4
External Services External services include the services of water, electricity, sewerage, telecommunications, fire alarm, fire protection and irrigation. Chilled water service may also be included. External service design should include the allocation of rights of way. Wherever possible services should be routed in common services trenches located in unpaved areas. Minimum dimensions for depths of cover and for separation between services are shown on company Standard Drawings STD-2-1404.
2.16
Air-Conditioning & Ventilation The Building Services design shall include, but not be limited to, overall scheme design, sizing of equipment and pipe work and coordination with other service. Loads should be calculated using ASHRAE, Carrier or CIBSE methods. District chilled water service installations should comprise buried mains served from a chiller compound suitably located to reduce the environmental impact, particularly noise, on adjacent buildings. The chiller compound pump room may be combined with an electrical substation in one building. Allowance should be made for future expansion of district chilled water schemes, and this should be done with minimal costs. For schemes with a high probability of future expansion, ring main chilled water distribution be provided, with secondary chilled water pumps at each building. For other schemes, radial distribution may be appropriate. In any case, the logistic and limits of future expansion should be established and agreed with the Company. The interface with the electrical design shall be established with the Company as described in section 2.19. The Air-Conditioning & Ventilation system, materials and Equipments shall comply with the SP-1285-B Specification for Civil & Buildings Utility Services – ‘Air Conditioning Works’.
SP-1275
Page 69
June 2004
Version 1.0
2.16.1
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Design Criteria for Air Conditioning & Ventilation Works 2.16.1.1 Outdoor Conditions Design outdoor conditions should be based on relevant meteorological data for each project area and shall be subject to Company approval. In the absence of definitive data, the figures given in Table 20 should be used. Table 20: Outdoor Air conditioning Design Criteria. Location
Summer
Winter
Coastal Oman
44/33 0C DB/WB
18/15 0C DB/WB
North Oman
50/30 0C DB/WB
13/11 0C DB/WB
South Oman
47/32 0C DB/WB
12/10 0C DB/WB
2.16.1.2 Indoor Conditions Appendix K includes the following criteria relating to the majority of company facilities. -
Room temperature
-
Room humidity
-
Minimum fresh air
-
Minimum air change
-
Maximum noise rating
Where criteria are not listed in Appendix K, design indoor conditions should be based on the CIBSE Guide, Section A1, Environmental Criteria for Design, and shall be subject to Company approval. Normally, humidity control should not be necessary. However, the critical psychometrics of each design should be checked to ensure that reasonable comfort conditions are always achieved. 2.16.1.3 Equipment Overcapacity With diversity and standby requirements taken into account, air-conditioning equipment should be sized to have a minimum overcapacity of 15%. 2.16.2
Chilled Water 2.16.2.1 Chiller compounds & Equipment Water chillers shall be outdoor, package units located within a secure enclosure. An access gate shall be provided for each chiller and external lighting shall be provided for maintenance purposes.
June 2004
Page 70
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
An air-conditioned pump room should be provided to house the following equipment. -
Primary chilled water pumps
-
Motor control panel
-
Pressurisation unit
-
Water treatment unit
-
Lighting and small power distribution board
Pipe work and cables between chillers and pump room should be directly buried. 2.16.2.2 Controls In the selection of water chillers, proper account shall be taken of low load operation. In any case, chillers should be capable of running at 25% full load or less. One primary pump should be provided to run with each chiller, with one additional pump as standby. Selector control should be provided for both chillers and pumps so that any pump may be selected to run with any chiller. The lead pump should also act as jockey pump in the event that no chiller is required to run. 2.16.2.3 Pipe work Pipe work should be set out to facilitate draining down at low points and automatic venting at high points. Provisions shall be made to allow the flushing of the complete chilled water circuit. Water treatment shall include a pre-commissioning descaler, anticorrosion dosing and an algae inhibitor. Chilled water systems should normally be pressurised to 1 bar(g). 2.16.3
Specialist Areas 2.16.3.1 Battery rooms The design of battery room ventilation system shall fully comply with the requirements of DIN 57510/VDE 0510. Battery systems considered here are as follows. Nickel Cadmium
Lead Acid
Trickle charge
1.4 – 1.45 volts/cell
Boost charge
1.6 – 1.65 volts/cell
Trickle charge
2.23 volts/cell
Boost charge
2.4 volts/cell
All cells in which the electrolyte is in aqueous solution give off hydrogen and oxygen during charging, the major gassing occurring towards the end of the charging or during boost charging. Typical boost charging cycles are for 8 hours every 6 months. An explosive mixture is formed when the hydrogen concentration, by volume, in air exceeds 3.8%.
SP-1275
Page 71
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
A safe dilution (20% of the above) will be maintained using the following formula.
Q = 0.055 x N x I Where, Q = Airflow in m3/h N = Number of battery cells. (Number of blocks x cells/block) I = Charging current at the end of the boost charge, in amps (For design purposes, 25% rated charger current in amps) Battery rooms should be airconditioned to maintain an average room temperature of 10 – 300C, to give best battery performance and service life, and to limit electrolyte temperature rises during charging. Inlet air should be introduced at low level, from the building airconditioning system, and mechanically exhausted to atmosphere at as high a level as possible, to avoid air pockets. When ventilation is provided as described above, then the battery room shall be classified as non-hazardous. However, due to possible local concentrations of gas, the exhaust fan should be suitable for a Zone 2 installation and resistant to the electrolyte. 2.16.3.2 Electrical Substations & Switch Houses Substations and switch houses should normally be designed as completely closed structures, with dust tight construction and cable passages. The air conditioning design shall include two or more separate installations, which shall be individually electrically supplied and controlled. The indoor design criteria shall be such that: During normal operation, the maximum indoor temperature shall not rise above 350C DB. In the case of breakdown or maintenance to one of the installations, the maximum indoor temperature shall not rise above 400C DB. The maximum supply air relative humidity shall not exceed 90%. 2.16.3.3 Gas Bottle Stores Spare and empty gas bottles shall be separated and stored in an upright-chained position and housed in a purpose built, well ventilated, shaded and secured enclosure located at least 20 m from combustible materials. Possible air pockets at high level shall be avoided. Requirements are normally satisfied by the provisions of a cage of tubular frame, chain link fencing and roof sheeting with an internal separation. Electrical installations in gas bottle stores shall be suitable for Zone 2.
June 2004
Page 72
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
2.16.3.4 Kitchens The guidelines given below address commercial catering installations, criteria for domestic kitchens are given in Appendix K. Often it is not possible to achieve comfort conditions in kitchen cooking areas at all times because of the extremely high expenditure involved. In such cases, it should be sufficient to maintain acceptable working conditions. Generally air should be extracted from cooking and subsidiary areas through double-skin hoods located over the main cooking and dishwashing equipment. Hoods should be sized to overlap equipment by 100 mm, to have a minimum face velocity of 0.3 m/s and to have a minimum clearance of 1900 mm above finished floor level. The hood volume should suit the equipment covered. 80 – 85% of the replacement air should be provided, as filtered outside air, at the internal perimeter of the hood. If this part of the replacement air is supplied outside the hood, it should be 100% outside air-cooled to plenum conditions, say 250C. Ducted, re-circulating systems should not be used because of greasing problems. The remainder of the replacement air should be drawn from adjacent areas so that a negative kitchen pressure is maintained to contain odours. Extract ductwork shall be designed for ease of cleaning, with flanged joints and man-size access doors, and shall be constructed of galvanised sheet steel, minimum thickness, 1.0 mm. Air velocities should be a minimum of 9 m/s. Extract fans should be treated for moisture and heat, and attenuators should be avoided. Comfort air conditioning should be provided by high level fan coil units. The requirements for fire detection and protection in kitchens are included in SP-1075 Specification for Fire & Explosion Risk Management. 2.16.3.5 Laboratories Laboratory air conditioning design shall be based on the specific requirements of the laboratory work. However, the following guidelines should apply. Laboratory working and solvent storage areas should be provided with an 100% outside air system, and should be under positive pressure to reduce dust ingress. In interior Oman, heating should be included for winter morning start up. Ancillary areas, such as offices, should be provided with separate, re-circulating systems such as fan coil units. Mechanical exhaust should be provided for chemical and material storage areas, typically at a rate of 6 – 15 air changes an hour, depending on the items stored. Fume cupboards for use with hydrocarbons should have an acid resistant 18/12 stainless steel internal fume chamber with integral bench top. The minimum air velocity over a 400 mm deep sash opening should be 0.75 m/s. Fume cupboards for general use should have 1 mm thick high-pressure plastic laminate on the sides and solid epoxy resin bench tops. The minimum air velocity over a 400 mm deep sash opening should be 0.5 m/s. All fume cupboards should be provided with airfoil sash opening profiles and high-level bypass grilles to ensure constant volume airstreams. Fume cupboard exhaust ductwork shall be constructed of HDPE and shall not contain fire dampers. The internal fume chamber, exhaust ducting and exhaust fan shall be classified as Zone 1 hazard. The internal light fittings therefore shall be separated from the fume chamber by an airtight glass plate. Solvent and gas bottle stores shall be classified Zone 2. SP-1275
Page 73
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.16.3.6 Temporary Buildings Air conditioning design parameters for temporary buildings, such as transportable units, should be similar to those for permanent buildings. However, due to inferior thermal storage characteristics, electric heating may be required. 2.16.4
Condensate Drains Condensate drains from indoor terminal units should discharge to wash hand basins, or sinks, before the trap to ensure that the connection to the drainage system is always sealed. While drains may discharge into planter areas, the use of soakaways should be avoided.
2.16.5
Refrigerant Pipe work Pipe work shall not be directly buried, nor chased in floors or walls, but shall be enclosed in preformed ducts or voids.
2.16.6
Automatic Shutdown Activation of a fire alarm shall cause the shutdown of air conditioning system, unless continued operation of the system does not cause spread of smoke to outside the area where the fire has been detected.
2.16.7
Legionnaires Disease Where installations include evaporate water-cooling, the guidelines of CIBSE TM 13, minimising the Risk of Legionnaires Disease, shall be followed. Particular attention is drawn to the optimum temperature for multiplication of bacteria and to the design, operation and maintenance of evaporative water-cooling systems.
2.17
Plumbing Plumbing installation design includes the following services: -
Potable water,
-
Domestic hot and cold water,
-
Drainage,
-
Liquid petroleum gas,
-
Laboratory piped services,
-
Fire fighting water,
-
Swimming pools,
-
Irrigation.
Plumbing installation, materials and equipment shall comply with the following specifications: SP-1285-C Specification for Civil & Buildings Utility Services - ‘Plumbing Works’ SP-1285-D Specification for Civil & Buildings Utility Services – ‘Fire Protection Works’ SP-1280 Specification for Swimming Pools - ‘Design & Construction Guidelines’
June 2004
Page 74
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.17.1
Version 1.0
Potable Water Normally, the primary source of potable water will be provided by the Company, which will be by outside the scope of the Building Services Project. The demand, size, location and interface for the potable water main connection(s) should be established with the Company at preliminary design stage. Connection to existing potable water mains shall require prior Company approval. The valve and meter may be supplied and installed, and the service connection made, by the Company. The following Company Standard Drawings relate to water supply systems. STD-2-1401: Typical Potable Water Details 2.17.1.1 Water Demand Demand will vary with time, location and population. Average and peak consumption figures should be subject to individual analysis for each system. However, in the absence of definitive data, the figures in Table 21 should be used for average demands: Table 21: Typical Water Demands Area
Water Demand
Coast Residential
400 litre / day / person
Offices
180 litre / day / person
Industrial
As advised by the Company
Interior Residential
450 litre / day / person
Offices
180 litre / day / person
Industrial
As advised by the Company
Similarly, peak demands may be taken as 5 times of the average. 2.17.1.2 Isolating Valves, Air Valves, Washouts Isolating valves shall be located at:
SP-1275
-
Major intersections,
-
Branches off ring mains,
-
Regular intervals on distribution mains shall be 400 m maximum spacing.
Page 75
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Valve chambers should be located in areas with easy access but not subject to heavy traffic. Pipelines shall have facilities for venting air, flushing and cleaning. In secondary distribution networks, air may be vented through building connections. In pipelines of 300 mm dia or greater, air valves and washouts should be provided at high and low points respectively. 2.17.1.3 Water Meters Water meters shall be provided for each large user, down to and including all Senior Staff accommodation (married and bachelor), and on the main transmission line for each distribution network. Meters should be fitted above ground at building entries, or in valve chambers below ground. 2.17.1.4 Storage The capacity and location of main storage tanks should be agreed with the Company. In general, not less than 24 hours storage should be provided in any distribution system, but this will depend on the source and location of the water supply. Main water tanks should be provided with visual level indicators, access ladders, access manholes, (with adequate provision for safety and lighting) etc. Inlet and overflows should be close to access points for maintenance purposes. 2.17.1.5 Pumping Pump sets should be designed to meet forecast peak demands. Constant pressure systems, with run and standby facility, are preferred. 2.17.1.6 Sterilisation Potable water systems shall be completely flushed out and sterilised, to the approval of the Company, before being put into service. Details of the sterilisation process are given in SP-1285-C Specification for Civil & Buildings Utility Services – Plumbing Works. 2.17.2 Domestic Hot & Cold Water Design of HWS/CWS systems shall comply with the requirements of BS 6700: Specification for Design, Installation, Testing & Maintenance of Services Supplying Water for Domestic Use within Buildings & their Cartilages. 2.17.2.1 Water Consumption While published data may be used as guidelines, estimated consumption of water should be based on specific use as well as numbers of consumers and fittings. For example, for Staff Accommodation Blocks in the Interior, peak demand for HWS is for showers at the end of shifts.
June 2004
Page 76
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Water heater sizes should therefore be based on the following. Shower demand
:
say 0.1 l/s/shower
Shower duration
:
say 180 sec
:
say 75%
Number of showers Diversity
Section 2.17.1.1 gives typical per capita water demands for different applications. 2.17.2.2 Water Systems Systems should be designed for supply directly from the potable water main unless there is a specific requirement for storage. In any case, drinking water draw offs shall be taken directly from the main. HWS/CWS systems shall be vented at all high points and provision for drain-down shall be provided at all low points. Treated effluent water may be used to flush toilet in order to conserve water. In such situation, a separate close system shall be designed to tap from nearest irrigation source. Refer also 2.17.8. 2.17.2.3 Isolation The incoming main shall be provided with a stop valve and a drain cock, preferably located immediately inside the building. The stop valve may be located in a valve chamber adjacent to the building. Connections to sanitary ware, or equipment, should be provided with a means of isolation. However, in some applications, and subject to Company approval, it may be sufficient to isolate in sections rather than individually. 2.17.2.4 Insulation HWS/CWS pipe work exposed to ambient conditions, concealed in ducts and in false ceiling voids, and in equipment rooms shall be insulated. Pipe work buried in wall and floor chases shall be protected. Surface mounted connections to equipment and fittings shall not be insulated but should be painted. 2.17.2.5 Sterilisation HWS/CWS systems shall be completely flushed out and sterilised, to the approval of the Company, before being put into service (see section 2.17.1.6). 2.17.2.6 Flush Control Valves All urinal cisterns, and other automatically flushed devices, shall be fitted with a flush control valve to limit the waste of water. Control should be by provision of push button flush pipe valves or may be by cistern cold feed control valves.
SP-1275
Page 77
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.17.2.7 Water Closet spray Assemblies Spray assemblies shall be provided for all AWC’s, and for EWCs in public toilets, located on the right hand side of the pan. 2.17.2.8 Emergency Showers Emergency showers shall be capable of delivering water at a minimum rate of 80 1/min at a pressure of 0.3 bar(g). Water to showers should be taken, by a dedicated gravity feed, from a cold water storage tank. However, if insufficient head is available or the water temperature may exceed 35 0C, then a connection should be taken directly off the incoming main, immediately after the main stop valve. 2.17.2.9 Emergency Eye Wash Stations Eye wash stations shall be self-contained units, mounted on wall brackets, located within 10 sec or 30 m of the hazard and such that the water temperature shall not exceed 40 0C. Units shall flush both eyes simultaneously and deliver not less than 1.5 1/min. 2.17.2.10 Hot Water Service Dead legs HWS deadlegs shall not exceed the lengths listed in Table 22. When dead legs do exceed these length secondary HWS pumps shall be installed. Table 22: Maximum HWS Dead legs Pipe Size
2.17.3
Max Length
15 mm
12 m
22 mm
8m
28 mm
3m
Drainage Design of above ground drainage systems shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 12056 ‘Gravity Drainage Systems inside buildings’
2.17.4
Sewerage This section covers domestic sewage systems that discharge into treatment plants. Sewage treatment is addressed in section 2.18 of this specification. Systems handling industrial, non-biodegradable, waste shall be designed in consultation with the Company. Storm water drainage shall not discharge into sewage systems. Systems should be designed in accordance with BS EN 752 Drain & Sewer Systems Outside buildings and the following Company Standard Drawing STD-2-1030 Typical Manhole Details.
June 2004
Page 78
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
2.17.4.1 Flow Rates Rates of sewage flow vary with time, location and population. Average and peak flow rates should be subject to individual analysis for each system. However, in the absence of definitive data, the figures in Table 23 should be used for average dry weather flows (DWF): Table 23: Typical Sewage Flow Rates Area
Water Demand
Coast Residential
350 litre / day / person
Offices
160 litre / day / person
Interior Residential
400 litre / day / person
Offices
160 litre / day / person
Similarly, in the absence of definitive data, peak flows may be taken as 3 times DWF. 2.17.4.2 Minimum Pipe Diameters Below slab on grade, short runs
:
50 mm
Below slab on grade, main runs
:
110 mm
Building connections
:
110 mm
Between manholes
:
60 mm
2.17.4.3 Location of Manholes Manholes shall be provided at all changes of direction and at all junctions. For straight runs of pipe work, the maximum distance between manholes shall be 45 m. 2.17.4.4 Interceptors Grease traps shall be provided at connections from catering installations and should be located indoors. The use of enzyme dosing shall be considered during design. Petrol/oil interceptors shall be provided at connections from vehicle workshop and fuel stations. 2.17.4.5 Pipe work Under Buildings The placing of drainage pipe work under buildings shall be avoided wherever possible. Where unavoidable, pipes shall be laid in straight lines at one gradient. Access shall be provided to all parts of the drain and flexible joints used at entry and exit to/from the building.
SP-1275
Page 79
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.17.4.6 Structural Penetrations Pipework passing through retaining walls, footings, ground beams etc., shall be sleeved, with the same material, and packed with polystyrene or similar. Flexible joints shall be provided at exits from buildings. 2.17.4.7 Connection to Existing Sewers Connection to existing sewerage systems shall require prior company approval. 2.17.4.8 Sewage Pumping Stations Pumping of sewage should be avoided where possible since, in addition to the extra cost, it also forms the weakest link in the operation of a sewage system. While the sewage pumping station design must take account of peak flows, the emphasis on sizing pumps and the sump together with the levels of the flow switches should be on keeping the sewage flowing so that potential problems of septicity in the sump and hydraulic shock at the treatment plant are avoided. A typical flow rate would be 4 times DWF. 2.17.5
Liquid Petroleum Gas Design of LPG systems should follow the recommendations of the following BS Standards: -
BS 5482: Code of Practice for Domestic Butane and Propane Gas Burning Installations &
-
BS EN ISO 10239 Small Craft Liquefied Petroleum Gas systems.
2.17.5.1 Gas Cylinder Stores Refer section.2.16.3.3. 2.17.5.2 Regulators For catering installations, primary regulators should be provided at bottle manifold discharge to give a gas pressure of approximately 350 mb with all appliances operating at maximum demand. Secondary regulators should normally be supplied with each appliance, be fitted after the appliance isolating valve, be adjustable, and be capable of reducing the gas pressure from approximately 345 mb to the appliance operating pressure at maximum demand. 2.17.5.3 Emergency Shutdown For catering and industrial systems, an emergency shut-off fire valve, normally of the deadweight type, shall be provided in the main supply, upstream of the high-pressure regulator(s). The valve should be operated manually, from exits, and automatically by the fire detection system. Cable or electrically activated systems may be used. Electrically operated actuators shall be suitable for hazard Zone 1. The following are accepted temperature ratings for deadweight gas valve fusible links.
June 2004
Inside hoods
:
185 0C
Elsewhere
:
160 0C
Page 80
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
2.17.5.4 Domestic Installations Domestic LPG installations shall be carried out strictly in accordance with Company Standard Drawing PDO-STD-2-1403. 2.17.6
Laboratory Piped Services Design of laboratory service should follow the BS 3202: Laboratory furniture & Fittings. 2.17.6.1 Pipe work All main distribution pipe work supplying laboratories should be exposed, wall or ceiling mounted. Branches to fume cupboards, hoods and benches shall be provided with stop valves within easy reach. Individual ranges of pipe work may be concealed in service ducts, but should be separated from electrical services. Flammable gas pipe work shall be accessible over the full length. Exposed laboratory fittings should be chrome plate or plastic coat finish. 2.17.6.2 Hot and Cold Water Refer section 2.17.2 of this specification. 2.17.6.3 Distilled Water In small laboratories, distilled water should be provided in bottles. In large laboratories, a piped system, with an outlet in each laboratory room, may be appropriate. The use of demineralised water from plant utilities may also be appropriate, in which case an ion exchange unit may be required. 2.17.6.4 Compressed Air Dry and oil free compressed air shall be supplied from a compressor located in separate equipment room of the laboratory. The compressor should be rated against 7 bar(g) and the system should include a refrigerated air dryer, a pressure relief valve, regulators, filters and pressure gauges. Distribution should be by ring main, laid to fall with drain points. 2.17.6.5 Vacuum The vacuum pump shall be located as directed by the Laboratory custodian. Unless directed otherwise, the pump should be rated at 1.9 kPa(a). A buffer vessel and/or liquid catcher shall be provided between pump and suction point. 2.17.6.6 Special Gases Typical special gases to laboratory areas are listed in Table 24, which includes hazard categories and typical off-take pressures. Butane and Propane and system guidelines are given in section 2.17.5. Gas cylinders shall be stored in a purpose-built compound, located in an area free from fire risk and away from sources of heat or ignition, which shall be well ventilated, preferably by natural means, and protected from direct sunlight and rain by a sloped canopy without air pockets. Full and empty cylinders shall be stored separately. Inert, flammable and oxidising gas cylinders shall be segregated.
SP-1275
Page 81
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Oxidising gas cylinders shall be separated from flammable gas cylinders by a minimum distance of 7 m or by a 1 hr fire barrier. Gas cylinders shall be stored in special racks.
Table 24: Special Gases Gas
Category
Pressure
Acetylene
Flammable
1.5 bar max
Butane
Flammable
0.025 bar
Carbon dioxide
Inert
3 bar
Helium
Inert
3 bar
Hydrogen
Oxidising
3 bar
LP Nitrogen
Inert
3 bar
HP Nitrogen
Inert
67 bar
Nitrous Oxide
Oxidising
3 bar
Propane
Flammable
0.025 bar
Oxygen
Oxidising
3 bar
A manifold set shall be provided complete with isolating valves, regulators and safety valves which shall discharge to open air. Changeover should be manual with an electrically operated alarm cabinet to give remote warning of cylinder exhaustion. Electrical supply emergency shut down (ESD) switches shall be provided at each laboratory room exit. ESD shall be provided for flammable gasses, activated either by gas ESD switches and/or by the fire alarms. Piping for flammable and for toxic gases shall include excess flow check valves. Acetylene, hydrogen and oxygen piping shall include a flashback arrestor. Acetylene piping shall be so positioned or protected so as not to be exposed to any source of heat. Hydrogen piping shall include flow-limiting devices, and switch off devices functioning when higher-pressure drops occur. 2.17.7
Fire Fighting Water Company fire fighting design parameters are set out in SP-1075 Specification for ‘Fire & Explosion Risk Management’. Brackish water should normally be considered too corrosive for use as fire fighting water in buildings. The Company standards for fresh water system materials and equipment shall comply with the following: SP-1285-D Specification for Civil & Buildings Utility Services – ‘Fire Protection Works’ and the Company Standard Drawing STD-2-1402: Typical Fire Water Details.
June 2004
Page 82
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
2.17.7.1 Hose reels Hose reels installations should be designed so that the whole of each floor area is protected, and no part of the area protected is more than 6 m from a hose nozzle, hose extended. Water supply should cater for a minimum of 3 hose reels operating at any time, with a total flow rate of 2.3 1/s, at a working pressure of 2.1 bars (g) at the furthest reel. The firewater installation should be an extension of the firewater mains. Where firewater mains are not available, connection may be made to the domestic water supply. In such cases, the connection shall be made before the incoming water main valve and be dedicated to the hose reel installations, and fitted with an isolation valve a lockable devise. In installations where the incoming main pipe work is UPVC, the service pipe work is copper, and the hose reel pipe work is GI, then the GI branch shall be from the UPVC before the change to copper. Office areas hose reels should be automatic, swinging, recess type with 25m of 19mm hose. Industrial area hose reels should be automatic, swing open, wall type with 30m of 25mm hose. 2.17.7.2 Hydrants Hydrants should be located in strategic positions around Company buildings, generally at 80 m spacing in industrial areas and 100 m spacing in residential areas, and should be installed a minimum of 15 m from any building, preferably in soft earth or paved areas rather than roadways. Hydrants should be sized to give 8.3 l/s at 6bar(g) from a 19 mm nozzle. 2.17.7.3 Fire Storage Tanks Tanks shall store water for both hydrant and hosereel supply, and should be sized to hold sufficent water to supply 3 fire fighting jets, 19 mm nozzles, at 8.3 l/s for 45 minutes, i.e. 67.5m3 minimum. Tanks used for combined storage shall have a dedicated firewater outlet, and a dedicated and secure firewater storage volume. Below ground storage, such as swimming pools, with suction hose hydrants may be appropriate. 2.17.7.4 Fire Pumps Package fire pump sets shall be sized to supply 41.5 l/s with a minimum 4 bar(g) pressure at the farthest hydrant. 2.17.8
Irrigation Treated effluent (TE) from sewage treatment plants should be used for the irrigation of Company community area soft landscaping. TE irrigation applications shall comply with the requirements of the Ministry of Regional Municipalities and Environment. For some applications, it may be necessary or desirable to use potable water (PW). It is therefore necessary to check directly with MRME Engineers on all such issues. In addition, irrigation for Company residences should be taken off the dwelling PW supply, after the water meter. In either case, the irrigation system demand should match the quality and quantity of water available. The irrigation system shall comply with SP-1285-C Specification for Civil & Buildings Utility Services – Plumbing Works & the following Company Standard Drawings STD-2-1400: Typical Irrigation Details & STD-2-1401: Typical Potable Water Details.
SP-1275
Page 83
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.17.8.1 Demand Irrigation water demands should be determined for individual schemes taking account evaporation rates, soil conditions, salinity and consequent leaching requirements and the method of irrigation. Table 25 sets out typical figures for the maximum water required for mature planting in the summer based on automatic or semi-automatic drip irrigation systems. Demands would increase markedly if non-automatic irrigation were employed during daylight hours when evaporation rates are very high. The figures given do not include for leaching. Further details of planting requirements are given in SP-1279-Q Specification for Civil & Building Construction – ‘Landscaping Works’. Table 25: Typical Irrigation Water Demands Plant Type
Irrigation demand
Large trees (25 m2 canopy)
80 litre/tree/day
Small trees (10 m2 canopy)
40 litre/tree/day
Shrubs
16 litre/shrub/day
Hedges
12 litre/m/day
Ground cover
16 litre/m2/day
Grass
10 litre/m2/day
2.17.8.2 System Components Typically, an irrigation system comprises the following components. System 1. Head works
Components :
Irrigation water storage Distribution pumps Filters Control panel
2. Primary Distribution
:
Ring mains Washouts Sub mains Pressure regulators Isolating valves (Contd.)
June 2004
Page 84
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
System
Version 1.0
Components (Contd.)
3. Secondary Distribution
:
Sub mains Zone control, valves Laterals Spray sprinklers Drip feed emitters
2.17.8.3 Storage TE should be held in storage tanks similar to what is described in section 2.17.1.4. For large TE irrigation systems, it may be preferable to provide more than one tank, strategically located. Tanks should be sized to hold two days demand. Storage tanks for TE shall be identifiable as not containing drinking water. Signage should be in Arabic and English and the tanks should be painted green (even if they are constructed of concrete). 2.17.8.4 Pumping & Filtration Systems should be designed to operate 8 h a day in two equal periods, morning and evening. A run and a standby pump and pressure vessel should be provided together with a stainless steel core filter with a fine-hole element. Pump power and auto-changeover control should normally be incorporated in a main Motor Control Panel such as that provided for a sewage treatment plant. Pump auto-start should be initiated by a relay in the Irrigation Control Panel described in section 2.17.8.5. 2.17.8.5 Control Systems External irrigation control systems should comprise electro-mechanical zoned control panels and zone solenoid valves. Controls for local small irrigation systems, such as those in Company residences, may comprise similar solenoid valves controlled by a local timer. Drip systems generally operate best under pressure of 1 to 3 bars. Pressure regulators, before the zone solenoid valves, may be required to maintain these limits. 2.17.8.6 Pipe work Identification TE irrigation water pipe work shall be pigmented green to distinguish from PW. 2.17.8.7 Sprinklers Since spray sprinklers normally require PW irrigation (refer section 2.17.8.), and incur higher evaporation losses compared with drip emitters, their use should be avoided where possible. However, sprinklers should be used for lawn irrigation since emitter systems often leave blemishes. 2.17.8.8 Emitter Allocations Table 26 sets out typical emitter allocations for different plants, designed to apply the quantities of water given in Table 25.
SP-1275
Page 85
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 26: Typical Emitter Allocations Plant type
2.17.9
No of Emitters
Size
Large trees (25 m2 canopy)
5 each
8 litres / hour
Small trees (10 m2 canopy)
5 each
4 litres / hour
Shrubs
2 each
4 litres / hour
Hedges
3 per m
2 litres / hour
Ground cover
2 per m2
4 litres / hour
Swimming Pools For Swimming Pools refer SP-1280 Specification for Swimming Pools – ‘Design & Construction Guidelines’.
2.18
Sewage Treatment Installation shall comply with the regulations of the Ministry of Regional Municipalities and Environment – MRME – which will normally require an Environmental Impact Statement. The Company focal point for liason with the MRME is the Environmental Advisor, Corporate HSE department. This section primarily covers treatment of domestic, biodegradable, sewage. The treatment and controlled disposal of industrial, non-biodegradable, waste shall be determined in conjunction with the Company in each case. The preferred process shall be by sewage treatment plant with all the treated effluent used for irrigation purposes. For temporary facilities, facultative ponds may be provided. In remote locations, with population equivalent up to 100, septic tanks with soakaways may be provided, subject to Company approval. In specific cases, holding tanks and sludge gulpers may be appropriate. For very low population equivalents, chemical toilets may be appropriate. The following Company Standards Drawings relate to sewage treatment systems. STD-2-1030: Typical Manhole Details STD-2-1033: Septic Tanks STD-2-1034: Soakaways STD-2-4025: Hydrocarbon Disposal Pit
June 2004
Page 86
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.18.1
Version 1.0
Location of STP The location of sewage treatment plant should take the following factors into account.
2.18.2
-
Adjacent accommodation (minimum separation of 100m)
-
Prevailing wind direction
-
Availability and cost of land
-
Minimised pumping costs
-
Future extension.
Pollution Load Treatment plant throughout and peak flows should be determined as detailed in section 2.17.4.1. In the absence of definitive data, a biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) of 65 gm/capita/day should be used.
2.18.3
Sewage Treatment Plant Treatment should be by the activated sludge process with extended coarse bubble aeration, chlorination and tertiary filtration, should be collected in a holding tank, and be used for irrigation purposes. Water retaining structures of epoxy painted reinforced concrete, above ground, should be preferred. Control panels, pumps, filters and blowers should be housed in a naturally ventilated block work with a telephone and external visual fault alarm. An overflow pond should be provided for start-up, while process biology is being established, and for maintenance purposes. Sludge should be collected in drying beds. Potable water should be provided to a hand-wash trough and to a shower Hose bib taps, which may supply treated effluent, should be provided at strategic locations for general cleaning purposes. Treated effluent outlets shall be labelled “NOT DRINKING WATER”, in Arabic and English. Provision should be made for maintenance vehicle access and the whole of the sewage treatment area should be secured within a Type of C fence. Photocell activated external lighting should be provided around the main plant. The sewage treatment plant should include, but not be limited to, the following components. System
Component
1. Inlet works:
Will include a pumping station, which can be sized to act as a raw sewage holding/balancing tank, to even out the peak flow and prevent shock loading rake screen.
2. Aeration tank:
Sized for a minimum 24 h retention at DWH + 500 mm freeboard transfer float. (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 87
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
System 3. Sedimentation tank:
Component (Contd.) Sized for minimum 6 hr retention at DWF. Hopper bottom for sludge collection, Airlift pumps for sludge transfer and removal. Scum baffle weir plate.
4. Chlorination chamber:
5. Access walkway:
Sized for minimum 1 hr retention at DWF. Chlorination by “liquid“ chlorine injection or equal and approved by the Company. Tablet dispenser not recommended. Flush with tank rim. Around perimeter of combined treatment tanks Across settling tank Rigid handrail (extn), removable chain handrail (intrn) caged access ladder Walkway lighting
6. Tertiary filtration:
Duty and standby pressure type multi-media filters Duty and standby filter service pumps. Dedicated backwash pump Each sized for a minimum 2 x DWF
7. Controls:
Common programmable logic control Staggered motor start Duty/standby auto –change Auto-reset Visual fault alarm
8. Flow measurement:
On raw sewage at inlet and treated effluent water at outlet.
9. Test kit:
Dissolved oxygen PH Chlorine Measuring cylinders (Contd.)
June 2004
Page 88
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
System
Version 1.0
Component (Contd.)
9. Test kit (contd.)
BOD5 should normally be measured at the Company facilities
10. Treated effluent Storage tank:
Sized for a minimum 48 h retention at DWF
The sewage treatment process and control philosophy should be agreed with the Company during the preliminary design of each plant. 2.18.4
Treated Effluent Standard Sewage treatment plant shall comply with the regulations of the Ministry of Regional Municipalities and Environment Table 27 gives current requirements in mg.l or ppm (unless otherwise stated). For definition of A and B, refer Table 28. Table 27: Treated Effluent Standards – Maximum Quality Limits Parameter
Standards (See Table 28) A
B
15.000
20.000
150.000
200.000
15.000
30.000
Total Dissolved Solid (TDS)
1500.000
2000.000
Electrical Conductivity (E C) (micro S./ cm)
2000.000
2700.000
10.000
10.000
6-9.000
6-9.000
Aluminium (as Al)
5.000
5.000
Arsenic (as As)
0.100
0.100
Barium (as Ba)
1.000
2.000
Beryllium (as Be)
0.100
0.300
Boron (as B)
0.500
1.000
Cadmium (as Cd)
0.010
0.010
650.000
650.000
Chromium (as Cr)
0.050
0.050
Cobalt (as Co)
0.050
0.050
Copper (as Cu)
0.500
1.000
BOD (Biochemical Oxygen Demand – 5d@200C Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) Suspended Solids (SS)
Sodium Absoption Ration (SAR)* pH (within range)
Chloride (as Cl)
(Contd.) SP-1275
Page 89
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 27: Treated Effluent Standards – Maximum Quality Limits (contd.) Standards (See Table 28) Parameter A
June 2004
B
Cyanide (total as CN)
0.050
0.100
Fluorine (as F)
1.000
2.000
Iron (total as Fe)
1.000
5.000
Lead (as Pb)
0.100
0.200
Lithium (as Li)
0.070
0.070
Magnesium
150.000
150.000
Manganese
0.100
0.500
Mercury
0.001
0.001
Molybdenum
0.010
0.050
Nickel
0.100
0.100
Nitrogen: Ammonical (as N)
5.000
10.000
Nitrogen: Nitrate (as NO3)
50.000
50.000
Nitrogen: Organic (Kjeldahl) (as N)
5.000
10.000
Oil and Grease (total extractable)
0.500
0.500
Phenols (total)
0.001
0.002
Phosphorus (total as P)
30.000
30.000
Selenium
0.020
0.002
Silver
0.010
0.010
Sodium
200.000
300.000
Sulphate
400.000
400.000
Sulphide
0.100
0.100
Vanadium
0.100
0.100
Zinc
5.000
5.000
Faecal Coliform Bacteria (per 100 mm).
200.000
1000.000
Viable Nematode Ova (per litre).
<1.000
<1.000
Page 90
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 28, below, provides details of the re-use of wastewater from a sewage treatment plant. Wastewater quality shall at all times be within the limits that are set out in Table 27. Table 28: Treated Effluent Re-Use – Areas of application of Standards A and B (see table 27) Area
A
B
(For effluent standard refer Table 27)
Crops
Grass & Ornamental Areas
2.18.5
Vegetables likely to be eaten raw.
Vegetables to be cooked or processed.
Fruit likely to be eaten raw and within 2 weeks of any irrigation
Fruit if no irrigation within 2 weeks of cropping. Fodder, cereal and seed crops.
Public parks, Hotel, Lawns Recreational Areas.
Pastures.
Areas with public access. Lakes with public contact (except places which may be used for praying and hand washing).
Areas with no public access.
Aquifer Recharge
All controlled aquifer recharge.
Method of Irrigation
Spray or any other method of arial irrigation not permitted in areas with public access unless with timing control.
Any other Re-use Applications
Subject to the approval of the Ministry.
Facultative Ponds Facultative Ponds shall require special permit from MRME and PDO Corporate HSE department. All Facultative pond shall be lined. Facultative ponds should be sized on the basis of 2 months holding excluding losses. The maximum holding level should be at a depth of 800 mm to achieve a reasonable balance of aerobic and anaerobic action. Bunds should be constructed of late-rite fine grade, maximum 40µm, in layers of 150 mm, well compacted up to 95% modified AASHTO. The internal bund gradient should be 1:1.5 maximum, top bund widths should be 1000 mm minimum and the external bund gradient should be 1:2 maximum. The external bund face may have riprap. The height of the bund should be 1200 mm above the floor of the pond. The whole of the evaporative pond area should be secured within a Type G fence.
2.18.6
Septic Tanks The design of septic tanks with soakaways should comply with the Company Standard Drawing listed in section 2.18.
SP-1275
Page 91
June 2004
Version 1.0
2.18.7
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Hydrocarbon Disposal Pits The design of pits for the collection of hydrocarbon waste shall comply with the Company Standard Drawing STD-2-4025 and other standards listed in section 2.18.
2.19
Electrical Services This section covers the design of building services low voltage (LV), 415V/3ph/50Hz, electrical distribution installations and extra low voltage (LLV), 30V and below, instrumentation installations. High voltage (HV), rated above 415V, installations are not part of the building services design scope nor are LV vital supply installations. The scope of, and interface between, LV and HV electrical designs shall be established with the Company at preliminary design stage. Electrical building services installations include: -
LV Electrical Supply
-
Small Power
-
In-door Lighting
-
Emergency Lighting
-
Outdoor Lighting
-
Fire Detection and Alarm
-
Lightning Protection
-
Telecoms
-
Datacoms
-
Television and Video
-
Audio
-
Nurse Call
The entire electrical installation shall be designed to be suitable for the environment and climatic conditions prevailing in the Sultanate of Oman. The following Company Standard Specifications and Drawings relate to LV electrical distribution systems shall be applicable for the Electrical services.
June 2004
IP 15
:
Institute of Petroleum Model Code of Safe Practice Part 15 - ‘Area Classification Code for Petroleum Installations’
SP-1099
:
Specification for Electrical Installation Practice
SP-1104
:
Specification for Electrical Safety Rules
SP-1105
:
Specification for Electrical Standard Drawings List
SP-1110
:
Specification for Electrical Supplies to Mobile Camps
SP-1111
:
Specification for Temporary Electrical Supplies
Page 92
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.19.1
Version 1.0
DEP 33.64.10.10-Gen
:
Electrical Engineering Guidelines
DEP 80.00.10.10 Gen
:
Area classifications (Amendments / Supplement to IP 15)
Electrical Supply Building services electrical supply design should normally comprise input to the design of the LV main switchboard and earth bar, which should be part of the HV design scope, together with the design of the LV electrical installation from the LV main switchboard outgoings and the earth bar. Vital service supply by no-break set (UPS) or emergency generator set shall not be part of building services design, which shall be confined to local battery backup packages. 2.19.1.1 Rated Voltage & Frequency Electrical equipment shall be selected to comply with the following rated voltages and frequencies. 415V/3ph/50Hz, 240V/1ph/50Hz 2.19.1.2 Loads The electrical design shall include a schedule of connected and instantaneous loads, which shall be updated during the design process to form the basis of the power supply and distribution capacity. The figures given in Table 29 may be used for estimating purposes. The power supply and distribution system should be designed with minimum 25% spare capacity to accommodate changes and future expansion. The overall system power factor, inclusive of reactive power losses in transformers and distribution system equipment, shall not be less than 0.8 lagging at rated design load. 2.19.1.3 Voltage Drop The voltage drop in cables between LV main switchboard outgoings and consumer terminals shall not be more than 5%, based on continuous maximum current loading and rated voltage. Moreover, during the starting and stopping of heavy loads, such as chiller compressors, the transient voltage depression at the terminals of any motor shall not be more than 20% of the rated equipment voltage.
SP-1275
Page 93
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 29: Estimated Electrical Loads Facility
Maximum Demand
PDO Permanent Camp Accommodation
4.5 kVA/unit
Laundry / Messing
1.0 kVA/person
Cinema (open air)
4.8 kVA
Clinic
18.0 kVA
Football Pitch
36.0 kVA
Fuel Station
21.0 kVA
Guard House
10.0 kVA
Mosque
14.5 kVA
Shop
10.0 kVA
Squash Court
9.0 kVA
Tennis Court
18.0 kVA
PDO Temporary Camp Accommodation
3.7 kVA/unit
Laundry / Messing
0.7 kVA/person
Contractor Facility Accommodation
3.7 kVA/unit
Laundry / Messing
0.4 kVA/person
Workshop (open sheds)
30.0 kVA/unit
Broad brush
30.0 VA/m2
2.19.1.4 Underground Cable De rating While the sizing of above ground cables shall be in accordance with the IEE Regulations (refer section 1.4.3 for the IEE), a basic de-rating factor, depending on cable size and type, shall be used for underground cables. The figures given in Table 30 shall be used a catchall factors. A further de-rating factor shall be applied relating to the grouping of cables.
June 2004
Page 94
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 30: Overall De rating Factors for Underground LV Cables (Note: Not applicable to cable groups) Cable Single Core
Multi Core
De rating Factor
Up to 150 mm2
0.61
185 – 400 mm2
0.60
above 500 mm2
0.59
Up to 16 mm2
0.65
25 – 150 mm2
0.63
above 185 mm2
0.62
2.19.1.5 Underground Cables LV cables sizes 16 mm2 and above shall be copper conductor, cross-linked polyethylene insulated, steel wire armoured, polyvinyl chloride sheathed (XLPE/SWA/PVC). LV cables sizes 2.5 mm2 to 10 mm2 may be PVC insulated, copper braid armoured, PVC sheathed, (PVC/SWB/PVC). 2.19.1.6 Earthing Earthing systems shall be provided in accordance with SP-1099 Specification for Electrical Installation Practice section 2.3, ‘Earthing Systems’. The system of earthing shall be TN-S, that is, protection against indirect contact obtained by earthed equipotential bonding and automatic disconnection of supply. Minimum ring cable size shall be 70 mm2, minimum radial cable size shall be 25 mm2. 2.19.2
Small Power Appendix L includes the following small power requirements relating to Company facilities.
SP-1275
-
Power outlets
-
Shaver outlets
-
Hand dryers
-
Fire alarm systems
-
Airconditioners
-
Ventilation fans
-
Water heaters
-
Drinking water coolers
-
Cookers
Page 95
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
-
Refrigerators
-
Insectocutors
SP-1099 Specification for Electrical Installation Practice, gives the Company Electrical Standards for the following. -
Applicable Standards, Specifications & Codes
-
General Requirements
-
Cable Installation
-
Earthing Systems
-
Hazardous Area
-
Equipment Installation
The Company Electrical Standard Drawings lists are contained in SP-1105 Specification for Electrical Standard Drawings List. 2.19.2.1 Power Supply Electrical designs shall include distribution board and feeder pillar single line diagrams showing: -
Board reference, area served and location.
-
Incoming feeder cable size and reference.
-
Circuit MCB/RCD protection sizes.
-
Sub circuit ways, outgoing feeders, MCB/RCD/ELCB protection ratings, wire sizes and sub areas served.
-
Sub circuit loads and total connected load per phase.
-
Min 25% spare outgoing feeders (refer section 2.19.1).
Distribution boards shall incorporate residual current type earth leakage circuit breakers to provide discriminatory protection as follows. -
Distribution Board feeders: 100mA
-
Socket outlet ring sub circuit: 30mA
Distribution boards shall not be located within toilets or ablutions. Neither power outlet nor switch shall be located within 1 m of a water source, or under a water pipe. A means of identifiable local isolation shall be provided for each connection to electrical equipment. 2.19.2.2 Power Consumption All single-phase loads shall, as far as is practically possible, be evenly distributed over the phases.
June 2004
Page 96
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
2.19.2.3 Voltage Drop Refer section 2.19.1.3 of this specification for voltage drop. 2.19.2.4 Cables Armoured cables shall be as described for underground cables in section 2.19.1.4. Cables in conduit or trunking shall be copper conductor, PVC insulated. Minimum size shall be 2.5 mm2. 2.19.2.5 Conduit & Trunking PVC conduit shall be used only inside buildings in locations not liable to mechanical damage. Only GI conduit shall be used for external work. Minimum conduit size shall be 20 mm. Design drawings should indicate the number and use (line, neutral and protective earth) of cables in each conduit. GI trunking should be used instead of multiple conduit runs. Trunking that is intended for the accommodation of different services shall be divided into separate compartments to provide complete cable separation. Steel conduit and trunking shall be electrically and mechanically continuous throughout. 2.19.2.6 Earthing & Bonding Earthing and bonding installations shall be shown on the electrical design drawings. All metallic electrical equipment enclosures shall be earthed as described in section 2.19.1.6. Exposed metalwork of all conduits, trunking, ducts, sheaths and armouring of cables, and all fixed metalwork which is in reach of electrical apparatus, shall be bonded and earthed. Such other fixed metalwork required, to be bonded and earthed shall include exposed metal pipes, sinks and tanks. The earth bonding connection to any water services entering a building shall be as near as possible to the point of entry, after the isolation valve. Minimum cable size for bonding metal pipes, sinks and the like shall be 6 mm2. 2.19.3
Indoor Lighting General requirements for the illumination of Company facilities are given in Appendix L. Where requirements are not listed in Appendix L, illumination levels should follow the standards listed below: Indoor lighting design should comply with the recommendations of the following. BS 8206: Code of Practice for Artificial Lighting. BS ISO 8995: Lighting of Indoor Work Places CIBSE: Code of Interior Lighting.
SP-1275
Page 97
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.19.3.1 Luminaries As well as first cost, lamps should be selected for long life, giving reduced maintenance and replacement costs, and low energy consumption. Where special requirements for colour rendering exist, they should be met. Incandescent lamps should only be used for decorative purposes. Low pressure sodium discharge lamps should not be used since they represent a fire hazard in the event of breakage. Table 31 gives typical lamp selections for standard applications. Table 31: Typical Indoor Lamp Selection Application
Lamp
General
Fluorescent
Types 2D,PL,SL,TL
Industrial
Fluorescent
Type TL, white
High bay
HP discharge
Type MBF
Fluorescent
Ex e
HP discharge
Ex d
Zone 1 & 2
Luminaries located in ablution and toilet areas shall be protected to IP54, in special cases, for example, where cleaning is by water hose, IP55 may be required. Light switches in ablution and toilet areas shall be pull cord operated. Luminaries, surface mounted on ceilings of combustible material, shall be offset by 50 mm. 2.19.4
Emergency Lighting Emergency lighting systems cover escape route lighting, exit sign indication and vital lighting. The function of emergency lighting shall be to: -
Indicate the escape routes clearly and unambiguously.
-
Provide illumination along such routes to allow safe movement towards and through the exits provided.
Ensure that the fire alarm call points and fire fighting equipment provided along escape routes can be readily located. -
Provide illumination to a facility which, when failing in operation, can cause an unsafe condition or can result in major damage.
Escape route and exit lighting shall be located at each exit door, emergency exit door, and where necessary to identify potential hazards, that is, -
At corridor intersections
-
At corridor changes of direction
-
At stair flights
-
At hazardous changes in floor level.
June 2004
Page 98
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
General requirements for escape route and exit lighting are given in Appendix L. An un-switched power supply shall be provided to keep the battery backup packs on charge, and to sense mains failure. Emergency lighting system design, installation and implementation shall confirm to the requirements of BS 5266, Emergency Lighting. 2.19.4.1 Escape Route Lighting Fixed escape route lighting shall actuate within 5 sec of normal lighting failure. Illumination should be not less than 0.2 lux. Light fittings should be non-maintained, self contained, slave luminaries, operated by a DC battery which shall be capable of 3 hour running time. Alternatively, battery backup conversion kits may be used on selected lamps to enable fluorescent luminaries to operate as emergency lighting. 2.19.4.2 Exit Lighting Exit light fittings should be maintained, self-contained slave units, with 3 hour battery backup. EXIT lettering, in Arabic and English, shall be green on a white background. 2.19.4.3 Vital Lighting In cases where vital lighting is required for operational purposes, battery backup conversion kits should be used in a proportion of the standard light fittings. Appropriate vital illumination levels should be calculated in each case, but in the absence of definitive data, the number of vital lamps as part of the total number of lamps may be determined using Table 32. Table 32: Typical Vital Lighting Requirements Area
2.19.5
Vital Lamps
Administrative Area
5%
Computer Room
10%
Control Room
50%
Field Auxiliary Room
30%
Switch House
30%
Utility Area
20%
Clinic Ward
25%
Outdoor Lighting Outdoor lighting installations shall comply with SP-1099 Specification for Electrical Installation Practice section 2.5.5 Lighting.
SP-1275
Page 99
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.19.5.1 Lighting Fixtures Outdoor lighting fixtures shall be located a minimum distance of 0.5 m from the face of roadway kerbs and a minimum 1.5 m from the face of car park kerbs. Polycarbonate diffusers shall not be used unless they are certified as UV resistant. Table 33 includes preferred lamp types for outdoor lighting applications. 2.19.5.2 Illumination Levels Table 33 also gives minimum maintained illumination levels for outdoor lighting. Table 33: Typical Outdoor Lighting Lamps & Illumination Levels Application
2.20
Lamp Type
Illumination
Football Pitch
SON
150 lux
Lay down Area
MBF
50 lux
Operational Area
MBF
10 lux
Roadway
MBF
10 lux
Tennis Court
SON
200 lux
Volleyball Court
SON
200 lux
Walkway
MBF.2D
10 lux
Workshop
MBF
50 lux
Fire Detection & Alarm The Company fire detection and alarm design parameters are set out in SP-1075 Specification for Fire, Explosion & Risk Management. General requirements are given in Appendix L. For the fire detection and alarm equipment and materials shall comply with the requirements as given in SP-1285-D Specification for Civil & Buildings Utility Services – ‘Fire Protection Works’. The above are considered as being the minimum standard, however each project shall be reviewed for particular requirements at the design stage.
2.20.1
Operational Criteria Power supplies for fire detection and alarm systems shall include a standby battery and automatic charger, and shall be designed so as not to become inoperative in the event of failure of the power supply. In general, stand by power supply shall be designed in accordance with DEP 33.65.50.31-Gen. ‘Static DC Uninterruptible Power Supply (DC UPS) Units’.
June 2004
Page 100
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
The main supply feeding the local annunciator panel shall be connected to a dedicated circuit way on a distribution board which is part of the main switch panel. No other service shall be connected to this circuit way and, where MCBs are used, the one serving the fire protection system shall be coloured red and labelled, white/red/white, FIRE ALARM-DO NOT SWITCH OFF (consideration should be given to providing a key switch; the key being held by the fire officer). The main supply cable should follow the least hazardous route available. The battery backup power supply shall provide at least 24-hour of system operation plus 15minute of full alarm. The battery charger shall be capable of restoring the battery to full capacity within 8 hours from fully discharged condition. Fault monitoring and alarm indication shall be provided for: a.
Main power failure by red light without opening the panel
b.
Battery power failure indication
c.
Charger output failure indication
A closed circuit principle shall be used, and all wiring shall be continuously monitored such that any of the following conditions cause a FAULT indication at the local annunciator panel. a.
Short circuit fault, indicating the affected zone.
b.
Open circuit fault, indicating the affected zone.
c.
Earth fault.
d.
Power supply fault.
The control circuitry shall be so arranged such that none of the above conditions cause the fire alarms to sound. Monitoring of the system shall be intrinsic in the control circuit design and shall be automatic in operation, and shall not require manual operation of switches or other apparatus. Large buildings shall be suitably zoned in accordance with BS 5839 Fire detection and Alarm system for buildings. The local annunciator panel shall be located at the building main entrance and shall be visible from outside the building. The panel shall indicate zone FAULT, and zone FIRE which shall be activated by manual call points and automatic detection systems. Activation of one zone alarm shall operate audible alarms on all zones. Activation of one zone alarm shall also shutdown airconditioning systems in all zones except for systems that do not cause the spread of smoke outside the area of the fire. FAULT and FIRE alarm shall be relayed to a central mimic panel, at a location specified by the Company. 2.20.2
Cables Fire alarm and detection cables shall be segregated from other electrical services, including those of similar voltage and frequency. Cables shall be protected by armour, conduit or trunking. Buried cables shall have steel wire armour and cables encased within building fabric may be in PVC conduit. Cables should be exposed only in industrial applications.
SP-1275
Page 101
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Cables should be single copper conductor, minimum size 2.5 mm2 for low voltage (240v) and minim size 1.13 mm2 for very low voltage (to 30v). Mineral insulated cable should not normally be required for fire detection and alarm systems.
2.21
Lightning Protection Lightning protection requirements, if any, should be based on the factors listed below and shall be agreed with the Company. -
Exposure risk
-
Use of structure
-
Type of construction
-
Contents or consequential effects
-
Height of structure and degree of isolation
-
Location topography
Lightning protection system designs should follow the requirements of BS 6651, Code of Practice for Protection of Structures Against Lightning.
2.22
Telecom Networks The design of telephone distribution systems shall be agreed with and approved by the Company Telecommunications Projects Department (TCT). The building services design shall include, but not be limited to, allocation of reserved rights of way, external layouts, internal layouts and schematics. A key sheet may also be required. The project scope of work, and the interface between the building services contractor and the telecoms contractor, shall also be agreed with TCT. Normally, this will exclude the pulling and the terminations of external telephone cable but will include the distribution points, telephone outlets, and terminations at the distribution points, conduit and wiring, and terminations at the outlets. Company supplied materials, which are free issue to the building services contractor, shall be specified by TCT. Normally, they will include: -
Underground ducting
-
Distribution boxes
-
Manhole accessories
Underground cables and handsets are installed by Telecom Specialist Contractors. General requirements for telephones are given in Appendix L. The Company Standards for cable laying, manhole construction, duct installation and for installation within buildings is given in PDO-ERD-71-01, Installation of Underground and Internal Telephone Cable Networks.
June 2004
Page 102
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
2.22.1
Version 1.0
Data Communications Networks The scope of building services design should normally be confined to the provision of distribution ways, conduit, trunking or trays, and outlet points together with spatial requirements for equipment. The scope and design shall be agreed with approved by the Company Telecommunications Department (TCT).
2.22.2
Television & Video Networks Normally, provision for TV shall be confined to built-in conduit and outlet points. However, in cases where reception for individual buildings is not possible, a central antenna system may be provided. For camps in the Oman Interior, a VCP system, as well as a satellite dish, may also be included. Concept design shall be part of the building services scope with detail design provided by a Specialist Vendor. Both concept and detail design shall be subject to Company approval. General requirements for TV outlets are given in Appendix L.
2.22.3
Audio Systems Concept and detail design scopes shall be as described in section 2.22.2.
2.22.4
Nurse Call Systems Concept and detail design scopes shall be as described in section 2.22.2. requirements for Nurse Call systems are given in Appendix L.
SP-1275
Page 103
General
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendices Appendix A: Glossary of Definitions & Abbreviations Appendix B: Weights of General Building Materials Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes Appendix D: Wall Finishes Appendix E: Floor Finishes Appendix F: Skirting Appendix G: Ceilings Appendix H: Door Types Appendix I: Window Types (Glazing) Appendix J: Ironmongeries Appendix K: Internal Environment Design Criteria Appendix L: Electrical Requirements Appendix M: SP User Comment Form
June 2004
Page 104
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix A: Glossary of Definitions & Abbreviations For the purposes of this document, the following definitions, terminology and abbreviations shall apply. A.1
General Definitions & Terminology Shall
:
The word 'shall' indicates a requirement
Should
:
The word 'should' indicates a recommendation
the Company
:
Petroleum Development Oman L.L.C.,
the Contractor Manufacturer
:
The party with which the Company has entered into a Contract
:
A Party responsible for the manufacture of equipment and services to perform the duties specified by the Consultant or the Company.
Vendor / Supplier:
:
A party responsible for the supply of equipment, materials or product related services in accordance with the purchase order issued by PDO or it’s nominated purchasing office.
Local Agent
:
An authorised agent of a Manufacturer in the Sultanate Of Oman who can supply the product and services.
National Product
:
A product defined as a National Product, in origin manufactured in the Sultanate Of Oman as per the General Conditions of Contract.
GCC Product
:
A product defined as a GCC Product, in origin manufactured in GCC country as per the General Conditions of Contract.
Works
:
The permanent Works to be executed and maintained in accordance with the contract together with all temporary works of every kind required in or about the execution or maintenance of the Works.
Workshop
:
A defined place, approved by the Company, where the Contractor executes fabrication works.
Worksite
:
The land and other places on, under, in or through which the Works are to be executed.
the User
:
The Company, and/or Consultant, designate using this document.
Temporary Structures
:
Any member or structure which needs to withstand loads and forces of a temporary nature, such as scaffolding, erection bracing, steel props, commissioning facilities, etc. The word ‘temporary’ shall be understood as a short period, limited to maximum of 2 years.
Semi Permanent Structures
:
Any member or structure which needs to withstand all meteorological conditions, loads and forces of a permanent nature, but designed for a short period. The word ‘semi-permanent’ shall be understood as a relatively short period, limited to maximum of 4 years.
:
Any member or structure which needs to withstand all meteorological conditions, loads and forces of a permanent nature, but designed for a long period. The word ‘permanent’ shall be understood as a relatively long period, say 30 years or more.
Permanent Structures
SP-1275
Page 105
June 2004
Version 1.0
A.2
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used in this document. AASHTO
:
American Association of State Highway and Transport Officials
ACI
:
American Concrete Institute
ACV
:
Aggregate Crushing Value.
ASME
:
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASNT
:
American Society Non-Destructive Testing
ASTM
:
American Society for Testing and Materials
AWS
:
American Welding Society
AWC
:
Asian Water Closet
B
:
Bottom
BLK
:
Block work
BOB
:
Bottom of Base
BOP
:
Bottom of Pipe
BS
:
British Standard
BWK
:
Brickwork
CBR
:
California Bearing Ratio
CIBSE
:
Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers
CP
:
Code of Practice
CWS
:
Code Water Service
CFDH
:
Corporate Functional Discipline Head
DB
:
Dry Bulb Temperature
DEP
:
Design and Engineering Practice (SIEP / Shell GSI Standard)
DFT
:
Dry Film Thickness
DIA
:
Diameter
June 2004
Page 106
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
A.2 Abbreviations (contd.) DIN
:
Deutsche Institute for Normung (West German Institute for Standardisation)
DRG
:
Drawing
DWF
:
Dry Weather Flow
EF
:
Each Face
EW
:
Each Way
ELCB
:
Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker
EPC
:
Engineering, Procurement & Construction
ERD
:
Engineering Reference Document
ESD
:
Emergency Shutdown
EWC
:
European Water Closet
EXL
:
Existing Level
FF
:
Far Face
FFL
:
Finished Floor Level
FS
:
Full Size
GCC
:
Gulf Cooperation Council
GI
:
Galvanised Iron
GRC
:
Glass Reinforced Concrete
GRG
:
Glass Reinforced Gypsum
GRE/GRP
:
(Fibre) Glass Reinforced Epoxy or Plastic
HDPE
:
High Density Polyethylene
HOR
:
Horizontal
HP
:
High Pressure
HW
:
Hardwood
HSE
:
Health, Safety and Environment
HV
:
High Voltage
IEE
:
Institution of Electrical Engineers (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 107
June 2004
Version 1.0
A.2
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Abbreviations (contd.)
JE
:
Junior Employee
JS
:
Junior Staff
LPG
:
Liquid Petroleum Gas
LV
:
Low Voltage
MAF
:
Mina Al Fahal (PDO Coastal Centre of Operations)
MAX
:
Maximum
MBF
:
High Pressure Mercury Discharge
MCB
:
Miniature Circuit Breaker
MIN
:
Minimum
MMMF
:
Man Made Mineral Fibres
MOC
:
Ministry of Communications
MRME
:
Ministry of Regional Municipalities & Environment
MPN
:
Most Probable Number
N
:
Neutral
N/A
:
Not Applicable
NF
:
Near Face
No.
:
Number
NTS
:
Not to Scale
OPC
:
Ordinary Portland Cement
PE
:
Protective Conductor
PDO
:
Petroleum Development Oman LLC
ppm
:
Parts per Million
PVA
:
Polyvinyl Acetate
PVC
:
Polyvinyl Chloride
PW
:
Potable Water
RC
:
Reinforced Concrete
RCD
:
Residual Current Device (Contd.)
June 2004
Page 108
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
A.2
SP-1275
Version 1.0
Abbreviations (contd.)
SELV
:
Safe Extra Low Voltage
Shell GSI
:
Shell Global Solutions International B.V.
SIEP
:
Shell International Exploration and Production B.V.
SIC
:
Shell International Chemicals B.V.
SIS
:
Sveriges Standard Institute)
SON
:
High Pressure Sodium Discharge
SPP
:
Sulphonate Petroleum Product
SP
:
Specification
SRD
:
HSE (Safety) Reference Document
SS
:
Senior Staff
SSL
:
Structural Slab Level
STD
:
Standard
SWA
:
Steel Wire Armour
SWB
:
Steel Wire Braid
T
:
Top
TE
:
Treated Effluent
TN-S
:
Separate N and PE Conductors
TOC
:
Top of Concrete
TOG
:
Top of Grating
TOS
:
Top of Steel
UPS
:
Uninterrupted Power Supply
UPVC
:
Unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride
UV
:
Ultra Violet
VERT
:
Vertical
WB
:
Wet Bulb Temperature
Page 109
Iseringskommision
(Swedish
Standards
June 2004
Version 1.0
A.3
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Abbreviations for Building Types The abbreviations used in this document for different building types are given in Table 34. Table 34: Building Type Codes Code
Building or Area
ABL
:
Ablutions
ABL/1
:
Ablution Block – SS
ABL/2
:
Ablution Block – JS
ABL/3
:
Ablution Block – JE
ACC
:
Accommodation
ACC/1
:
Accommodation – SS House
ACC/2
:
Accommodation – SS Bachelor Flats
ACC/3
:
Accommodation – SS Rooms
ACC/4
:
Accommodation – JS Units
ACC/5
:
Accommodation – JE Units
AIR
:
Air Terminal
AIR/1
:
Air Terminal – Building
AIR/2
:
Air Terminal – Sunshade
ANC
:
Ancillary Building (Catering / Laundry)
ANC/1
:
Ancillary Building – Main Camps
ANC/2
:
Ancillary Building – Satellite Camps
(Contd.)
June 2004
Page 110
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 34: Building Type Codes (contd.) Code
Building or Area
CON
:
Control Building
CON/1
:
Control Building – Type 1
CON/2
:
Control Building – Type 2
CON/3
:
Control Building – Type 3
ELE
:
Electrical Facility
ELE/1
:
Electrical Installation – Substation
ELE/2
:
Electrical Installation – Switch Yard
ELE/3
:
Electrical Installation – Power Station
EXP
:
Explosives Store
FIR
:
Fire Station
FIR/1
:
Fire Station – Type 1
FIR/2
:
Fire Station – Type 2
GAR
:
Garage / Fuel Station
GAR/1
:
Garage / Fuel Station – Type 1
GAR/2
:
Garage / Fuel Station – Type 2
GAR/3
:
Garage / Fuel Station – Type 3
GUA
:
Guard House
GUA/1
:
Guard House
GUA/2
:
Sentry Box (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 111
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 34: Building Type Codes (contd.) Code
Building or Area
HOS
:
Hospital / Clinic
HOS/1
:
Clinic – Type 1
HOS/2
:
Clinic – Type 2
HOS/3
:
First Aid Post
KIT
:
Kitchen (Separate Building)
KIT/1
:
Kitchen – SS
KIT/2
:
Kitchen – JS
KIT/3
:
Kitchen – JE
LAB
:
Laboratory
LAB/1
:
Laboratory – Production Chemistry
LAB/2
:
Laboratory – Geology
LAU
:
Laundry
MES
:
Mess / Canteen
MES/1
:
Mess / Canteen – SS
MES/2
:
Mess / Canteen – JS
MES/3
:
Mess / Canteen – JE
MOS
:
Mosque
MOS/1
:
Mosque – Permanent
MOS/2
:
Mosque – Prayer Shelter
(Contd.)
June 2004
Page 112
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 34: Building Type Codes (contd.) Code
Building or Area
OFF
:
Office
OFF/1
:
Office – Solid Partitions
OFF/2
:
Office – Demountable Partitions
REC
:
Recreational Facility
REC/1
:
Recreational Facility – SS
REC/2
:
Recreational Facility – JS
REC/3
:
Recreational Facility – JE
REC/4
:
Recreational Facility – Arts & Crafts
REC/5
:
Recreational Facility – Cinema Indoor
REC/6
:
Recreational Facility – Cinema Outdoor
REC/7
:
Recreational Facility – Swimming Pool
ROS
:
Reverse Osmosis Plant (Utilities)
SCH
:
School/Training Centre
SCH/1
:
Junior School
SCH/2
:
Kindergarten
SCH/3
:
Training Centre
SHO
:
Shop
SHO/1
:
Shop – Bulk Store (Liquor)
SHO/2
:
Shop – General Store (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 113
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 34: Building Type Codes (contd.) Code
Building or Area
SPO
:
Sports Facility
SPO/1
:
Sports Facility – Squash Court
SPO/2
:
Sports Facility – Sports Hall / Gym
SPO/3
:
Sports Facility – Boat Centre
SPO/4
:
Sports Facility – Golf Course
SPO/5
:
Sports Facility – Tennis / Volleyball Court
SPO/6
:
Sports Facility – Changing Rooms
SPO/7
:
Sports Facility – Sports Field
STO
:
Store
STO/1
:
Store – Edit and Seismic Tape
STO/2
:
Store – File Archives
STO/3
:
Store – Chemical
STO/4
:
Store – Core Shed
STO/5
:
Store – Loose Grain Store
STO/6
:
Store – Cold Store
STO/7
:
Store – Dry Store / Tinned Food Store
STO/8
:
Store – Gas Bottle
STP
:
Sewage Treatment Plant
TEL
:
Telecommunications Facility
TEL/1
:
Telecoms Buildings – Type A
TEL/2
:
Telecoms Buildings – Type B
TEL/3
:
Telecoms Buildings – Type C
TEL/4
:
Telecoms Buildings – Type D
(Contd.)
June 2004
Page 114
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 34: Building Type Codes (contd.) Code
SP-1275
Building or Area
TRU
:
Transportable Unit (Cabin)
TRU/1
:
Temporary Accommodation
TRU/2
:
Temporary Offices
TRU/3
:
Temporary Store
TRU/4
:
Temporary Mess
TRU/5
:
Temporary Kitchen
TRU/6
:
Temporary Ablution
WAH
:
Warehouse / Depot
WAH/01
:
Warehouse / Depot – Non-Inflammable Material
WAH/02
:
Warehouse / Depot – Personal Effects
WAH/03
:
Warehouse / Depot – Furniture & Semi-Inflammable
WAH/04
:
Warehouse / Depot – Inflammable Material
WOR
:
Workshop
WOR/01
:
Workshop – Electrical & Air-conditioning
WOR/02
:
Workshop – Mechanical
WOR/03
:
Workshop – Instrument
WOR/04
:
Workshop – Carpentry
WOR/05
:
Workshop – Light Vehicle
WOR/06
:
Workshop – Heavy Vehicle
WOR/07
:
Workshop – Integrated
Page 115
June 2004
Version 1.0
A.4
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Abbreviations for Room Types The abbreviations used in this document for different room types are given in Table 35. Table 35: Room Type Codes Code
Room Type
ALL
:
All rooms unless noted otherwise
BATH
:
Bathroom
BED
:
Bedroom
BAKE
:
Bakery
BAR
:
Bar
BTRY
:
Battery Room
CANT
:
Canteen
CHRM
:
Changing Room
CLNR
:
Cleaners Room
CLRM
:
Classroom
CONF
:
Conference Room
CORR
:
Corridor
CTRL
:
Control Room
CDST
:
Cold Store
DARK
:
Dark Room
DPFZ
:
Deep Freeze Store
DINE
:
Dining Room
DUCT
:
Service Duct
ELEC
:
Electrical Cupboard
ENTR
:
Entrance Hall
EQMT
:
Equipment Room
EXAM
:
Examination Room
FILE
:
Files Store (Contd.)
June 2004
Page 116
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 35: Room Type Codes (contd.) Code
Room Type
ICE
:
Ice Store
ISO
:
Isotope Pit
KTCH
:
Kitchen
LABC
:
Laboratory (Cores)
LABO
:
Laboratory (Oil)
LABW
:
Laboratory (Water)
LDRY
:
Laundry
LESR
:
Leisure
LBRY
:
Library
LIFT
:
Elevator
LNGE
:
Lounge/Sitting Room
MORT
:
Mortuary
OFF1
:
7 m2 Module Office
OFF2
:
10.5 m2 Module Office
OFF3
:
Drawing Office
PTRY
:
Pantry
PARK
:
Parking Bay
PRAY
:
Prayer Room
PREP
:
Food Preparation
PROJ
:
Projection Room
REC1
:
Recreation – Snooker Room
REC2
:
Recreation – Table Tennis Room
RECP
:
Reception
REDX
:
First Aid Room
RSNT
:
Restaurant (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 117
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table35: Room Type Codes (contd.) Code
Room Type
SH
:
Shower
SL
:
Sluice
SHOP
:
Shop
SQCT
:
Squash Court
SERV
:
Service Room
ST/B
:
Gas Bottle Store
ST/C
:
Chemical Store
ST/D
:
Dry Store
ST/E
:
Equipment & Tools Store
ST/G
:
General Supply Store
ST/H
:
Health Dept Store (Poisons)
ST/K
:
Kitchen Consumables Store
ST/L
:
Bulk (Liquor) Store
ST/M
:
Medical (Drugs) Store
ST/O
:
Office Supplies Store
ST/P
:
Pork Products Store
ST/S
:
Secure Store
ST/T
:
Edit & Seismic Tape Store
ST/U
:
UV Shielded Store
STND
:
Stand & Wait Area
STWL
:
Stairwell
SWGR
:
Switchgear Room
TLET
:
Public Toilet
TRMT
:
Treatment Room
TV
:
TV / Video Room (Contd.)
June 2004
Page 118
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table35: Room Type Codes (contd.) Code
SP-1275
Room Type
UTIL
:
Utility Room
VIEW
:
Viewing Gallery
WAIT
:
Waiting Room
WARD
:
Ward
WC
:
Toilet
WKSP
:
Workshop
XRAY
:
X-Ray Room
Page 119
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix B: Weights of General Building Materials kN/m2
Building Material Aluminium Roof Sheeting
0.7 mm thick
Asbestos Cement Sheeting
This material shall not be used.
Asphalt – Roofing, 2 layers
19 mm thick
0.41
25 mm thick
0.58
Bitumen, built up felt roofing – 3 layers incl chippings
kN/m3
0.023
0.29
Block work (excluding weight of mortar) Concrete, solid,
Per 25 mm thick
0.54
Concrete, hollow,
Per 25 mm thick
0.34
Lightweight, solid,
Per 25 mm thick
0.32
Clay, solid,
Per 25 mm thick
0.45
Low density
Per 25 mm thick
0.49
Medium density
Per 25 mm thick
0.54
High density
Per 25 mm thick
0.58
Clay, perforated,
Per 25 mm thick
Low density
25% voids
0.38
15% voids
0.42
25% voids
0.40
15% voids
0.46
25% voids
0.44
15% voids
0.48
Brickwork, (excluding weight of mortar)
Medium density
High density
(Contd.)
June 2004
Page 120
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix B: Weights of General Building Materials (contd.) kN/m2
Building Material
kN/m3
Boards Cork, compressed,
Per 25 mm thick
0.06
Fibre insulating,
Per 25 mm thick
0.07
Laminated blockboard,
Per 25 mm thick
0.11
Plywood,
Per 12.7 mm thick
0.09 23.55
Concrete, reinforced, 2% steel 4 mm
0.09
6 mm
0.14
Thermal insulation,
Per 25 mm thick
0.005
Acoustic insulation,
Per 25 mm thick
0.01
Glass – Clear float
Glass Fibre
Glazing, Patent 6.3 mm Glass Lead covered bars at 610 mm centres
0.29
Aluminium alloy bars at 610 mm centres
0.19
Plaster
12.5 mm thick
0.22
Gypsum
9.5 mm thick
0.08
Plasterboard Gypsum
12.5 mm thick
0.11
19.0 mm thick
0.17
19 mm thick
0.10
25 mm thick
0.12
32 mm thick
0.14
Roof Boarding Softwood rough sawn
(Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 121
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix B: Weights of General Building Materials (contd.) Building Material
kN/m2
kN/m3
Rendering & Screed Portland cement: sand, 1:3 mix
Per 12.5 mm thick
0.29
Concrete
Per 25 mm thick
0.58
Lightweight
Per 25 mm thick
0.32 77.22
Steel Steel Roof Sheeting – (as laid)
0.50 mm thick
0.05
0.70 mm thick
0.07
Tiling, Roof Clay or concrete, plain, laid to 10 mm gauge
0.62 – 0.7 0.48
Tiling, Floor Finishes
June 2004
Asphalt
3 mm thick
0.06
Clay
12.5 mm thick
0.27
Cork, compressed
6.5 mm thick
0.025
PVC, flexible
2.0 mm thick
0.035
Timber – Softwoods
Pine Spruce
4.72
Douglas Fir
4.72
Redwood
5.50
Pitch pine
6.60
Timber – Hardwood
Teak, Oak
7.07
Wood-wool Slabs
Per 25 mm thick
Page 122
0.15
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes Legend:
W = Wall
F = Floor
C = Ceiling
S = Skirting
D = Door
G = Glazing
Note: For Abbreviations of Building Types & Room Types refer Tables 34&35 in Appendix B.
SP-1275
Appendix D Wx Type
Appendix E Fx Type
Appendix F Sx Type
Appendix G Cx Type
Appendix H Dx Type
Appendix I Gx Type
2.0
W1/2
F4
S4
C3
D9
G5
BATH
1.5
W2
F4
S4
C3/5
D9
G5
BED
1.5
W1
F15
S1
C3
D9
G14
DINE
1.5
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
G13
DUCT
1.5
W7
F8
S7
C2
D9
ELEC
2.0
W7
F8
S1
C2
D9
ENTR
2.5
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
EXTR
2.5
W3
F6
S8
KTCH
3.0
W1/2
F2
S5
C3
D9
G14
LNGE
1.5
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
G13
ST/K
2.5
W1
F3
C2
D9
G6
Building
Room
ABL/1-3
ALL
ACC/1
Live Load kN/m2
Page 123
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes (contd.) Building
Room
Live Load kN/m2
Appendix D Wx Type
Appendix E Fx Type
Appendix F Sx Type
Appendix G Cx Type
Appendix H Dx Type
Appendix I Gx Type
STWL
3.0
W1
F1
S1
C3
WC
1.5
W2
F4
S4
C3/5
D9
G10
BATH
1.5
W2
F4
S4
C3
D9
G5
BED
1.5
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
G14
DINE
2.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
G6
DUCT
1.5
W7
F8
S7
C2
D9
ELEC
2.0
W7
F8
S1
C2
D9
ENTR
3.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
EXTR
3.0
W3
F6
S8
KTCH
3.0
W1/2
F2
S5
C3
D9
G14
LNGE
2.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
G13
ST/K
2.5
W1
F3
S1
C2
D9
G6
STWL
3.0
W3
F8
S7
C3
ACC/1
ACC/2
June 2004
Page 124
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes (contd.) Appendix D Wx Type
Appendix E Fx Type
Appendix F Sx Type
Appendix G Cx Type
Appendix H Dx Type
Appendix I Gx Type
1.5
W2
F4
S4
C3/5
D9
G10
BATH
1.5
W2
F4
S4
C3
D9
G10
BED
1.5
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
G7
DINE
2.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
G13
ENTR
3.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
EXTR
3.0
W3
F6
S8
KTCH
3.0
W1/2
F2
S4
C3
D9
G14
STWL
3.0
W3
F8
S7
C3
WC
1.5
W2
F4
S4
C3
D9
G5
BATH
1.5
W2
F4
S4
C8
D11
BED
1.5
W1/6
F3
S1
C8
D9
ELEC
2.0
W7
F8
S7
C2
D9
ENTR
3.0
W1
F3
S1
C8
D11
EXTR
3.0
W3
F6
S8
Building
Room
ACC/2
WC
Live Load kN/m2
AA/3
ACC/4
SP-1275
Page 125
June 2004
G8
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes (contd.) Building
ACC/4
ACC/5
June 2004
Room
Live Load kN/m2
Appendix D Wx Type
Appendix E Fx Type
Appendix F Sx Type
Appendix G Cx Type
Appendix H Dx Type
SERV
1.5
W1
F3
S1
C3
D11
SH
2.0
W6
F7
S4
C3
D11
ST/G
3.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
STWL
3.0
W3
F8
S7
C3
WC
1.5
W2
F4
S4
C8
D11
BATH
1.5
W2
F4
S4
C8
D11
BED
1.5
W1
F3
S1
C8
D9
ELEC
2.0
W7
F8
S7
C2
D9
EXTR
3.0
W3
F6
S8
C8
KTCH
3.0
W1/2
F3
S4
C3
D9
LNGE
1.5
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
SERV
1.5
W1
F3
S1
C3
D11
SH
2.0
W1/6
F7
S4
C3
D11
ST/G
3.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
Page 126
SP-1275
Appendix I Gx Type
G8
G13
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes (contd.) Appendix D Wx Type
Appendix E Fx Type
Appendix F Sx Type
Appendix G Cx Type
Appendix H Dx Type
1.5
W1/2
F4
S4
C7
D11
ALL
3.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D11
EXTR
3.0
W3
F6
S8
AIR/2
ALL
7.5
W-
F-
ANC/1 & ANC/2
BAKE
3.0
W2/6
F4
S1
C2
D11
CDST
7.5
W2
F11
S1
C2
D3
LDRY
3.0
W2/6
F4
S1
C2
D11
ST/B
7.5
W1
F8
S1
C2
D9
ST/D
7.5
W1
F4
S1
C2
D9
ST/G
5.0
W1
F4
S1
C2
D9
ST/K
7.5
W1
F4
S1
C2
D9
ST/P
5.0
W1
F4
S1
C2
D9
WC
2.0
W1/2
F4
S4
C8
D9
G5
C 7.5
C W1
C F12
C S1
C C5
C D1
C G-
Building
Room
ACC/5
WC
AIR/1
CON/1-3
SP-1275
CTRL
Live Load kN/m2
Page 127
June 2004
Appendix I Gx Type
G5
G5
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes (contd.) Appendix E Fx Type
Appendix F Sx Type
Appendix G Cx Type
Appendix H Dx Type
7.5
W7
F12/3
S1
C2
D3
BATY
7.5
W7
F14
S5
C2
D4
ALL
7.5
W7
F8
S7
C2
D4
EXTR
7.5
W3
F6
S8
ALL
7.5
W7
10cm
S7
C2
D4
EXTR
7.5
W3
F6
S8
ALL
7.5
W7
F8
S7
C2
D4
EXTR
7.5
W3
F6
S8
OFF
3.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
G-
WC
2.0
W1/2
F4
S4
C2
D9
G5
ALL
7.5
W1
F3
S7
C3
D11
G-
EXTR
5.0
W3
F8
S8
PARK
7.5
W1
F8
S7
WC
2.0
W1/2
F4
S4
Room
CON/1-3
EQMT
ELE/1
ELE/2
ELE/3
FIR/1
June 2004
Appendix D Wx Type
Building
Live Load kN/m2
Page 128
SP-1275
Appendix I Gx Type
D12 C2
D9
G5
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes (contd.) Appendix D Wx Type
Appendix E Fx Type
Appendix F Sx Type
Room
GAR/1
EXTR
40.0
W3
F6
S8
WC
2.0
W1/2
F4
S4
EXTR
40.0
W3
F6
S8
OFF
3.0
W1
F3
WC
2.0
W1/2
EXTR
40.0
ST/F
GAR/2
GAR/3
GUA/1
HOS/1 & HOS/2
SP-1275
Live Load kN/m2
Building
Appendix G Cx Type
Appendix H Dx Type
Appendix I Gx Type
C2
D9
G5
S1
C3
D11
G14
F4
S4
C2
D9
G5
W3
F6
S8
7.5
W7
F14
S4
C1
D8
WC
2.0
W1/2
F4
S4
C2
D9
G5
ALL
2.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D11
G9
EXTR
2.0
W3
F6
S8
WC
2.0
W1/2
F4
S4
C3
D9
G6
BATH
2.0
W2
F4
S4
C3
D9
G6
ST/M
2.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
G5
EXAM
2.0
W1/6
F3
S1
C3
D9
G5
Page 129
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes (contd.) Building
HOS/1 & HOS/2
HOS/3
KIT/1-3
June 2004
Room
Live Load kN/m2
Appendix D Wx Type
Appendix E Fx Type
Appendix F Sx Type
Appendix G Cx Type
Appendix H Dx Type
Appendix I Gx Type
OFF
2.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
G5
ST/H
2.0
W1
F7
S7
C3
D9
G5
MORT
2.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D3
BED
1.5
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
G9
PTRY
3.0
W1/6
F4
S4
C3
D9
G5
RECP
2.5
W1
F3
S1
C3
D2
G-
SL
2.0
W1/6
F4
S4
C3
D9
G6
TRMT
2.0
W1/6
F3
S1
C3
D9
G6
WC
2.0
W2
F4
S4
C3
D9
G6
REDX
2.0
W1/6
F3
S1
C3
D9
G5
WC
1.5
W1/2
F4
S4
C3
D9
G6
EXTR
3.5
W3
F6
S8
KTCH
3.0
W1/2
F4
S4
C3
D2
G5
Page 130
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes (contd.) Appendix E Fx Type
Appendix F Sx Type
Appendix G Cx Type
Appendix H Dx Type
C5
D2
G14
S3
C5
D9
G14
F2
S4
C4
D12
G1
W1
F3
S3
C3
D9
4.0
W1
F5
S4
C5
D1
DINE
4.0
W1
F3
S3
C5
D1
EXTR
5.0
W3
F6
S8
ICE
3.0
W1
F5
S4
C3
D9
KTCH
3.0
W2/9
F3
S4
C3
D11
G5
LNGE
2.0
W1/11
F10
S3
C5
D1
G1
RECP
2.0
W1/11
F3
S1
C3
D1
G1
ST/G
4.0
W1
F8
S4
C3
D9
ST/L
5.0
W1
F2
S4
C3
D12
Room
Live Load kN/m2
LAB/1-3
ALL
3.0
W2
F14
S4
EXTR
3.5
W3
F6
S8
OFF
2.5
W1
F14
BAR
5.0
W1
CLNR
2.0
CORR
MES/1
SP-1275
Appendix D Wx Type
Building
Page 131
June 2004
Appendix I Gx Type
G1
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes (contd.) Appendix E Fx Type
Appendix F Sx Type
Appendix G Cx Type
Appendix H Dx Type
3.0
W12/9
F2
S1
C3
D5
TV
2.0
W1
F10
S3
C3
D3
G1
WC
2.0
W1/2
F4
S4
C3
D9
G6
CLNR
2.0
W1
F3
S3
C3
D9
CORR
4.0
W1
F5
S4
C5
D1
DINE
4.0
W1
F3
S3
C5
D1/6
EXTR
4.0
W3
F6
S8
ICE
3.0
W1
F5
S4
C3
D9
KTCH
3.0
W1/2/9
F3
S4
C3
D11
G5
LNGE
2.0
W1/9/11
F10
S3
C5
D1
G1
RECP
2.0
W1/11
F3
S1
C5
D1
G1
ST/G
4.0
W1
F8
S4
C3
D9
SERV
3.0
W1/2/9
F2
S1
C3
D5
TV
2.0
W1
F3
S3
C3
D3
Room
Live Load kN/m2
MES/1
SERV
MES/2 & MES/3
June 2004
Appendix D Wx Type
Building
Page 132
SP-1275
Appendix I Gx Type
G1
G1
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes (contd.) Building
Room
Live Load kN/m2
MES/2 & MES/3
WC
2.0
MOS/1
DOME
MOS/2 OFF/1 & OFF/2
SP-1275
Appendix D Wx Type W1/2
Appendix E Fx Type F4
Appendix F Sx Type S4
W5
Appendix G Cx Type C3
Appendix H Dx Type D9
C2
ENTR
2.0
W1
F3
S1
EXTR
2.0
W3
F6
S8
PRAY
2.0
W1
F10
WC
2.0
W1/2
PRAY
1.5
CORR
Appendix I Gx Type G6 G7
C3
D12
S3
C3
D12
G3
F4
S4
C3
D9
G3
W1
F10
S3
C3
D9
G-
4.0
W1
F3
S1
C4
D1
G-
ELEC
3.5
W1
F8
S1
C2
D9
ENTR
4.0
W1
F3
S1
C5
D1
EXTR
5.0
W3
F6
S8
FILE
5.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D11
OFF
2.5
W1
F3
S3
C3
D11
Page 133
June 2004
G
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes (contd.) Appendix G Cx Type
Appendix H Dx Type
S1
C3
D9
F5
S4
C3
D9
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
2.5
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
STAND
4.0
W1
F7
S7
C3/5
D9
WC
2.0
W1/2
F4
S4
C3
D9
G6
REC/6
EXTR
3.0
W3
F6
S8
SCH/1 To SCH/3
CLRM
3.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
G-
CORR
4.0
W1
F3
S1
C3/5
D1
DINE
4.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D1
FILE
5.0
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
EXTR
7.5
W3
F6
S8
KTCH
3.0
W1/2
F2
S4
C3
D9
SERV
3.0
W1/2
F2
S4
C3
D3
Appendix D Wx Type
Appendix E Fx Type
Room
OFF/1 & OFF/2
ST/O
10.5
W1
F7
WC
2.0
W1/2
ELEC
3.0
PROJ
REC/5
June 2004
Live Load kN/m2
Building
Page 134
SP-1275
Appendix F Sx Type
Appendix I Gx Type
G6
G7
G-
G-
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes (contd.) Appendix E Fx Type
Appendix F Sx Type
Appendix G Cx Type
Appendix H Dx Type
Room
Live Load kN/m2
SCH/1 To SCH/3
ST/0
5.0/m
W1
F8
S7
C3
STWL
7.5
W7
F8
S1
C3
WC
3.0
W1/2
F4
S4
C5
D9
WKSP
10.5
W1
F8
S7
C2
D1
SHO/1
ALL
7.5/m
W1
F3
S1
C2
D11
& /2
EXTR
5.0
W3
F6
S8
SPO/1
ELEC
3.5
W1
F3
S1
C3
D9
EXTR
4.0
W3
F6
S8
C3
SQCT
2.0
W4
F9
VIEW
4.0
W1
F8
WC
2.0
W1/2
ALL
4.0
EXTR WC
SPO/2
SP-1275
Appendix D Wx Type
Building
D3
C3
D12
S1
C8
D11
F4
S4
C3
D9
W1
F-
S2
C-
D-
4.0
W3
F-
S8
2.0
W1/2
F4
S4
C3
D9
Page 135
June 2004
Appendix I Gx Type
G6
G-
G6
G6
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes (contd.) Appendix E Fx Type
Appendix F Sx Type
Appendix G Cx Type
Appendix H Dx Type
C5
D-
S4
C3
D9
G5
F4
S4
C3
D9
G6
W1
F-
S1
C3/5
D3
W3
F6
S8
W1/2
F4
S4
C3
D9
10/m
W1
F11
S1
C2
D3
EXTR
5.0
W3
F6
S8
ST
5/m
W1
F4
S4
C2
D3
ALL
5.0
W2
F8
S7
C2
D3
EQMT
5.0
W2
F12
C2
D3
EXTR
5.0
W3
F6
S8
WC
2.0
W1/2
F5
S4
C3
D9
Room
Live Load kN/m2
SPO/3 & SPO/4
ALL
4.0
W1
F-
S3
EXTR
4.0
W3
F-
S8
KTCH
3.0
W1/2
F3
WC
2.0
W1/2
ALL
2.5/m
EXTR
2.5/m
WC
2.0
STO/5
ST
STO/6 & /7
STO/1 To STO/2
TEL/1
June 2004
Appendix D Wx Type
Building
Page 136
SP-1275
Appendix I Gx Type
G6/11
G5
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix C: Typical Live Loads & Finishes (contd.) Appendix E Fx Type
Appendix F Sx Type
Appendix G Cx Type
Appendix H Dx Type
C2
D3
S4
C3
D9
F8
S2
C3
D3
W3/10
F6
S8
4.0
W1
F8
S2
C3
D9
OFF
2.5
W1
F8
S2
C3
D11
ST
2.5/m
W1
F8
D9
WARE
2.5/m
W7
F8
D3
WC
2.0
W1/2
F4
Room
Live Load kN/m2
TEL/2
ALL
5.0
W1
F7
S7
EXTR
5.0
W3
F-
S8
WC
2.0
W1/2
F4
CORR
5.0
W1
EXTR
7.5
FILE
WAR/1 To WAR/4
SP-1275
Appendix D Wx Type
Building
Page 137
June 2004
S4
C3
D9
Appendix I Gx Type
G5
G5
G5
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix D: Wall Finishes Type W1
Description Internal Render & Emulsion Paint 15mm cement/sand render applied in two coats. Primed with one coat PVA primer/seal and two coats PVA copolymer based putty filled, rubbed down with fine sandpaper to completely even surface and painted with two coats of washable and steam resistant emulsion paint – Vinyl Silk finish. (It should be noted that while Vinyl Silk finish is specified here this may not be always the case: sometimes Gloss Oil to Dado is required; or Matt finish; or Gloss finish all over, etc., if in doubt check with the Company and hence the Client).
W2
Ceramic Wall Tiles 10mm cement/sand render to blockwork walls applied in two coats. Second coat keyed with cross hatching and combing to receive 152x152x5.5mm glazed ceramic wall tiles. Tiles fixed and grouted with manufacturer’s recommended epoxy based adhesive. All adhesives should be waterproof. Shower grouting should be waterproof and kitchen grouting should be epoxy to prevent growth of bacteria etc. Tiling full height or to heights indicated on drawings. All external angles to be formed using round edged tiles. Round edged tiles to be used at change in wall finish.
W3
Heavy texturised External Paint Fair faced blockwork and fair faced in-situ concrete. Cleaned down and flush pointed. Cement/Sand wash bag rubbed, applied over entire surface and finished to 4.5mm overall thickness with one coat of PVA Copolymer emulsion paint. Emulsion paint priming coat and one coat roller applied heavy texturised external copolymer emulsion paint finish coat. Final texture by sponge or spatula.
W4
Fibrous Epoxy Plaster Fair faced blockwork walls cleaned down and dampened. Finished to 15mm overall thickness with two coats trowel. Fibrous Epoxy Plaster applied in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. Surface blemishes sanded down with fine sand paper. For Squash courts the wall court markings are to be made with polyurethane paint.
W5
Mosque Dome Rendering with steel float finish. One coat of primer sealer, two coats PvA, two undercoats and two coats of full gloss.
W6
Ceramic Tile Splash Backs Splash backs to back and sides of sink/vanity unit to be as specification W2 minimum 3 courses of tiles high x 4 tiles wide unless shown otherwise on drawings.
June 2004
Page 138
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix D: Wall Finishes (contd.) Type W7
Description Fair Faced Block work Fair faced blockwork cleaned down and flush pointed. Cement/sand wash, bag rubbed applied over entire surface and finished with 1 coat PVA Primer/sealer and 2 coats washable and steam resistant emulsion.
W8
Epoxy Glazed Finish Epoxy glazed finish to full height or as shown on Drawings/Instructions.
W9
Corner Gaurds (Stainless Steel Angle) Stainless steel angle corner guards 2.0m long to protect all external angles of walls, including door jambs. Bottom edge level with top of skirting.
W10
Stucco embossed Finish Composite insulated aluminium cladding panels with 0.55m aluminium inner skin with white Stucco embossed (or to clients choice) finish.
W11
Veneer Finish Timber partitions with HW veneer faced ply facing.
W12
Demountable Partition Finish Demountable galvanised steel framed partitions with plastic coated steel face. (A great deal of demountable partitions are also made from gypsum plasterboard covered in vinyl cloth or paper – which can be used as an alternative).
Note:
SP-1275
Refer Appendix C for wall finishes in different buildings and rooms.
Page 139
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix E: Floor Finishes Type F1
Description Vinyl Floor Tiles Size 300m x 300m x 2mm fixed with manufacturer’s recommended bituminous adhesive to cement/sand screed. Overall thickness of tiles and screed 50mm.
F2
Clay Floor Quarry Tiles Size 150mm x 150mm x 12.5mm shot faced clay floor quarry tiles (BS 6431 type A). Bedded and jointed in cement/sand mortar (1:4) on cement/sand floor screed. Overall thickness of tiles and screed 50mm or laid to falls as required.
F3
Pre cast Terrazzo Tiles 300mm x 300mm x 25mm tiles bedded and joined in cement/sand mortar to overall thickness of 50mm. Pointed with matching grout, ground to a high degree of accuracy, polished and sealed on completion with metalized emulsion polish/sealer to manufacturers recommendation.
F4
Non-slip Ceramic Floor Tiles Size 152mm x 152mm x 9.5mm. Fixed with manufacturer’s recommended adhesive to cement/sand screed and pointed with matching epoxy grout. Overall thickness 50mm or laid to falls as required. Matching ribbed step tread tiles to be provided across all shower entrances.
F5
Unglazed Ceramic Floor Tiles Size 152mm x 152mm x 9.5mm. Fixed as item F4.
F6
PC Interlocking Tiles To be specified by the client as there are several different varieties in terms of thickness, sizes, patterns and colours.
F7
Non-slip Granolothic Pavings 40mm minimum thickness granolithic topping applied to matured concrete slab. Concrete slab surface to be cleaned, hacked and wetted and cement grout brushed over entire surface before laying of granolithic concrete. Granolithic concrete to be laid in 15m2 bays and carborundum dust sprinkled and trowelled into finished surface at a rate of 1.5 kg/m2 while still ‘Green’. Granolithic toppings to stairs to be laid monolithically on fresh base concrete within 3 hours and sprinkled with carborundum dust as above. Where indicated as being to falls maximum thickness to be 65mm.
June 2004
Page 140
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix E: Floor Finishes (contd.) Type F8
Description Hardened & Sealed Granolithic Floor 40mm minimum thickness granolithic topping laid monolithically on fresh base concrete (within three hours) and finished with case hardening, dust proofing and oil proofing compound for granolithic floors applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended instructions. Where indicated as being to falls maximum thickness to be 65mm. (Note: Where specified in services cupboard’s or ducts topping can be applied to matured slabs, not monolithically).
F9
Squash Court Flooring Proprietary squash court flooring system comprising semi-resilient under carriage of 50mm x 50mm preservative treated battens at 300mm centres on rubber pads on steel floated concrete floor slab. Maple or beech 25mm thick strip flooring tongued and grooved and secretly nailed to battens. Machine sanded. Court markings applied in polyurethane paint. Entire surface sealed with matt polyurethane varnish (2 coats). This item is not tabulated being a one off item.
F10
Carpet Tiles Size of tiles 500mm x 500mm x 7.3mm. Laid with medium stick latex anti-slip solution on 50mm cement/sand screed, sealed with anti-dust compound.
F11
Epoxy Coated Flooring Two pack high build epoxy coating. Applied onto 50mm cement/sand screed. Wire brushed to remove laitence and filled with solventless filter.
F12
Raised Access Floor (Pedestal Floor) Medium grade raised access floor with vinyl infill. To include MS channel bridging to services trenches. O/A depth 600mm (or as stated) from finished floor level to structural slab level. Weight capacity to be determined. Slab to be finished with non-dusting coating (epoxy coating). It should be noted that if carpet tiles are used then these need to be antistatic.
SP-1275
F13
Flexible Sheet PVC Gymnasium Flooring
F15
Fitted Carpets
Note:
Refer Appendix C for floor finishes in different buildings and rooms.
Page 141
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix F: Skirting Types Type
June 2004
Description
S2
Vinyl tile with toe ‘sit on’ skirtings (pre-formed corners).
S3
Hardwood matching door architecture, minimum 18m x 100mm of even grain and colour. Rounded leading edge, PX65 satin wood stain preservative and ‘Sadotop’ finish.
S4
Coved ceramic tiles with special corners, matching floor tiles.
S5
Wall tiles with right angle butt to floor with 3mm mastic pointed abutment.
S6
Trunking skirting.
S7
Coved Granolithic integral with floor.
S8
Bituminous paint skirting on fair face concrete or block work.
Note :
Refer Appendix C for skirting in different buildings and rooms.
Page 142
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix G: Ceilings Type
Description
C1
Smooth fair face concrete.
C2
Emulsion painted smooth fair face concrete.
C3
Brilliant white textured finish on smooth fair face concrete.
C4
Suspended ceiling, 600mm x 600mm exposed grid self finish acoustic mineral fibre lay in panels.
C5
Suspended ceiling, 600mm x 600mm exposed grid self finish washable mineral fibre lay in panels.
C6
Softwood ‘T’ and ‘G’ chamfered match boarding with secret fixing and clear matt finish (all as detailed).
C7
As C6 but hardwood (all as detailed).
C8
Hardwood framing with ‘Glasal’ white enamel faced panels, HW PX65 wood stain perservative and clear gloss finished (all as detailed).
C9
Insulated sandwich construction profiled aluminium with white shade embossed finish, soffit and coloured polyester externally.
C10
Polyester finished aluminium rib ceiling with or without filler.
C11
Metal lay-in ceiling with exposed grid and bagged sound insulation over.
Note :
1. Access panels shall be provided and coordinated into ceilings and allow proper access to equipment over. 2. Refer Appendix C for ceilings in different buildings and rooms.
SP-1275
Page 143
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix H: Door Types Type
Description
D1
Double Door with middle rail and glazed.
D2
Double Door with half glazing only.
D3
Double Door solid core flush door.
D4
Double Door steel faced flush door.
D5
As D1 and HW louvres.
D6
As D4 single door.
D7
Flush door with flush side panel for wide furniture access.
D8
As D7 with HW louvres.
D9
Single flush door.
D10
Full glazed door.
D11
Half glazed door.
D12
By Specialist.
Note:
1. Doors will vary in width to suit the plan, also where required frames may be storey height and ventilation grilles may be set into the doors. 2. Refer Appendix C for doors in different buildings and rooms.
June 2004
Page 144
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix I: Window Types (Glazing) Type
SP-1275
Description
G1
Low-level fixed lights with high level bottom hung ventilator (1450mm high, 1250mm wide).
G2
Mid height sliding window fixed light over (1200mm wide).
G3
Side hung to floor fixed light over (400mm wide).
G4
Fixed light to floor (400mm wide).
G5
High level, one fixed, one bottom hung (1600mm wide).
G6
High level, bottom hung (800mm wide).
G7
High level, fixed light (1400mm, 800mm, 400mm wide).
G8
Mid height, 2 fixed lights, 2 bottom hung over (1200mm wide).
G9
Mid height, fixed light with bottom hung over (800mm wide).
G10
Mid height, 2 pane fixed (400mm wide).
G11
Mid height, fixed light (400mm wide).
G12
Mid height, two fixed light (1000mm wide).
G13
Low level, one sliding, one fixed (2000mm wide) patio door.
G14
Mid height, double sliding window (1000mm wide).
Note:
Refer Appendix C for window types in different buildings and rooms
Page 145
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix J: Ironmongeries Table 36: Ironmongery Pack Pack 100X75 3 knuckle butt hinges s.s. washers (pairs)
A
B
C
D
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
100x75 Aluminium rising butt rust proof 1 1
1
Mortise security dead lock with escutcheon Bathroom Mortise lock with indicator and extension release
1
Heavy duty roller latch
June 2004
Page 146
G
H
J
1.5
1.5
3
1.5
1
K
L
M
N
1.5
1 1
Mortise latch 5 lever Mortise lock-latch
F
SP-1275
1
O 1.5
1.5
Mortise dead lock with escutcheon Mortise cylinder lock-latch with release turn
E
1
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 36: Ironmongery Pack (contd.) Pack
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
2
2
2
2
2
2
O
Heavy duty magnetic catch Toilet indicator bolt extension release and pull lip Back plate to suit lock with shaped levers and fansorite spindle (pair) 150x19 ‘D’ handle with secret fixing
1 1
1
1
1 1
1
300x19 ‘D’ handle with secret fixing (pair)
1
Flush 75mm cabinet handle and batch set for Squash Court
1
Panic latch with external cylinder lock and latch knob Overhead door closer with hydraulic check & 900 hold
2
1
One way medium duty floor spring (adjustable) with 900 hold
2
Two way medium duty floor spring (adjustable) with 900 hold
1
2 (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 147
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 36: Ironmongery Pack (contd.) Pack
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
1
2
1
2
2
1
2
Perko pneumatic closer with check action Perko spring closer 200mm high kick plates, pair to suit Coat hook – door stop
1
Wall mounted stop or floor stop
1
1
1
2 No. 150 flush lever bolts with anti dirt sockets
2
2
Limit stays Push plate
1
‘M’ of ‘F’ indicator plate
1
Note: All Cylinder locks to have 5 individual keys, 3 Sub-Master keys per block/ floor, 2 Builders Master key, and 1 Grand Master.
June 2004
Page 148
SP-1275
2
O
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 37: Typical Ironmongery Building ACC/1
Room
A
B
BATH
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
O
a
BED
a
DINE
a
DUCT
a
ELEC
a
EXTR
ACC/2
KTCH
a
LNGE
a
ST/K
a
BATH BED
a a
DUCT
a
ELEC
a (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 149
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 37: Typical Ironmongery (contd.) Building ACC/2
Room
A
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
O
EXTR ST/K
ACC/4
B
a
BATH BED
a a
ELEC
a
EXTR SERV
a
ST/K
a
STWL WC ACC/5
a
BATH BED
a a
ELEC
a (Contd.)
June 2004
Page 150
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 37: Typical Ironmongery (contd.) BUILDING
ROOM
ACC/5
EXTR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
O
KTCH LNGE
a
SERV
a
ST/K
a
WC CON/1 - 3
CLNR
ELE/1 & ELE/2
ALL
a a a
EXTR ELE/3
ALL
a
EXTR OFF
a
WC (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 151
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 37: Typical Ironmongery (contd.) BUILDING
ROOM
GAR/1
EXTR
A
WC GAR/2
B
C
D
E
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
O
a
EXTR OFF
a
WC GAR/3
F
a
EXTR ST/F
GUA/1
WC
a
ALL
a
EXTR WC HOS/1
BATH
a
ST/M (Contd.)
June 2004
Page 152
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 37: Typical Ironmongery (contd.) BUILDING
ROOM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
HOS/1
EXAM
a
OFF
a
ST/H
a
MORT
a
BED
a
PTRY
a
RECP
J
K
L
M
N
O
a
SL
a
WC
HOS/2
H
a
TRMT
a
REDX
a
WC
a (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 153
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 37: Typical Ironmongery (contd.) BUILDING
ROOM
KIT/1/2/3
EXTR
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
KTCH LAB/1 & LAB/2
H
J
K
L
M
N
O
a
ALL EXTR OFF
MES/1
a
BAR
a
ST/L
a
CLNR
a
CORR
a
DINE
a
EXTR
a
ICE
a
KTCH
a (Contd.)
June 2004
Page 154
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 37: Typical Ironmongery (contd.) BUILDING
ROOM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
LNGE
H
J
K
N
O
a
SERV
a
ST/K
a
WC
a
TV MES/2 & MES/3
M
a
RECP
MES/1
L
a
CLNR
a
CORR
a
DINE
a
EXTR
a
ICE
a
KTCH
a
LNGE
a (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 155
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 37: Typical Ironmongery (contd.) BUILDING
ROOM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
RECP
MES/2 & MES/3
M
N
O
a
SERV
a
ST/K
a
WC
a
TV MOS/1
L
a
DOME ENTR
a
EXTR PRAY
a
WC
a
MOS/2 OFF/1 To OFF/3
CORR
a
ELEC
a (Contd.)
June 2004
Page 156
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 37: Typical Ironmongery (contd.) BUILDING
ROOM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
OFF/1 TO OFF/3
ENTR
a
EXTR
a
OFF
a
ST/G
a
H
WC REC/5
J
O
a
WC
ALL
N
a
STND
SCH/1 To SCH/4
M
a
PROJ
EXTR
L
a
ELEC
REC/6
K
a a a
EXTR
a
KTCH
a (Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 157
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 37: Typical Ironmongery (contd.) BUILDING
ROOM
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SCH/1 TO SCH/4
SERV
a
ST/G
a
WC
L
M
N
O
a
ALL
a
EXTR SPO/1
K
a
WKSP SHO/1 & /2
J
a
ELEC
a
EXTR
a
SQCT
a
WC
a
VIEW SPO/2
ALL
a
EXTR
a
WC
a (Contd.)
June 2004
Page 158
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 37: Typical Ironmongery (contd.) BUILDING
ROOM
SPO/3 & SPO/4
ALL
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
a
KTCH
a
EXTR
a
WC STO/1 & STO/2
J
a
ALL EXTR WC
STO/5 & /7
ST/E
TEL/1 & TEL/2
ALL
a a
EXTR WC WAR/1 To WAR/4
a
EXTR OFF
a
WARE
SP-1275
Page 159
June 2004
K
L
M
N
O
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix K: Internal Environment Design Criteria 0
Room Temp C
Relative Humidity %RH
Min Fresh Air l/s
Min Air Change Per h
Max Noise Rate NR
Min Illumination Lux
Standard (Std)
24±2
45-60
10/pers
-
-
-
Project Specific
*
*
*
*
*
*
BAR
Std
Std
Std
10
40
200
BATH
“
“
No
6
40
150
BED
“
“
“
No
30
150
BTRY
10-30
No
“
*
45
150
CANT
Std
Std
Std
8
45
200
CHRM
“
“
“
No
40
150
CLNR
No
No
No
“
45
100
CLRM
Std
Std
Std
Std
“35
300
CONF
“
“
“
6
35
300
CORR
No
“
No
No
40
150
Building
Room
Standard Rooms
ALL
(Contd.)
June 2004
Page 160
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix K: Internal Environment Design Criteria (contd.)
0
Room Temp C
Relative Humidity %RH
Min Fresh Air l/s
Min Air Change Per h
Max Noise Rate NR
Min Illumination Lux
Standard (Std)
24±2
45-60
10/pers
-
-
-
Project Specific
*
*
*
*
*
*
CTRL
Std
“
Std
“
35
300
DARK
“
“
No
6
35
*
DINE
“
“
Std
8
40
200
ENTR
“
“
No
No
40
300
FILE
“
“
“
“
40
300
GYM
“
“
Std
“
40
300
ICE
“
“
“
“
45
150
LBRY
“
“
Std
3
35
300
LNGE
“
“
Std
4
35
300
OFF1
“
“
“
4
35
500
OFF2
“
“
“
4
35
500
Building
Room
Standard Rooms
ALL
(Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 161
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix K: Internal Environment Design Criteria (contd.) Room Temp 0C
Relative Humidity %RH
Min Fresh Air l/s
Min Air Change Per h
Max Noise Rate NR
Min Illumination Lux
Standard (Std)
24±2
45-60
10/pers
-
-
-
Project Specific
*
*
*
*
*
*
OFF3
“
“
“
4
35
750
PRAY
“
“
“
No
35
150
PROJ
“
“
No
*
35
150
RECP
“
“
“
No
40
300
RSNT
“
“
Std
8
40
200
SHOP
“
“
No
No
40
300
SQCT
“
“
“
“
40
500
SERV
“
“
“
“
45
150
SH
No
No
“
6
45
150
ST/O
“
“
“
No
45
150
SWGR
30+5
90 max
“
“
45
150
Building
Room
Standard Rooms
ALL
(Contd.)
June 2004
Page 162
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix K: Internal Environment Design Criteria (contd.) Room Temp 0C
Relative Humidity %RH
Min Fresh Air l/s
Min Air Change Per h
Max Noise Rate NR
Min Illumination Lux
Standard (Std)
24±2
45-60
10/pers
-
-
-
Project Specific
*
*
*
*
*
*
TLET
No
No
No
6
45
150
TV
Std
Std
Std
6
35
200
UTIL
“
“
No
No
45
150
VIEW
“
“
“
“
40
150
WAIT
“
“
“
“
40
200
WC
No
No
“
6
45
150
ACC (ALL)
KTCH
Std
Std
No
6
40
300
ANC (ALL)
BAKE
24+4
No
*
*
45
300
CDST
5±1
1“
No
No
45
150
DPFZ
-18± 1?? (depends)
“
“
“
45
150
Building
Room
Standard Rooms
ALL
(Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 163
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix K: Internal Environment Design Criteria (contd.) Room Temp 0C
Relative Humidity %RH
Min Fresh Air l/s
Min Air Change Per h
Max Noise Rate NR
Min Illumination Lux
Standard (Std)
24±2
45-60
10/pers
-
-
-
Project Specific
*
*
*
*
*
*
LDRY
24+4
“
*
*
45
300
ST/K
Std
Std
No
No
40
150
ST/P
“
“
“
“
40
150
AUX
Std
Std
No
No
45
150
CTRL
“
“
Std
“
40
300
EXAM
Std
“
Std
No
35
300
MORT
“
“
No
“
40
150
RECP
“
“
“
“
40
300
REDX
“
“
Std
“
40
300
ST/M
“
“
No
“
40
150
TRMT
“
“
“
“
35
300
Building
Room
Standard Rooms
ANC (ALL)
CON (ALL)
HOSP (ALL)
(Contd.)
June 2004
Page 164
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix K: Internal Environment Design Criteria (contd.) Room Temp 0C
Relative Humidity %RH
Min Fresh Air l/s
Min Air Change Per h
Max Noise Rate NR
Min Illumination Lux
Standard (Std)
24±2
45-60
10/pers
-
-
-
Project Specific
*
*
*
*
*
*
WARD
“
“
Std
“
35
XRAY
“
“
“
“
35
200
KTCH
24+4
90 max
80%
20
40
500
PTRY
Std
Std
No
No
40
150
PREP
“
“
“
10
40
500
ST/K
“
“
“
No
45
150
CORR
Std
Std
No
No
40
150
LABO
“
“
100%
*
40
500
LABW
“
“
100%
*
40
500
ST/B
“
“
*
*
45
150
ST/F
“
“
*
*
40
500
Building
Room
Standard Rooms HOSP (ALL)
KIT (ALL)
LAB (ALL)
(Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 165
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix K: Internal Environment Design Criteria (contd.) Room Temp 0C
Relative Humidity %RH
Min Fresh Air l/s
Min Air Change Per h
Max Noise Rate NR
Min Illumination Lux
Standard (Std)
24±2
45-60
10/pers
-
-
-
Project Specific
*
*
*
*
*
*
REC1
Std
“
Std
No
40
*
REC2
“
“
“
“
40
500
ST/E
“
“
No
“
40
150
ST/L
“
“
“
“
40
150
KTCH
Std
Std
No
6
40
300
ST/B
No
No
*
*
45
150
ST/C
*
Std
No
*
40
150
ST/F
Std
“
“
*
40
150
ST/H
“
“
“
*
40
150
ST/M
“
“
“
6
40
150
ST/T
22±1
50±2
“
No
40
300
Building
Room
Standard Rooms
MES (ALL)
SCHO (ALL) STO (ALL)
WAH (ALL)
(Contd.)
June 2004
Page 166
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix K: Internal Environment Design Criteria (contd.) Room Temp 0C
Relative Humidity %RH
Min Fresh Air l/s
Min Air Change Per h
Max Noise Rate NR
Min Illumination Lux
Standard (Std)
24±2
45-60
10/pers
-
-
-
Project Specific
*
*
*
*
*
*
ST/U
Std
Std
“
“
40
150
WOR/1
WKSP
Std
Std
Std
No
40
300
WOR/2
WKSP
No
No
No
No
45
200
WOR/3
WKSP
Std
Std
Std
No
40
300
WOR/4
WKSP
No
No
No
6
45
200
WOR/5 & /6
WKSP
No
No
No
No
45
200
Building
Room
Standard Rooms WAH (ALL)
Note: * = Project Specific Requirements
SP-1275
Page 167
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Appendix L: Electrical Requirements Table 38: Legend for Electrical Requirements Ref No
Service
Legend
E1
POWER OUTLET
Qty Y = qty as rqd
E2
SHAVER OUTLET
qty
E3
HAND DRYER
qty Y = qty as rqd
E4
LIGHTING
BLD = external ROOM = internal A = automatic
E5
FIRE ALARM M = manual
E6
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
Y = qty as rqd
E7
NURSE CALL
Y = qty as rqd
E8
TELEPHONE OUTLET
Qty
E9
TELEVISION OUTLET
Qty
E10
AIR-CONDITIONED
Y = qty as rqd
E11
MECH VENTILATION
Y = qty as rqd
E12
WATER HEATER
Qty Y = qty as rqd
E13
DRINKING WATER COOLER
Qty Y = qty as rqd
E14
COOKER
Qty Y = qty as rqd
E15
REFRIGERATOR
Qty Y = qty as rqd
E16
INSECTOCUTOR
Qty Y = qty as rqd
Note: * = Means Special Application in the following pages under table 38
June 2004
Page 168
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 39: Electrical Requirements Schedule BUILDING
ROOM
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
E10
E11
E12
E13
Standard Rooms ALL
E15
E16
Y BAR
Y
BTRY
SP-1275
E14
Y
M
Y
A M
Y
1
Y
*
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
CANT
Y
Y
CHRM
Y
Y
CLNR
Y
Y
CLRM
Y
Y
CONF
Y
Y
M
Y
CORR
Y
Y
A
Y
CTRL
Y
Y
M
DARK
Y
Y
DINE
Y
Y
M
ENTR
Y
Y
A
FILE
Y
Y
Y
GYM
Y
Y
Y
Page 169
Y
Y
Y
Y Y Y
Y Y
Y
June 2004
Y Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
*
Y
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 39: Electrical Requirements Schedule (contd.) BUILDING
ROOM
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
E10
ICE
Y
Y
LBRY
Y
Y
LDRY
Y
Y
LNGE
Y
Y
OFF1
4
Y
1
1
OFF2
4
Y
2
1
OFF3
Y
Y
Y
Y
PRAY
Y
Y
PROJ
Y
Y
RECP
Y
Y
M
RSNT
Y
Y
M
SHOP
Y
SQCT SERV
E11
E12
E13
E14
E15
E16
Y
ALL Y
Y
M
Y
Y
M
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
Y Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
Y
Y
1
Y
Y
Y
1
Y
Y
Y
Y 1 Y
Y 1 1
Y
(Contd.)
June 2004
Page 170
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 39: Electrical Requirements Schedule BUILDING
ROOM
ALL
SH ST/O
E1
Y
TLET TV
E2
Y
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
E10
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y Y
UTIL
Y
Y
VIEW
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
WC
Y
ABL
BLD
Y
ACC/1 & ACC/2
BLD
Y
BATH
1
E11
Y
Y
WAIT
Y
E3
4
Y
KTCH
Y
Y
E13
E14
E15
*
1
E16
Y
Y
Y M
Y Y
Y
BED
E12
Y 1
1
Y
Y Y
Y
(Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 171
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 39: Electrical Requirements Schedule (contd.) BUILDING
ROOM
ACC/3
BLD
E1
BATH BED ACC/4 & /5
E2
Y 1
E4
E5
Y
M
E7
1
E8
E9
E10
M
Y
M
ANC (ALL)
BLD
Y
M A
CDST
Y
DPFZ
1
E14
1
E15
E16
1
Y
Y 2
BLD
Y
E13
Y
2
AIR/1
Y
E12
Y
Y
BAKE
E11
Y
Y
Y 1
E6
Y
BLD BED
E3
1
1
1
Y Y
Y
Y
?
Y
*
Y
*
Y
Y
*
Y
*
LDRY
Y
Y
Y
Y
ST/K
Y
Y
Y
ST/P
Y
Y
Y
* (Contd.)
June 2004
Page 172
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 39: Electrical Requirements Schedule (contd.) BUILDING
ROOM
CON (ALL)
BLD
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
Y
M
AUX
Y
Y
CTRL
Y
Y
E6
E7
Y
Y
M
EXP
BLD
Y
*
FIR (ALL)
BLD
Y
A
GAR (ALL)
BLD
Y
M
GUA/1
BLD
Y
HOS (ALL)
BLD
Y
BATH
Y
1 Y
Y
EXAM
2
Y
MORT
2
Y
RECP
2
Y
REDX
Y
Y
E10
E11
E12
E13
E14
E15
E16
Y
BLD
3
E9
Y
ELE (ALL)
BED
E8
Y
Y Y
M
Y
Y
Y 2
1
2
1
1
1 1
M
Y
Y
1
Y
1
Y
(Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 173
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 39: Electrical Requirements Schedule (contd.) BUILDING
HOS/ALL
ROOM
E1
E2
ST/M
1
Y
TRMT
Y
Y
WARD
Y
Y
WC XRAY KIT (ALL)
LAB (ALL)
E3
E4
E5
M
Y Y
BLD
M A
Y
PTRY
Y
Y
PREP
Y
Y
Y
1
Y
Y
E8
E9
E10
E11
Y
Y
E12
E13
E14
E15
E16
*
*
Y
Y 1
1
Y Y
1
Y Y
E7
1
Y
KTCH
E6
Y Y Y
Y
*
Y M
ST/K
Y
BLD
Y
M
Y Y Y
CORR
1
Y
A
Y
LABO
Y
Y
*
Y
Y
*
LABW
Y
Y
*
Y
Y
* (Contd.)
June 2004
Page 174
SP-1275
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Table 39: Electrical Requirements Schedule (contd.) BUILDING
ROOM
LAB (ALL)
MES (ALL)
E4
E5
ST/B
Y
A
ST/F
Y
A
BLD
Y
M
REC
E1
E2
Y
E3
Y
E6
E7
E8
E9
E10
E11
E12
E13
E14
E15
E16
* Y
Y Y
Y
Y
ST/E
Y
Y
ST/L
Y
Y
REC/1-/4
BLD
Y
M
REC/5
BLD
Y
M
REC/7
AREA
Y
M
ROS
AREA
Y
SCH/1-/3
BLD
Y
M
SHO/1
BLD
Y
M
SHO/2
BLD
Y
SPO/1-/3
BLD
Y
SPO/5
AREA
Y
Y
Y
Y M
Y Y
(Contd.)
SP-1275
Page 175
June 2004
Version 1.0
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Table 39: Electrical Requirements Schedule (contd.)
June 2004
BUILDING
ROOM
SPO/6
E1
E2
E4
E5
E12
E13
BLD
Y
M
Y
Y
SPO/7
AREA
Y
STO/1
BLD
Y
A
Y
STO/2
BLD
Y
M
STO/3
BLD
Y
A
STO/4
BLD
Y
M
STO/5-/7
BLD
Y
M
STO/8
AREA
Y
TEL (ALL)
BLD
Y
M
WAR/1 & /2
BLD
Y
M
WAR/3 & /4
BLD
Y
A
WOR (ALL)
BLD
Y
M
Page 176
E3
E6
E7
E8
E9
E10
E11
Y
Y
Y
SP-1275
E14
E15
E16
Specification for Civil & Building Works – Design Criteria Manual
Version 1.0
Appendix M: SP User - Comment Form SP User-Comment Form If you find something that is incorrect, ambiguous or could be better in an SP, write your comments and suggestions on this form. Send the form to the Document Control Section (DCS). They make a record of your comment and send the form to the correct CFDH. The form has spaces for your personal details. This lets DCS or the CFDH ask you about your comments and tell you about the decision. SP Details
Title
Issue Date:
Heading Number:
Figure Number:
Number: Page number: Comments: Suggestions: User’s personal details Name:
Ref. Ind:
Signature:
Date: Phone:
Document Control Section Actions Comment Number:
CFDH
Dates Recd:
Ref. Ind:
To CFDH:
CFDH Actions Recd Date:
Decision:
Inits:
Ref. Ind:
Date:
Date:
Inits:
Reject: Accept, revise at next issue: Accept, issue temporary amendment Comments: Originator Advised:
SP-1275
Date:
Inits:
Document Control Section Advised:
Page 177
June 2004
More Documents from "ayman ammar"
Words In Site.docx
May 2020 1
156284676-sp-1275-civil-design-criteria-manual.pdf
November 2019 2
